Pipecheck User Manual en

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 625

Version 6.0.

0
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TOC

Copyright Statement 21
What's New 22
Pipecheck 6.0.0 22
Enhancements 22
Hardware 22
General 22
Corrosion analysis 23
Dent analysis 23
Bug fixes 25
Enhancements 26
Bug fixes 26
Enhancements 26
Bug fixes 26
Enhancements 26
Bug fixes 27
Enhancements 27
Bug fixes 27
Enhancements 27
Bug fixes 27
New features 27
Enhancements 28
Enhancements 28
Bug fixes 28
New features 28
Enhancements 28
Bug fixes 29

General Information 31
Contextual Help 32
Using the contextual help 32
System General Care 34
Laser Information 36
Laser warning 36
Laser labels 36
HandySCAN BLACK 36
HandySCAN BLACK | Elite 37
HandySCAN 307, HandySCAN 300, HandySCAN 700, 37

Service and Customer Care Program 38


Assistance 40
Contact Us 41
Technical Support 41
Sales Support 41
Creaform Worldwide Offices 41
Creaform Worldwide Offices 42

2
Americas 42
Creaform Inc. Headquarters (Canada) 42
Creaform - Montreal Office 42
Creaform USA Inc. 42
AMETEK do Brasil Ltda 42
EMEA 42
AMETEK SAS - Creaform Division 42
AMETEK GmbH Creaform Deutschland Division 42
AMETEK S.r.l. - Divisione Creaform 42
AMETEK INSTRUMENTOS, S.L.U. - DIVISION CREAFORM 42
APAC 43
Creaform Shanghai Ltd. 43
AMETEK Co., Ltd. CREAFORM B.U. 43
AMETEK Korea Co., Ltd. 43
AMETEK Singapore PTE 43

Using Pipecheck 44
Startup Screen 45
System Requirements 46
Minimum system requirements for HandySCAN BLACK and Go!SCAN SPARK - HP ZBook
17 46
Minimum system requirements for other products - HP ZBook 15 46
Other considerations 47
Software Installation 48
Product Manager 50
Online Services 52
Activation for non-registered users 52
Activation for registered users 52

Software and License Updates 54


To update the calibration file 55
To update the license file 55
To update your hardware license 56
Network license configuration 57

File Formats 59
Scanners 59
Pipecheck 59

Troubleshooting 61
Guided Analysis Mode 66
Interface Overview 67
Configure menu 67
Help menu 67

Distinctive Features 69
Sort criteria 69
To select a feature 69
To clear the selection 69
To redisplay a warning message closed previously 69

3
Sort criteria 69
To select a feature 69

Inspection Units 71
To set units 71
Units representation in the 3D viewer 71
Available unit setting 71
Home Page 73
Short scan 73
Long scan 73

Scan Input 74
Use existing scan 74
Import scan 74
Short Scan 75
Scan Parameters 76
To add a new reference arrow 76
Nominal Information 78
Nominal outside diameter 78
Pipe wall thickness 78
Scanner Calibration 79
Go!SCAN SPARK Calibration 80
HandySCAN BLACK Calibration 82
HandySCAN 307 Calibration 86
If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decalibrated scanner: 87

HandySCAN 3D Calibration 88
If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decalibrated scanner: 89

Scanner Configuration 90
Go!SCAN SPARK Configuration 91
HandySCAN BLACK Configuration 92
HandySCAN 3D Configuration 95
HandySCAN 3D Configuration 97
Scan Target Tips 99
Scan Targets 101
Scan Targets 102
Scan 104
Distance meter 105

Scan Targets 106


Scan 108

4
Scan 109
Scan 111
Distance meter 113

Scan 114
Distance meter 115

Scan 116
Distance meter 117

Edit Scan 118


Delete any of these surfaces : 118
Use the selection tools to: 118
To add section 119
To rename a section 119

Save Session 122


To save the scan session 122
Save Workflow 123
To save a workflow 123
Final Options 124
Scan Action 125
Create Scan Plan 126
Scan Parameters 127
Import targets 127
Unreferenced scan 127
Add a reference 127

Nominal Information 129


Nominal outside diameter 129
Pipe wall thickness 129
Scanner Calibration 130
HandySCAN BLACK Configuration 131
HandySCAN 307 Calibration 134
If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decalibrated scanner: 135

HandySCAN 3D Calibration 136


If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decalibrated scanner: 137

Scanner Configuration 138


HandySCAN BLACK Configuration 139
HandySCAN 3D Configuration 142
HandySCAN 3D Configuration 144
Scan Target Tips 146
Scan Targets 148

5
Scan Targets 149
Scan Targets 151
Scan Targets 153
Validate Scan Plan 155
Scan plan parameters 155
Export Scan Plan 156
To export a scan plan 156
Scan Sections 157
Section Selection 158
Scan Parameters 159
Import targets 159
Unreferenced scan 159
Add a reference 159

Scanner Calibration 161


HandySCAN BLACK Calibration 162
HandySCAN 307 Calibration 166
If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decalibrated scanner: 167

HandySCAN 3D Calibration 168


If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decalibrated scanner: 169

Scanner Configuration 170


HandySCAN BLACK Configuration 171
HandySCAN 3D Configuration 174
HandySCAN 3D Configuration 176
Scan 178
Scan 179
Distance meter 181

Scan 182
Distance meter 183

Scan 184
Distance meter 185

Edit Scan 186


Delete any of these surfaces : 186
Use the selection tools to: 186
To add section 187
To rename a section 187

Save Session 190


To save the scan session 190
Final Options 191

6
Compute Analysis 192
Import Sessions 193
Inspection Parameters 194
Nominal Information 195
Nominal outside diameter 195
Pipe wall thickness 195
Code Selection 196
ASME B31G - 2009 196
Depth analysis only 196
Sflow Parameters 197
Pressure Parameters 199
Interaction Parameters 200
Axial and circumferential criteria 200

Grid Resolution 204


Analysis grid resolution 204
Color Map 205
Feature Status 206
Pit Gauge 208
Approximate length of the longest corrosion pit 208
There is a weld on the scan 208
Corrosion interacting with the weld 208
Pit gauge extensions 209
To move the pit gauge on the surface 209
Boundary pit gauge behavior 210
Optimize two-sided 210
Activate one-sided 210
Automatic 211
Do not use 211
Force symmetric 211

Exclude Area 212


To exclude area 212
Assign excluded area 212
To manually assign an excluded area 212
To unassign an excluded area 213

Analysis Results 215


Items displayed in the 3D viewer 215
3D viewer contextual menu 215
Section views in 2D viewer 216
Items displayed in the 2D viewer 216
2D viewer contextual menu 219
Sort criteria 219
To select a feature 219
To clear a selection 219
To move a feature annotation 220

7
To hide a feature annotation 220
River Bottom Path (RBP) 220
Worst Case Profile 220
Common analysis issues 223
Weld analysis issues 223
Pit-gauge behavior issues 225
Local deformation close to boundary 226

Import ILI 227


To import ILI data 227
Import ILI | Step 2 228
To set the starting point and delimiters using drop-down lists 228
Import ILI | Step 3 229
To set the column locations for the different parameters 229
Reporting 230
Report Type 231
Report Parameters 232
Excel Report Parameters 233
Overview page 233
Feature page 233
General 234
CSV Report Parameters 235
Deepest Points Report Parameters 236
Export Report 237
To export a report 237
Save Session 238
To save a session 238
Save Workflow 239
To save a workflow 239
Final Options 240
Analysis Modules and Reporting 241
Corrosion Module 242
Analysis Type 243
Scan only 243
UT only 243
Scan and UT 243
Scan and manual UT 243
Nominal Information 244
Nominal outside diameter 244
Pipe wall thickness 244
Import Scan 245

8
Edit Scan 246
Delete any of these surfaces : 246
Use the selection tools to: 246
To add section 247
To rename a section 247

Geometry Type 250


Straight 250
Curved 250
Straighten Scan 251
Manual Alignment 254
Move grid 254
Move viewpoint 254
To align the grid 254

Inspection Parameters 256


Code Selection 257
ASME B31G - 2009 257
Depth analysis only 257
Sflow Parameters 258
Pressure Parameters 260
Interaction Parameters 261
Axial and circumferential criteria 261

Grid Resolution 265


Analysis grid resolution 265
Color Map 266
Feature Status 267
Pit Gauge 269
Approximate length of the longest corrosion pit 269
There is a weld on the scan 269
Corrosion interacting with the weld 269
Pit gauge extensions 270
To move the pit gauge on the surface 270
Boundary pit gauge behavior 271
Optimize two-sided 271
Activate one-sided 271
Automatic 272
Do not use 272
Force symmetric 272

Exclude Area 273


To exclude area 273
Assign excluded area 273
To manually assign an excluded area 273
To unassign an excluded area 274

Import UT Data 276

9
To import a format 276
Import UT Data | Step 2 277
Import UT Data | Step 3 278
Import UT Data | Step 4 280
To save the UT data format 280

Add Manual UT 282


Add manual UT data 282
Add Manual UT 283
Analysis Results 285
Items displayed in the 3D viewer 285
3D viewer contextual menu 285
Section views in 2D viewer 286
Items displayed in the 2D viewer 286
2D viewer contextual menu 289
Sort criteria 289
To select a feature 289
To clear a selection 289
To move a feature annotation 290
To hide a feature annotation 290
River Bottom Path (RBP) 290
Worst Case Profile 290
Common analysis issues 293
Weld analysis issues 293
Pit-gauge behavior issues 295
Local deformation close to boundary 296

Import ILI 297


Import ILI data 297
Do not import 297
Import ILI 298
To import ILI data 298
Import ILI | Step 2 299
To set the starting point and delimiters using drop-down lists 299
Import ILI | Step 3 300
To set the column locations for the different parameters 300
Report Type 301
Report Parameters 302
Excel Report Parameters 303
Overview page 303
Feature page 303
General 304
CSV Report Parameters 305
Deepest Points Report Parameters 306

10
Export Report 307
To export a report 307
Save Session 308
To save a session 308
Save Workflow 309
To save a workflow 309
Dent Module 310
Nominal Information 311
Nominal outside diameter 311
Pipe wall thickness 311
Import Scan 312
Edit Scan 313
Delete any of these surfaces : 313
Use the selection tools to: 313
To add section 314
To rename a section 314

Geometry Type 317


Straight 317
Curved 317
Straighten Scan 318
Manual Alignment 321
Move grid 321
Move viewpoint 321
To align the grid 321

Inspection Parameters 323


Analysis Diameter 324
Interactions 325
Use interaction rules 325
Do not use rules 325
Interaction Parameters 326
Depth Color Map 327
Strain 328
Depth analysis only 328
Depth and strain analysis 328
Strain Parameters 329
Strain Color Map 330
Feature Status 331
Analysis Results 333
Items displayed in the 2D viewer and 3D viewer 333
3D viewer contextual menu 333

11
2D viewer contextual menu 334
Section views 334
Dent Apex 338
Point-to-point 338
Feature too close to the edge 339
Feature with data exceeding the critical factor 341

Import ILI 342


Import ILI data 342
Do not import 342
Import ILI 343
To import ILI data 343
Import ILI | Step 2 344
To set the starting point and delimiters using drop-down lists 344
Import ILI | Step 3 345
To set the column locations for the different parameters 345
Report Type 346
Report Parameters 347
Excel Report Parameters 348
CSV Report Parameters 349
Deviation Values Report Parameters 350
Export Report 351
To export a report 351
Save Session 352
To save a session 352
Save Workflow 353
To save a workflow 353
Wrinkle Module 354
Nominal Information 355
Nominal outside diameter 355
Pipe wall thickness 355
Import Scan 356
Edit Scan 357
Delete any of these surfaces : 357
Use the selection tools to: 357
To add section 358
To rename a section 358

Inspection Parameters 361


Analysis Parameters 362
Diameter critical factor 362
Crest to trough critical factor 362

12
Color Map 363
Analysis Results 365
Items displayed in the 2D viewer and 3D viewer 365
3D viewer contextual menu 365
2D viewer contextual menu 366
Section views 366

Report Type 369


Export Report 370
To export a report 370
Save Session 371
To save a session 371
Save Workflow 372
To save a workflow 372
Final Options 373
Pipecheck Classic Mode 375
Key functions: 375
Key functions: 376

Interface Overview 378


Scan functions 378
Mesh editing tools 378
Selection Modes 379
Analysis functions 379
Project management functions 379
To rename a feature 381
Details 381
3D viewer contextual menu 382
2D viewer 382
2D viewer specific mouse controls 382
To resize the display 383

Configuration Options 385


Mouse and Keyboard Controls 387
Pipecheck Parameters 389
General 389
Report - Options 390
Report - Include 391
ILI Features 391
Report - ILI Features 392
To create a new template 393

Acquisition 394
Scan Interface 395
Contextual menu 395

Preparation 397
Scanner calibration 397

13
Scanner configuration 397
Resolution 398
Reference 398
Reference arrow 399
To add a new reference arrow 399
Import targets 400
Unreferenced scan 400
Invert flow 400
Optimize volumetric accuracy 400
Set Common parameters 401
Scanning in Pipecheck 402
Positioning targets colors 402
Recommended scan coverage 402

Editing the 3D Model in Scan Module 403


Nominal dimensions 403
Move grid / Move viewpoint 403
To process the manual alignment 403
To align the grid 403
Mesh editing functions 404

Merge Scans 405


Cylinder Straightening 406
Analysis 409
Analysis 410
Typical analysis workflow 410
Corrosion Module 411
Corrosion Module Interface 412
Contextual menu 413

Editing the 3D Model in Corrosion Module 417


Convex areas 418
To manually assign an excluded area 420
To manually assign the area as a single corrosion feature 421

Corrosion Parameters 422


Parameters used to calculate the Stress flow value 423
To add a verification criterion 424

Corrosion Analysis 432


Critical factor and threshold 432
Axial and circumferential criteria 432
Features details 433
Selecting the feature group 433
Selecting a single feature 434
2D & 3D viewer details 434
Information that can be seen in both 2D and 3D viewer: 434
Analysis tools only displayed in the 2D viewer: 435
River bottom path (RBP) 435
Pit-gauge analysis 435
Corrosion inside dents 436

14
Measuring distances 437
To add a distance 438
Snapshots 438
To add a snapshot 439
To delete a snapshot 439
To set a snapshot to another view 439
Analysis messages 439
Common analysis issues 439

Export Deepest Points 443


Import UT Data 444
To import UT data 444
To define a new format 444
Manual input 446
Examples of different analysis types 448
Navigation panel 449
UT data panel 449
3D Color map 449
To adjust UT data position 450
Analysis 450
Details of UT data imported 450

Dent Module 451


Dent Module Interface 452
Contextual menu 453

Editing the 3D Model in Dent Module 457


To assign a dent area 457

Dent Parameters 460


To add a verification criterion 462
To edit the color map 463

Dent Analysis 465


Analysis workflow 465
Features 465
Feature identification and dimensions 465
Information that can be seen in both 2D and 3D viewer: 467
Depth Color map 468
Features 468
Feature annotations 469
Sections 470
Add sections 470
Display and Details 470
Measurement 471
Radial depth 471
Straight-edge depth 471
ASME B31.8-2018 474
Definition 474
Formulas and variables 474
Radius schema 475
Workflow 475
Strain color map 475
Results 475

15
Strain analysis display 475
Display of the strain sections 476
Axial and circumferential search distance 477
Strain analysis detail 478
Measuring distances 479
To add a distance 479
Snapshots 479
To add a snapshot 479
To delete a snapshot 480
To set a snapshot to another view 480
Feature too close to the edge 480
Feature with data exceeding the critical factor 481

Corrosion Analysis Inside Dents 482


Parent material details and analysis 483
To remove a surface 484
Risks and limitations 484

Export CSV 486


To export deviation values 486
To export an advanced CSV report 487
Default grid: 487
Advanced export grid: 487

ILI Correlation 488


Options available by right-clicking on an ILI feature 490
To group ILI features into cluster 490
Overview 490
Matched features 492

Reporting 494
Corrosion analysis report 494
Worst Case Profile values 496
Dent analysis report 498
2D view of the feature 500
Feature dimensions 501
Depths: Radius measurements at deepest point 502
Depths: Straight edge measurements at deepest point 503
Diameters with caliper 503
Strain-based analysis results 503
Axial sections 505
Circumferential sections 507

Troubleshooting 512
Go!SCAN SPARK 517
Go!SCAN SPARK Hardware and Components 518
Hardware 518
Components 520
Go!SCAN SPARK Multifunction Buttons 521
Go!SCAN SPARK Operating Principles 523
Quick scan 523
Standard scan 523

16
Go!SCAN SPARK Connection 524
Connection steps 524
Go!SCAN SPARK Calibration 526
Go!SCAN SPARK Configuration 528
Go!SCAN SPARK Object Preparation 529
Instructions: 529

Go!SCAN SPARK Acquisition Rules 530


Target or light stripes colors 530
Scanner sides LEDs colors 531

HandySCAN 3D Product Family 532


Previous Generation 533
HandySCAN BLACK 534
HandySCAN BLACK Laser Information 535
Laser warning 535
Laser labels 535
HandySCAN BLACK 535
HandySCAN BLACK | Elite 536

HandySCAN BLACK Hardware and Components 537


Hardware 537
Components 539
HandySCAN BLACK Multifunction Buttons 540
Trigger button [1] light colors 540
HandySCAN BLACK 541
HandySCAN BLACK during acquisition 541

HandySCAN BLACK Operating Principles 542


HandySCAN BLACK Connection 543
Connection steps 543
HandySCAN BLACK Calibration 545
HandySCAN BLACK Configuration 549
HandySCAN BLACK Object Preparation 552
Positioning target application and distribution 552
Example of proper and improper target distribution 552
Highly reflective or transparent objects 552
Small surfaces 552
HandySCAN BLACK Acquisition Rules 553
Target or laser line colors 553
Scanner LEDs colors 554

HandySCAN 307 557


Laser Information 558
Laser warning 558
Laser labels 558

17
HandySCAN 307 Hardware and Components 559
Hardware 559
Components 560
HandySCAN 307 Multifunction Buttons 562
HandySCAN 307 Operating Principles 563
Self-positioning 3D laser scanner 563
Surface acquisition: real-time surface rendering 563

HandySCAN 307 Connection 564


Connection steps 564
HandySCAN 307 Calibration 566
If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decalibrated scanner: 567

HandySCAN 3D Configuration 568


HandySCAN 3D Object Preparation 570
Positioning targets application and distribution 570
Example of proper target distribution: 570
Shiny objects (or black, transparent, reflective) 570
Small surfaces 570
HandySCAN 307 Acquisition Rules 571
HandySCAN 3D Previous Generation 573
Laser Information 574
Laser warning 574
Laser labels 574
HandySCAN 3D Hardware and Components 575
For HandySCAN 307, click here. 575
Hardware 575
Components 576
HandySCAN 3D Multifunction Buttons 577
HandySCAN 3D during acquisition 577

HandySCAN 3D Operating Principles 579


Self-positioning 3D laser scanner 579
Surface acquisition: real-time surface rendering 579

HandySCAN 3D System Connection 580


Connection steps 580
HandySCAN 3D Calibration 582
If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decalibrated scanner: 583

HandySCAN 3D Configuration 584


HandySCAN 3D Object Preparation 586
Positioning targets application and distribution 586
Example of proper target distribution: 586
Shiny objects (or black, transparent, reflective) 586
Small surfaces 586

18
HandySCAN 3D Acquisition Rules 587
For HandySCAN 307, click here. 587

Smart Control 589


Smart Control in Pipecheck 590
General options 590
Go!SCAN SPARK Multifunction Buttons 591
HandySCAN BLACK Multifunction Buttons 593
Trigger button [1] light colors 593
HandySCAN BLACK 594
HandySCAN BLACK during acquisition 594

HandySCAN 307 Multifunction Buttons 595


HandySCAN 3D Multifunction Buttons 596
HandySCAN 3D during acquisition 596

Accessories 598
Creaform Portable Workstation 599
Light Field Pack 604
Charger indicators 605
Battery charge time 605

Field Pack 606


Workstation 608
Protective case contents 609
Connection 609
AC power: 610
DC power 610
Creaform battery 610
Status of LEDs and buzzer 611
To lengthen the battery lifetime (± 5 years): 611
Car battery 611
Scanner 612
Mounting 613
Unmounting 613

Targets 616
Positioning targets 616
Coded targets 616
VXremote Application 617
VXremote Installation 618
To install VXremote 618
VXremote Configuration 619
To change the Splashtop Streamer security code 619
On the computer 619
On the tablet 620

Using VXremote 621

19
VXremote Touchscreen 3D Navigation Modes 623
VXremote Troubleshooting 625
On the Computer 625
On the Tablet 625
Option 1 625
Option 2 625

20
Copyright Statement
© Creaform Inc., [2012-2020]. All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this technical guide may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the written permission of Creaform.
Creaform takes no responsibility if errors or inaccuracies were to appear in this document.
Pipecheck and its logo, as well as VXremote module, HandySCAN 3D and Go!SCAN SPARK are
trademarks of Creaform Inc.
Other marks are the property of their respective owners.
It is totally forbidden to reproduce, duplicate, dissemble, decompile, reverse engineer, sell, transfer or
assign, in any manner the scanner, the software and the system.
 
Pipecheck version 6.0.0
Last modified in July 2020

21
What's New
Pipecheck 6.0.0

Enhancements

Hardware
Go!SCAN SPARK scanner

Integration of the Go!SCAN SPARK scanner in Pipecheck software

80 % less positioning targets to apply on the pipe surface

HandySCAN BLACK scanner

Possibility to perform a more detailed analysis by using a resolution up to 0.5 mm (0.020 in)
instead of the previous resolution of 1 mm (0.040 in.) This enhancement also applies to the
worst case profile resolution in the corrosion analysis

General
New Wrinkle analysis module

New Home Page at the start of the Guided Analysis mode

Scan and analysis workflows are now separated

Workflow optimized by reducing the number of steps

New multiple pipe analysis workflow:

Enhanced workflow in Edit scan step to create multiple pipe sections and analyze them
separately

Faster process for multiple pipe analysis such as boiler tubes

Some default parameters have changed to more commonly used values. The changes will not
affect values if loading an existing template

Parameter changed Pipecheck 5.1.2 Pipecheck 6.0.0


Scan resolution 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) 1 mm (0.040 in.)
Worst case profile
25.4 mm (1 in.) 1 mm (0.040 in.)
resolution
Corrosion interaction rules 12.5 mm x 12.5 mm (0.5 in. x 0.5 in.) 3T x 3T
Corrosion interaction rules Min: 0 Max: 5 Min: 0 Max: 1
Dent critical factor units % Radius % Diameter
Strain critical factor 6% 1%

22
Parameter changed Pipecheck 5.1.2 Pipecheck 6.0.0
Strain axial &
circumferential distances for 50 mm (2 in.) 12.5 mm (0.5 in.)
curvature computation

Units in Guided Analysis mode are now in the Configure menu and no longer in a workflow page

Corrosion analysis
Saving computing time with the new Corrosion analysis algorithm structure, which avoids recal-
culating virtual pit-gauge measurements if other parameters have been changed after the first
analysis. The analysis still must be completely computed if the pit-gauge parameters are
changed.

Example: Pipe length - 18.3 m (60 ft.), Pipe diameter: 609.6 mm (24 in.)

Parameter changed Calculation time (Min:Sec ) Time saved (%)


None: 1st analysis 30:00 N/A
Critical factor 03:15 -89 %
Threshold 02:00 -93 %
Interaction type 00:15 -99 %
Interaction criteria 00:24 -99 %

Depth expressed in %WT (%Wall Thickness) unit is limited to 100 %.

Dent analysis
Strain is now calculated with 2018 Strain equations (ASME B31.8-2018, Appendix R)

Upcoming Pipecheck 6.0.1 will also offer calculations from 2014 equations

New pipe caliper dimensions added to the dent analysis report

Report – Pipecheck 5.1.2 and previous versions (flat calipers only )

Report - Pipecheck 6.0.0

23
New calipers and straight edge images added in Definitions page of the Excel report

Measurement 4- Nominal diameter


Measurements 5 and 6 - Pipe calipers
Measurements 7 and 8 - Flat calipers

When the Use interaction rules option is activated, the dent start and end positions in the Feature
summary (Overview page) will now be set using the calculation method giving the longest dent
dimensions. This method is identified in the Feature ID by the term Crit. Fact. or Straight Edge. In
Pipecheck 5.1.2 and previous versions, the positions were always given using the critical factor
method.

Pipecheck 5.1.2 and previous versions

.0Pipecheck 6.0.0

24
When the Use interaction rules option is activated, Pipecheck will now report the dent dimensions
and positions of both calculation methods (critical factor, straight edge) in each Feature page

Pipecheck 5.1.2 and previous versions

Pipecheck 6.0.0

When creating circumferential shoulder sections, the axial position is added to the section name

Bug fixes
Fixed a bug where it was impossible to change the negative scale unit of a continuous color map

Fixed a few bugs when using Pipecheck with a 4K screen

Fixed a bug where it was sometimes impossible to delete surface after the analysis was done

Fixed specific crash when assigning an Excluded area

Fixed a specific crash when doing UT analysis only on a session containing scan data

Fixed a few minor display issues 

Fixed a bug where the corrosion color map scale was not loaded or saved correctly

The Delete button is now deactivated in workflow mode except on the Edit scan page

Fixed a bug where annotation points would not follow correctly when the Invert flow option
was applied

25
Pipecheck 5.1.2

Enhancements

Option to generate a system information file from Help menu

Units added in 2D view depth profile and in report snapshots

No longer export "anomaly field" in report when option not active in the software (ILI para-
meters)

All strain calculation reports displayed in one page

Effective Maximum Strain value displayed first in the strain analysis report section

Bug fixes

Improved analysis reports

Improved software stability

Pipecheck 5.1.1

Enhancements

New distance meter display option when using a HandySCAN BLACK

Term Critical added for start and end positions of features when using interaction rules in the
mechanical damage analysis report

HandySCAN BLACK scanner supported with version 5.1.1

HandySCAN BLACK firmware update is required with the current and upcoming software ver-
sions (not backward compatible)

Bug fixes

Correction of the position for the negative circumferential value during ILI import

Design factor field has three digits instead of two

UT data offset behavior fixed

Import UT data: missing rows and columns number fixed

Report: snapshots missing fixed

Pipecheck 5.1

Enhancements

Interface and icons redesigned to enhance the visibility

HandySCAN BLACK scanner supported*

26
*MetraSCAN 3D, Go!SCAN 3D and C-Track are not supported anymore.

Bug fixes

Fixed an issue with intermittent crash while switching from corrosion to mechanical damage

Fixed an issue on true wall thickness in color map with new session

Fixed an issue causing crash with huge reference offset

Fixed an issue causing crash with huge spread value while adding manual UT data

Fixed an issue causing intermittent crash at start up with the German version

Fixed an issue causing an intermittent crash when the scanner is on and the Reset scan function
is simultaneously used

Fixed an issue causing a crash in the workflow mode when importing ILI data

Fixed an issue causing a crash in the workflow mode when changing the color scale

Fixed an issue causing a crash when generating a report containing a snapshot

Pipecheck 5.0 SR2

Enhancements

Option Define new workflow available with long scan

Bug fixes

Long scan corrosion analysis issue fixed

Pipecheck 5.0 SR1

Enhancements

Long scan sections can be individually imported

3D rendering speed improved

Bug fixes

Unreferenced cylinder misalignment fixed

Pipecheck 5.0

New features

Full-pipe joint assessment for pipes up to 18 m (60 ft) (workflow only)

Contextual help: context sensitive help with easy access (F1)

Multi-scanner capability for full-pipe joint assessment

27
Analysis and reports are now up to 6 times faster

Capability to disable the B31G code, Modified B31G code and Worst Case Profile for depth analysis

Possibility to lock the axis rotation of the pipe in the 3D viewer

Advanced report parameters available in the workflow

Capability to set the unit for axial and circumferential criteria independently

Enhancements

Round off improvement based on selected digits in the parameters

Max. depth corrosion feature status

Pipecheck 4.1 SR1

Enhancements

Rupture Pressure Ratios (RPR) have now three decimals

Bug fixes

Fixed crash when loading UT data with large offset

When having both 3D Scan & UT, UT has priority and total wall loss is calculated this way : NWT
(Nominal Wall Thickness) – UT (UT Thickness)

Fix occasional crash on Save session when using extend parent material

Fix occasional crash when uploading UT when 3D scan data is present

Pipecheck 4.1

New features

Pipecheck installer now separated from VXelements

No CD-keys needed for installation

Comment text box added to the Guided analysis mode at the Scan parameters step

Enhancements

Corrosion feature report : a second line added for depth value (in % WT)

Possible to show or hide all feature annotations at once

Changed Clear scan for Clear raw data to avoid misunderstandings

Improved speed for Corrosion analysis on long pipes

28
Diameter reduction string changed in Mechanical Damage module

Radial depth (- value)

Radial bulging (+ value)

Bug fixes

Corrupted session fixed happening while saving big session

Fixed a wheel mouse issue when using the Brush selection tool into Edit scan

Fixed a crash when restoring a deleted surface after manually assigning a corrosion feature

Fixed an issue while exporting a CSV file when the flow is inverted

Pipecheck 4.0 SR5

Full screen mode available with the Smart Control

Improved performance and software stability

Corrosion report: the WCP values that are within the effective length appear in red in each fea-
ture report.

Pipecheck 4.0 SR4

Improved performance and software stability

Pipecheck 4.0 SR3

Improved performance and software stability

Pipecheck 4.0 SR2

Color map adjustment available in the Guided analysis view

New shortcut keys available for surface selection tools and for clearing and inverting triangles

Smart Control available with HandySCAN 3D scanner in the Classic View

Pipecheck 4.0 SR1

Possibility to sort features using criteria for display and reporting in Guided analysis view

Workflow edition mode with possibility to make individual workflow pages visible or not when
executing workflow

Mechanical damage module: New color maps displayed giving the quality of the circle fits used in
strain computation

Pipecheck 4.0

New Guided analysis workflow available

29
User interface redesigned with new images and icons

New feature annotations in 2D and 3D viewer

Creation and scan date added to CSV report

Pipecheck 3.3 SR2

More robust alignment which can handle more specific cases

Color map visible in the 3D viewer after a manual entry of UT data

Pipecheck 3.3 SR1

Safe pressure computation: Safe pressure computation now returns minimum between Safe
Pressure and MAOP

Denting report: The value and unit of the critical factor in denting reports have been corrected

Pipecheck 3.3

Corrosion module: Class and naming option added, safe pressure calculation available, feature
status enhancements and new interaction rules units

Mechanical Damage module: Dent size calculation improvement (introduction of interaction cri-
teria for dents, automatic detection of dent shape and size and calculation method based on
Straight edge technique), new strain based visualization and feature status enhancements

New strain based visualization

CSV reporting available

30
General Information
Contextual help
System general care
Laser information
Service and customer care program
Assistance
Contact us

31
Contextual Help
Using the contextual help

The contextual help provides immediate assistance and information about the software main features.
In addition to the contextual help based on the software interface, the Contents tab allows navigating
in books and topics to find information about Creaform devices and accessories.
IMPORTANT: Read the User Manual carefully before use and keep for future reference.

Icons in contextual help manual

Note: Information or explanation given for a better understanding.

Tips: Useful information or advice.

ATTENTION: Information given to prevent a potential problem.

Example: Idea or fact used to explain a notion.

To open or close the contextual help

Click located at the upper-right corner of the interface or

Select Help | Contextual Help in the menu or

Click F1

To update the contextual help


A link will be displayed at the lower-right corner of the interface under the contextual help when a new
version is available.

To find specific information

Click to access the whole help content.

Search tool
In the search tool, enter terms separated by spaces. The results will match all the terms in the query.
Searches are case insensitive and will match exact terms and variations.

32
 1. Enter your query in the upper-right Search box.

 2. Click to see the search results.

Quotation marks can be used around a group of words to get an exact match.

Help toolbar

To open the Printer dialog to send the opened topic to the printer.

To open the previous page placed in the table of contents.

To open the next page placed in the table of contents.

To navigate to the topic previously opened.

To navigate forward to the topic previously opened.

Contents search
The Contents tab lets you explore and navigate to find specific information.

 1. Browse in books or entries by clicking on them to expand or collapse.

 2. Click a topic to display its content.

33
System General Care
Creaform products are made of optical precision parts and must be handled with care to avoid
damaging their internal components and calibration system. They must be carried in their protective
case at all times and must be stored in a dry, dust-free and room temperature environment. We
recommend keeping all devices and accessories in the protective case when not in use.
Prior to starting a project, make sure the working environment is clutter-free and that cables are safely
placed.
Always store the devices following these conditions:

Storage temperature: 5 to 55 °C

Operation temperature: 5 to 40 °C

Humidity: 10 to 90 % non-condensing relative humidity

WARNING: Never open any component of a Creaform technology.

General use

Always use the device in a clean and dry environment.

Avoid direct lighting on the optical parts.

Do not immerse the device.

Do not drop the device and protect it against shocks.

Do not introduce foreign bodies into the device.

Leave the protective caps on unused connectors.

Do not fold cables with a curve radius lesser than 5 cm.

Do not crush cables (do not step on them).

Only use the device with the original power block supplied.

Metal and plastic parts


To clean the device, use a soft cotton cloth with a small amount of water or a soapy solution.

Do not use solvent to clean the device.

Optical parts

34
Spray dry air to remove any particles that may scratch the objectives and lights.

Clean the objectives and lights with a damp cloth such as a non-abrasive optical towel or a
microfiber cloth.

User calibration plate


The user calibration plate should remain in the protective case.
 
 
 
Do not put any object on the case except the custom foam insert. Do not touch the retroreflective
targets. If a target gets damaged, the whole user calibration plate must be replaced.
To clean dirty retroreflective targets:

 1. Spot the target(s) that seem(s) to have some dust or dirt on it.

 2. Soak a cotton swab in a diluted soap solution (never use alcohol).

 3. Gently dab the targets (never rub the targets).

 4. Gently dry the targets by placing a microfiber towel or tissue on the targets (never rub the
targets).

 
 

35
Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product.

Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the beam (direct
or reflected) can damage the retina.

Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

The use of controls, adjustments or procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.
 

Laser labels

HandySCAN BLACK

The laser label reads:


VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 78 mW / < 2.57 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 2.9
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

36
HandySCAN BLACK | Elite

The laser label reads:


VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 123 mW / < 4.06 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 2.9
Laser 3: 450nm / avg < 20 mW / < 0.32 mJ
8.5 ms / 62.5 Hz max / C6: 3.7
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

HandySCAN 307, HandySCAN 300, HandySCAN 700,

The laser label reads:


LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
IEC 60825-1:2007
<1 mW 400-700nm
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

37
Service and Customer Care Program

Read the following terms and conditions before using this product.

Standard warranty
Creaform standard warranty coverage period is 1 year effective from the factory shipping date. This
includes all parts and labor costs for product problems such as material or manufacturing defects.

Customer Care plans


Different care program plans are offered:

Essential

Complete

Complete PLUS

For more details, visit the website or contact "Technical Support" on page 41.

If you purchased a Customer Care plan, refer to your contract for the precise details of what is included,
or contact Sales Support.

Technical support
Our team of highly qualified technical product specialists will assist you with your most complex
projects and will provide advice, tips and tricks on how to fully take advantage of your Creaform
technology.
Technical support is available 24/5.

Software update
Each year, Creaform releases software updates. The customer is responsible for installing it. Creaform is
not liable for any device malfunction due to the installation of software on non-certified Creaform
computers. Refer to the System Requirements section for more details.

Annual test, certification and calibration of the system


It is recommended to contact Technical Support to perform annual maintenance on your system. A
technical product specialist will explain the procedure and provide a RMA number (Return
Merchandise Authorization), confirming where to send the product (Creaform has several repair
centers: HQ [Canada], China, France, Japan). Fill the checklist to determine which part should be sent to
Creaform. Follow the instructions given by the technical support and refer to the checklist prior to
shipping.
The Customer Care Plan allows you to fully take advantage of your high accuracy equipment, con-
solidating your investment by keeping your scanner calibrated and in perfect working conditions.

38
While covered by the Customer Care Plan, you will also be invited to download free upgrades of
Creaform ; these new improved versions guarantee that you remain on the technological edge. Your
equipment could also get quickly serviced, and depending on the plan chosen, you could receive a
loaner unit if the repair is taking longer than expected.

What is not covered

Components, products or items not specifically listed herein

Unauthorized repairs performed by third parties, inaccessible products, theft

Damage caused by conditions beyond Administrator's control such as power surge, rust, cor-
rosion, infestation, negligence, abuse, misuse or acts of God

If you need service


Contact Customer Support if you wish to schedule service.

39
Assistance
The Help menu contains information and tools that can be useful in case assistance needed.

Contextual help
For any questions or concerns regarding the software or any other Creaform technology, refer to the
contextual help (Help | Contextual Help). Information on the software version is available through
the main menu Help | About .
To troubleshoot a problem, take a look at training notes and refer to the contextual help.

Keyboard shortcuts
Refer to Mouse and Keyboard Controls.

Creaform Online Services


See Creaform Online Services section.

Technical support
Contact Technical Support during business hours for customers with a valid maintenance plan. The
feature Create system information file, available under the Help menu, provides relevant information for
Technical Support help in a .txt file.
To contribute to product improvement, send bug report information to technical support using Help |
Send bug report.

Diagnostic mode
This function is made available for Technical Support. It gathers information on the customer's active
products in the case a system issue needs to be resolved. It is accessible from the Help | Diagnostic
mode after receiving the activation key from Customer Support.

Training services
Creaform Campus offers a complete training package including theory, written exercises, hands-on
practice and manuals.
The trainers are highly qualified application specialists which have been certified following a rigorous
internal training program. They use the measurement devices and software they are teaching about on
a daily basis.
Creaform training sessions cover a wide array of metrology-related topics and can take place at a
Creaform office, on your premises, or at any other venue of your choice.
If you need to get training, please visit Creaform web site.

40
Contact Us
Visit our website www.creaform3d.com and register your system to get access to technical doc-
umentation and upgrades on the Customer Center.
 
You can also send us your feedback about the help and software translation by sending an email to
Creaform Technical Writing.
 

Technical Support

creaform.support@ametek.com
 

Sales Support

creaform.supportsales@ametek.com
 

Creaform Worldwide Offices

41
Creaform Worldwide Offices
For complete addresses, see Creaform web site.
 

Americas

Creaform Inc. Headquarters (Canada)


Phone: 1.888.381.0039 | Fax: 1.418.833.9588
 

Creaform - Montreal Office


Phone: 1.514.448.4181 | Fax: 1.418.833.9588
 

Creaform USA Inc.


Phone: 1.888.979.5220 | Fax: 1.418.833.9588
 

AMETEK do Brasil Ltda


Phone: +55.19.2107.4100
 

EMEA

AMETEK SAS - Creaform Division


Phone: +33.4.57.38.31.50 | Fax: +33.4.76.19.04.33
 

AMETEK GmbH Creaform Deutschland Division


Phone: +49.711.1856.8030 | Fax: +49.711.1856.8099
 

AMETEK S.r.l. - Divisione Creaform


Phone: +39.02.89730645 | Fax: +39.02.94693510
 

AMETEK INSTRUMENTOS, S.L.U. - DIVISION CREAFORM


Phone: +34.910.602.312
 

42
APAC

Creaform Shanghai Ltd.


Phone: +86.21.60905288 | Fax: +86.21.60905286
 

AMETEK Co., Ltd. CREAFORM B.U.


Phone: +81.03.4400.2460 | Fax: +81.03.4400.2301
 

AMETEK Korea Co., Ltd.


Creaform B.U.
Phone: +82.31.888.5252 | Fax: +82.31.888.5228
 

AMETEK Singapore PTE


Creaform B.U.
Phone: +65.6484.2388 | Fax: +65.6481.6588

43
Using Pipecheck
Pipecheck is a single software platform addressing pipeline external and internal corrosion and
mechanical damage (dent and wrinkle) assessments. Once acquired with a scanner, data can be
analyzed on site and directly output in a report.
Each Pipecheck system includes the following components:

Protective case

Reference arrow

Hardware license (Pipecheck license)

USB key (reference arrow configuration file)

User manual (software help)

Startup screen
System requirements
Software installation
Product manager
Online Services
Software and license updates
Files formats
Troubleshooting

44
Startup Screen
Select an option at Pipecheck start:

Guided Analysis
Select this option to launch the guided analysis process. This option allows user to perform a step-by-
step analysis by making choices and answering questions as they appear.

Execute Workflow
Select this option to execute a pre-saved workflow (.wct).

Define New Workflow


Select this option to create a new step-by-step analysis template (.wct) without running the analysis.
The new defined workflow will include the sequence of performed steps and the selected parameters.

Edit Workflow
Select this option to edit a pre-saved workflow (.wct).

Open Session
Select this option to open a session (.pcf).

If a guided analysis is stopped and saved during the process, at next opening, the
session file will opened at the step the user left it.

Classic View
Select this option to use Pipecheck in Classic mode and to run an analysis autonomously. This
Pipecheck version is suitable for the advanced users of the software. It can be access anytime during
the guided analysis process.

Some functions are available only in the Classic view.

45
System Requirements
Minimum system requirements for HandySCAN BLACK and Go!SCAN SPARK -
HP ZBook 17

Component Requirement

Computer model HP ZBook 17

Processor1 Intel Core™ i7 (6+ cores) - 2.6 GHz or more


Operating system2 Windows 10 64 bits
Graphics card NVIDIA Quadro P5200, OpenGL 4.5 and higher
Memory 64 GB

Hard drive Solid-state drive (SSD) with at least 200 GB of free space
Display 1920 x 1080

Connecting ports USB 3.0. (see device specifications for more details)
Microsoft Excel3 Excel 2016

For optimal performances, it is recommended to use the laptop connected to its


power supply. Computer batteries are designed based on air transport regulation
which limit their maximum power. This might limit the scanner performances and
the ability to scan at high resolution on battery.

Minimum system requirements for other products - HP ZBook 15

Component Requirement

Computer model HP ZBook 15

Processor4 Intel Core™ i7 (6+ cores) - 2.6 GHz or more


Operating system2 Windows 10 64 bits
Graphics card NVIDIA Quadro P1000, OpenGL 4.5 and higher
Memory 32 GB
Hard drive Solid-state drive (SSD) with at least 200 GB of free space
Display 1920 x 1080

Connecting ports USB 3.0. (see device specifications for more details)
Microsoft Excel3 Excel 2016

46
1 The processor must support AVX2 instructions.
2 32-bit OS are not supported.
3 Microsoft Excel is required for Pipecheck and Pipecheck Analyze.
4 The processor must support AVX instructions.

System performance improves with a more powerful computer.

Non- Creaform supplied computers must be approved by Creaform Technical Support


before purchase. No certification or compatibility guarantee is given for computers provided
by other suppliers than Creaform.
 

Other considerations

The software takes advantage of modern computer architecture. Almost all of its operations are mul-
tithreaded to benefit from the multi-core processors of the computers.
Due to some constraints in Windows, there is a limit to the amount of memory that can be allocated to
a single program. In a 64-bit operating system, the limit depends on the total amount of memory
available in the computer. For example, a computer having 4 GB of RAM will have a 3.7 GB limit.
If the limit exceeds, the software will display an error message prompting you to reduce the resolution
or to remove unwanted data from the scan. The data of the current session will not be lost and will
reappear once resolution is changed and/or data removed. It is recommended to save the session at
this point.

47
Software Installation

Computers supplied by Creaform come with preinstalled software. To install it to


another computer, refer to the System Requirements section and follow the
instructions below.

Installation

To make sure you install the latest version, please use the Online Services.

 1. Download the software installation file.

 2. Double-click the .exe file.

 3. Click Next and Install to install all available features.

 4. Click Finish to finalize the software installation.

 5. Follow instructions and make sure the software license is activated.

Download files online


Products and software up-to-date files can be retrieved on the Customer Center portal. You can
request access by using the Web Access Request Form.

 1. Log in to your account on the Customer Center.

 2. Click on Products tab.

 3. Select the “Select all” check box at the top left of the products table, to select all your products.

 4. Select the software and version you want to use at the bottom of your screen.

 5. Click Generate Download, then Software Download and save the installer on your computer.

 6. Click Download all Licenses & Calibrations and save the “selected-products.zip” file on your
computer.

 7. Launch the installer.

Software uninstallation
To uninstall the software, use the Programs and Features option in the Windows Control panel.

 1. In the Start Menu, click on Control Panel.

 2. Go to Programs and Features.

48
 3. Select the software from the list and click Uninstall.

 4. Follow the instructions to complete the process.

The uninstallation tool allows keeping license and calibration files. If Yes is selected,
calibration and license folders will not be removed.

49
Product Manager
The Product Manager can be accessed to manage the calibration and license files of the scanner. It is
available either through:

 1. Configure | Product Manager

 2. Windows Start menu: All Programs | Software Product Manager

The Product Manager lists all the products installed on the computer. More than 1 product can be
installed on a computer, although only 1 can be activated per session.
If changes are made in the Product Manager while the software is running, a new session must be
created.

To manually add a product to the Product Manager

 1. Click the link Add new product.

 2. Enter the product serial number.

 3. Click Browse and select its calibration file (.cst).

 4. Click Browse and select its license file (.clf).

The calibration and license files can also be downloaded from the Customer Center portal.

Product list
The Product Manager table gives information concerning the , the license and the calibration of the
installed products as well as the active products (product to be used in the next session).

To activate a product
Select the product to use from the Installed products and click on Activate.

To change or delete a product

 1. Select the product from the Products list.

 2. Click Change to change either the calibration file or the license file of the product.

 3. Click Delete to remove the product from the Products list.

Click to force refreshing information for the current product.

License status
The status of the Pipecheck license (hardware license) does not appear in the Product Manager (see
Pipecheck Title bar for the expiration date of your hardware license).

Status symbols in the Product Manager

50
The following table summarizes the different status symbols that can be encountered in the Product
Manager:

Customer
Care Plan Calibration
Status symbol expiration License status date
date column
column
Customer
The
Care Plan is
calibration
Up to date active for The license file is up to date.
file is up to
the
date.
product.
Customer
Care Plan is
Invalid expired for The license file is not valid. N/A
the
product.
Download
latest
Download N/A Download latest license file now.
calibration
file now.
Customer
Calibration
Care Plan
Not found License not found. file not
information
found.
not found.

The name of the product is displayed, in the Product column, if the serial number is found on the
website. If the Product Manager is offline or if the serial number of a product cannot be found on the
website, N/A is displayed.

Restore to factory default


The scanner calibration can be restored to its factory default accessing the Product Manager . This
manipulation cannot be undone and should only be used when the sensor calibration process fails to
optimize properly.
To restore the factory settings, click Restore.
The button becomes available when a .cst extension has changed. For example, when a scanner is
recalibrated.
When using this function, a message appears informing a new scanner has been activated and a new
session has been created with the original .cst.

51
Online Services
Overview
The Online Services link the software with the Customer Center. It allows the users to directly access
their product information, such as Customer Care plan expiration dates, license expiration dates, last
calibration dates, but also to ensure that the license files and software version installed on the
computer are up to date.
Once the Online Services are activated, simple symbols are displayed in the Product Manager to provide a
useful visual feedback to the user giving specific information about his products.

An available internet connection is required to use these services.

Online Services options


The Online Services options are located in the software general options accessible through Configure |
Options menu.

Disconnected services
When the Online Services option is not activated, the Product Manager is not connected to the Customer
Center. Therefore, it only includes the license and calibration files that were previously installed on the
computer. The users must manage their products through the Customer Center. It is also possible for
the user to set the frequency which the software will check for available updates.

To activate the Online Services

Activation for non-registered users

 1. Click the link available in the software options.

 2. A web page opens and a request form is loaded.

 3. Fill in the form and once it is completed, a registration approval email is sent within the next 24
hours.

Activation for registered users

 1. Enter email address and password used at registration.

 2. Check the Remember Password box (optional).

 3. Click OK.

Forgot your password?

 1. Click on the Forgot your password? link in the Online Services options to be redirected to the
Customer Center.

52
 2. Click Forgot your password or need to change your password? in the logon dialog.

 3. Enter your email address and click Reset/Change my password to receive an email with the link to
change your password.

Access to support website


Once the Online Services are activated, the Customer Center can be launched directly from the software
(Help | Customer Center).

Online Services indicators


The main window displays a small indicator, at its bottom left, giving general information about
products:
Indicator Description

Not connected to the Online Services.


No log-in information has been provided and/or the online services have not been enabled
with the check box in the options. Clicking this icon will open the Options window.

Not connected to the Internet.

A software update is available. Click this icon to initiate the download of the new version.

Most recent calibration and/or license file(s) is/are available. At least 1 of the connected
sensors (license and/or calibration file) is not up to date. Click this icon to open the Product
Manager.

The software is connected to the Online Services and the software version, as well as the
entire license and calibration files are up to date.

53
Software and License Updates
The Customer Center portal gives access to several updates.

To carry out an update, the computer must be connected to the Internet.

Software update
The software should be updated each time a service release or a new version is available. All updates
come as a new software installer.

To update the software using automatic download option with Online Services

 1. Click at the bottom left of the screen.

 2. A new update available message will appear.

 3. Click Yes to download and install the update.

To update the software using the Customer Center portal


Products and software up-to-date files can be retrieved on the Customer Center portal. You can
request access by using the Web Access Request Form.

 1. Log in to your account on the Customer Center.

 2. Click on Products tab.

 3. Select the “Select all” check box at the top left of the products table, to select all your products.

 4. Select the software and version you want to use at the bottom of your screen.

 5. Click Generate Download, then Software Download and save the installer on your computer.

 6. Click Download all Licenses & Calibrations and save the “selected-products.zip” file on your
computer.

 7. Launch the installer.

To get access to a software update, Creaform systems and products must be


under active Customer Care plan.

Calibration file update


Each time a product is factory calibrated, a new calibration file is created. The latest version is available
online (or on the USB stick provided with a new scanner). Since that file is related to the product
calibration process, it does not have to be changed after a software update.

54
To update the calibration file
Automatic method

 1. In the Product Manager, make sure to be connected to the Online Services.

 2. Click next to the calibration file to update.

Manual method

 1. Connect to the Customer Center.

 2. Find the product by entering its serial number in the text field and click Apply.

 3. Click on the arrow in the Calibration tab.

 4. Access to the Product Manager to change the calibration file.

License file update


License files are linked to the software version. They must be updated for each new version only (not
for service releases). License files loaded for previous versions will be displayed as Invalid version.
A 90- day license is provided with every new scanner. After that period, a user license is issued.
Subsequently, updates are required to continue using the software.

To update the license file


Automatic method

 1. In the Product Manager, make sure to be connected to the Online Services.

 2. Click next to the license file to update.

Manual method

 1. Make sure to download and install the latest available version of the software.

 2. In the Customer Center, find the product by entering its serial number in the text field and click
Apply.

 3. Click on the arrow in the License tab.

 4. Access to the Product Manager to change the license file.

The license expiration date appears in the Device Bar located above the main menu.
 

Hardware license
Some customers purchased their software with a hardware license. To run the software, the hardware
license must remain plugged in one of the computer USB port during the whole process.

55
To update your hardware license
Automatic method

 1. In the Product Manager, make sure to be connected to the Online Services

 2. Make sure that the dongle is connected to the computer. If not, the product won't show up in
the list (dongle only).

 3. Select the product line of hardware license to update.

 4. Click Update.

Manual method

 1. Before starting, make sure to have your dongle serial number in hand.

 2. Go to the Customer Center and log on to your customer account.

 3. Find the product using its unique hardware serial number.

 4. Click on the arrow in the License tab to download the executable .cku file corresponding to your
hardware.

 5. Connect your hardware to your computer.

 6. Double-click on the executable file to update your hardware license.

A message should appear telling you that the update has been completed successfully.

Software license
Some customers purchased their software with a software license. The license must be activated in the
Product Manager.
How to activate, update or deactivate your software license

Activate: Click Activate to activate your license the first time you use it.

Update: Click Update whenever a new version has been released or if your license is about to
expire.

Deactivate: Click Deactivate whenever you need to deactivate your license from a computer and to
reactivate it on a different computer.

Network license
Some customers purchased their software with Network license. The network license must remain
plugged in one of the computer USB port during the whole process.
 

56
Network license configuration
The following steps describe the complete setup of the network license:

 1. Drivers installation on the host machine

 2. Installation of the software on users computer

 3. Network configuration on user's computer

 
Section 1: Driver installation on the host machine

If the software is installed on the host machine, the Section 2 replaces the steps 1 to 4, since the
drivers are automatically installed with the software.

 1. Download the files here:

for Windows

for Linux

 2. Extract the files (unzip or untar).

 3. Install the file:

for Windows: Double click on the install.bat file.

for Linux: Run the Install file as root.

 4. Windows only: There will be 2 operations. Click on OK after each.

 5. Open a web browser and make sure the page http://localhost:1947/_int_/devices.html is
loading.

 6. Connect the network dongle and make sure it appears in the above browser page.

 
Section 2: Installation of the software on user computer

All the files required to use Creaform products can be retrieved on https://support.creaform3d.com/.
If you do not have an account yet, request one using the following form: https://sup-
port.creaform3d.com/en/web-access-request.aspx.

 1. Log in your account on the support portal.

 2. Click on Products.

 3. Find your product serial number assigned to the network dongle.

 4. Click the download icon under the software section.

57
 5. Launch the installer.

 6. Finish the installation with default parameters.

Or for a silent installation of the software:

 5. Launch the Windows PowerShell as Administrator.

 6. Start-Process -FilePath [INSTALLERPATH] -Verb runAs -ArgumentList '/s','/v"/qn"'

 
Section 3: Network configuration on user computer

 1. Open a web browser and go to the page http://localhost:1947/_int_/config.html

 2. Go to Access to Remote License Managers.

 3. Check all 3 options:

Allow Access to Remote Licenses

Broadcast Search for Remote Licenses

Aggressive Search for Remote Licenses

 4. Verify the IP address of the host machine (where the dongle is connected).

 5. Enter this IP address in the Remote License Search Parameters field.

 6. Click Submit.

 7. Make sure the network dongle is detected (http://localhost:1947/_int_/devices.html)

Those changes are saved under C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Aladdin


Shared\HASP\hasplm.ini

 8. Copy the updated file to each user computer.

58
File Formats
Scanners
Installation files File format Description Location
Scanner caibration file serial.cst Contains the calibration data of the USB key
scanner. Customer
Changes after a factory calibration. Center
Scanner license file serial.cst Required the calibration to use the USB key
scanner. Customer
The license expiration date is shown Center
in Pipecheck title bar and in the
Product Manager.

Linked to the software version.

Pipecheck
Installation files File format Description Location
Pipecheck installer Pipecheck.exe Required for Pipecheck installation. USB key

Linked to the software version. Customer


Center
Pipecheck license Dongle.cku Required to use Pipecheck. Dongle

The license expiration date is Customer


shown in Pipecheck title bar. Center

Linked to the software version.


Reference arrow 5800xx.prf Required to reference a scan using USB key
calibration file
the arrow. Customer
Center

 
Input/Output files File format Description
Pipecheck session .pcf Contains the scanned surface, positioning targets,
scanner and analysis parameters, analysis results.

Can be saved or opened in Pipecheck.

59
Input/Output files File format Description
Positioning targets .txt Positioning model built from the scanned targets.

Can be imported or exported (see Import Targets


section).
Parameters template .pct Contains particular scan and analysis parameters.

Can be exported or imported.


Workflow template .wct Contains a particular workflow with related settings
and steps.
Depth values .csv Table listing depth values of a particular area of the
pipe.

Can be exported for various analysis outputs.


ILI data .csv Contains the ILI features: positions size, depth and
pressure to correlate with Pipecheck.
UT data .csv and .txt Contains thickness or depth measurements.
Report .xls and .csv Excel worksheet or CSV (Comma Separated Value) file
containing the analysis results.
Mesh and surface .stl, .txt, .obj, .zpr, Contains the triangles produced by the scan in
.wrl, .ply, .x3dz,
.x3d, .ma, .dae and Pipecheck.
.fbx.
Can only be exported.

60
Troubleshooting
This section provides solutions to common error and warning messages encountered in Pipecheck.
When an error or warning message in encountered, the 2D viewer will highlight the areas related to
the issue. The message window needs to be opened.

Global warning messages

In the Guided analysis mode, the error messages are displayed in the feature
annotation.

Pipecheck will show some warning messages in case of issue which affects the whole analysis. For
instance, if Pipecheck finds that the pit-gauge sits in corrosion, it will try to add some extensions
automatically. If that cannot be done because the user limited the number of extensions that can be
added, Pipecheck will prompt an error message telling that the pit gauge length is too small.
To display the concerned areas :

 1. Do not close the error message.

 2. Click on the 2D viewer.

 3. The highlighted colors display the concerned areas.

Specific warning messages


When an error message appears in a precise annotation, left click on the warning message to get a
similar display of the possible error.

Memory related error messages


Located at the bottom right side of the screen, the memory allocation status bars display the use of
random access memory (RAM) and graphics processing unit (GPU). During scanning, try to maintain

61
the GPU use under 70 %, as subsequent processing steps require additional memory usage.
As explained in the System Requirements, due to some constraints in Windows, there is a limit to the
amount of memory that can be allocated to a single program. If the limit exceeds, the software will
display an error message.

Error message Solution


A GPU error occurred. Surface could not
be reconstructed but scan data has not Save the session. Close the software and reopen the session to
been lost. Save the session and reopen it recover scan data.
to recover data.

Critical GPU memory. Surface could not be  1. Select and delete unwanted areas of the scan to free
reconstructed but scan data has not been up memory to continue scanning with the current
lost. Stop the scan and decrease the
surface resolution and apply to recover resolution.
data.
 2. If the first solution does not work, decrease
Out of GPU memory. Surface could not be resolution (i.e. increase triangle size value) under the
reconstructed but scan data has not been Scan Parameters. Select and delete unwanted areas of
lost. Stop the scan and decrease the
surface resolution and apply to recover the scan. Increase resolution (i.e. decrease triangle
data. size value) to the original value.

Error messages
Appear when a particular setting prevents analysis to function properly.
Category Error Message Explanation Solution
Installation A component is missing for this The scanner module required to use the Launch the
file: [serial number] *.cst. Pleasescanner activated in the Product Manager is software installer
reinstall your application with not installed on the computer. and add the CD
support for this sensor model. key of the
scanner you plan
to use.
Parameters Incorrect diameter (Event ID #1). The diameter calculated from the scanned Adjust the value
surface is significantly different from the entered for the
nominal diameter entered in the analysis pipe diameter in
parameters. the Parameters
dialog. Scan a
larger area to get
better diameter
estimation. Verify
that the scanned
area does not
include welds or
extrusions.
Parameters Parameters must be greater than 0. Some of the parameters entered by the user Adjust the
must be greater than 0 for the analysis to be parameters
possible. entered in the
Parameters
dialog.

62
Category Error Message Explanation Solution
Parameters Resolution must be set to a value This is the lowest available value for the scan Adjust the value
(scan) greater than or equal to 0.20 mm resolution. entered for the
(0.008 in). scan resolution
in the Scan
Parameters. If
you own an
Pipecheck , use
the High
Resolution
function to
improve the
resolution (4x).
Corrosion The threshold value for the The Threshold for corroded area cannot be Adjust the value
analysis corroded area must be inferior to bigger than the critical factor.  entered for the
the critical factor. Threshold for
corroded area
and the critical
factor.
General The current operation must be This problem rarely occurs, most of the time In Scan Module,
stopped because an internal error because the software lost the connection go to Scan |
has occurred. with the scanner while scanning. Scanner | Test to
get more
information on
the problem.
Verify that the
scanner is well
connected to the
computer.
General An unknown error has occurred in This problem can come from different Click Save Error
Pipecheck. sources and occurs rarely. Report and send
it to Pipecheck
Technical
Support. Click
Continue to save
your session.

Warning messages
Appear to advise the use of a non-recommended setting. The analysis can still be run if you choose to
continue with these settings.
Category Warning Message Explanation Solution
Parameters Scan resolution has changed. Click The scan resolution can be changed before
Approve or
(scan) OK to reconstruct surface. Click or after scanning the pipe. If changed after,
cancel the
Cancel to revert to previous scan the surface must be reconstructed using the
resolution
resolution. new resolution. Analysis results will be lost.
change.
Parameters Pit gauge length too small Some areas of the pipe could not be Increase the
(corrosion) (Event ID #1004).  measured because the maximum pit gaugemaximum
length is too small (see Pit Gauge). extension count
in the Pit Gauge
There are too many excluded areas and parameters
no extension can be used over the tab. Redefine the
corroded area. excluded areas. 

63
Category Warning Message Explanation Solution
Parameters Pit gauge length too small for Some area of a manually forced corroded Increase the
(corrosion) forced corroded area area could not be measured because the
maximum
(Event ID #1001). maximum pit gauge length is too small.
extension
Some excluded areas are preventing
count in the Pit
the use of extensions over the force
Gauge
corroded area.
parameters
tab.
Reduce the
length of the
forced
corroded area.
Redefine the
excluded areas.
Parameters Some areas could not be measured Some regions of a manually forced corroded Increase the
(corrosion) (Event ID #1002).  area could not be measured by the pit gauge
maximum
because no none-corroded areas have been
found to sit the pit gauge. extension
count in the Pit
Gauge
parameters
tab.
Redefine the
forced
corroded area.
Parameters Pit gauge was extended across Additional extensions have been added to Same as for
(corrosion) forced corroded area (Event ID the pit gauge to cover the entire forced warning #1001.
#1003). corroded area (shown in red in the 2D
viewer)
Parameters Some areas could not be measured Some areas could not be measured by the Redefine the
(corrosion) (Event ID #1005).  pit gauge because a convex area was found forced corroded
inside the manually forced corroded area. area.
Scan Not enough valid points for The scan does not contain enough valid Scan a larger
(corrosion) analysis (Event ID #1006). points to use the pit gauge. The corrosion surface of the
analysis cannot be completed. pipe before
trying a new
analysis.
Scan Section cannot be analyzed (Event Some excluded areas are too close to each Redefine the
(corrosion) ID #1010). other and the pit gauge does not fit between excluded areas.
them.

64
Category Warning Message Explanation Solution
Scan (dent) Feature too close to the edge The software has identified an area that is Verify the edges
(Event ID #2001). deeper than the critical factor diameter and of the scan. If a
located on the edge of the scanned surface. dent has not
been completely
scanned, the
analysis results
could be
affected.
Complete the
scan if required.
If the identified
area does not
belong to the
dents you want
to analyze, you
can ignore the
warning.
Scan (dent) Feature has no data exceeding The analyzed area has no data exceeding the Change the value
Critical Factor Critical factor. It is therefore impossible to of the Critical
(Event ID #2002). perform a dent analysis. factor. Verify the
area selected
with the Assign
Dent Area
function.
Analysis (dent) No critical data found (Event ID No point on the surface has a deviation Change the
#2004). exceeding the critical factor. critical factor to a
lower value.
Installation Scanner module discarded (Event If you open a session created with a scanner Launch the
ID #3001).  package that is not installed on the software installer
computer, it will be discarded from the and add the CD
session. You will not be allowed to scan, but key of the
you will be able to run an analysis and scanner used
export results. when creating
the session.
Installation Analysis discarded when opening The session was saved with a different Save the
session file version of Pipecheck. The analysis will be
session with
(Event ID #3002). discarded, but can be launched again. No
acquired data will be lost. the latest
version of
Pipecheck.
Run a new
analysis.

65
Guided Analysis Mode
The Guided Analysis mode allows to perform a step-by-step analysis of corrosion, dent or wrinkle on
pipeline.

At any time in the workflow, options that are not available are grayed out.

Interface overview
Distinctive features
Inspection units
Home page
Scan Input

66
Interface Overview
Menu
Main options contained in the simplified menu:
Icon Action Description
New guided This command allows creating a complete new step-by-step analysis. User must define all
analysis parameters, answer questions and perform actions.
Open session This command allows opening a session.

Save session This command allows saving the current session.

Save session as This command allows saving the current session by renaming it or by saving it in a
different location.
Remote mode This command allows using VXremote application.

Contextual Help To open the contextual help.

Configure menu
VXremote To activate VXremote. VXremote must first be enabled through the Configure |
Options menu (Network SSID and security key fields filled).
Calibration journal To export the Calibration journalwhich is a .csv file containing session information
such as the date and time, the user name, device model, serial number and session
results. It is also possible to visualize the calibration journal or to delete it through this
menu.
Product manager To access the Product manager.
Parameters manager To Import, Export, Set as default or Remove an Analysis parameters file (.pct).
Units To set a range of units depending on needs. Click Save as default to save the units
selection as default settings.
Options See Configuration Options.

Help menu
Diagnostic mode To gather information on the active products in the case a system issue needs to be
resolved.
Keyboard shortcuts List of available keyboard shortcuts.
Creaform Online Services To access the Creaform Online Services.
Contextual help To open Contextual Help.
About Version and installed components information.
Create system information To create a .txt file that includes relevant information for technical support help.
file
Send bug report To troubleshoot issues on the computer.
Launch remote session To contribute to product improvement by sending information to Creaform technical
support.

Access button to Classic View


Click Classic View button to toggle to the classic view.

Select | New guided analysis in the main Menu to return to the Guided Analysis mode.

67
Page title
The page title is the header that identifies the page. Every page corresponds to a specific step
displayed in the Progress bar.

Main instruction
This section contains text that explains to the user what to do on the page. The user will be asked to
make selections and choices or to enter settings.

Content area
This area contains the information and inputs which are selected or entered by the user at each step of
the workflow. That information is necessary to perform the chosen analysis. The content area mainly
includes text boxes, drop-down lists, command buttons, option buttons, etc.

Tip panel
A tip panel displays notes and gives information that can help users during the guided analysis
workflow.

Progress bar
The Progress bar shows the progress of the workflow by providing the progress details. It indicates the
user location in the sequence.

Back/Next buttons
Allows to return to the previous step.

Used to save the information of the current page and to go to the next step of the workflow. This button
is missing on a page if the requested action is not completed.

Show/Hide tool
This tool is used to intentionally hide some pages during the execution of the pre-saved workflow.

To do so, click the icon (upper right side of the interface) before defining each page. Once clicked,

the icon will turn .

68
Distinctive Features

These features are only available through the Guided analysis.

Long pipe corrosion analysis


Corrosion analysis of pipe of 3000 mm or more.
See how to scan and analyze long pipe.

Wrinkle analysis
See wrinkle analysis module.

Analysis results Sort criteria

Sort criteria
User can sort feature using the Sort criteria dropdown list in the Feature navigation panel.

To select a feature

Click on a feature in the list of the Features Navigation panel or

Click on a feature in the viewer.

Use Ctrl+Click for multiple feature selection.

To clear the selection

Click .

To redisplay a warning message closed previously

Click .

Report Parameters Sort criteria

Sort criteria
User can sort feature using the Sort criteria drop-down list in the Report Parameters step.
Thus, the exported report will display the selected features using the chosen criteria.

To select a feature

Click on a feature in the list.

69
Use Ctrl+Click for multiple feature selection.

70
Inspection Units
Set the units to use to perform the analysis. Units selected will be used all along the analysis.

To set units

 1. Go through the menu Configure | Units in Guided Analysis mode.

 2. Set the units.

 3. Click Save as default to make the default save units.

 4. Click OK.

Units representation in the 3D viewer

Available unit setting

 1. Length unit for position: Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter, Inch, Foot

 2. Length unit for size: Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter, Inch, Foot

 3. Depth unit: Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter, Inch, Foot, %WT, %Diam, %Rad

71
 4. Use length units for position as the angle unit for position: Select to use the 1. Length unit for
position instead the angle. unit.

 5. Angle unit for position: Radian, Degree, Clock, Clock (H:M)

 6. Use length unit for size as angle unit for size: Select to use the 2. Length unit for size instead
the angle unit.

 7. Angle unit for size: Radian, Degree, Clock, Clock (H:M)

 8. Temperature unit: Celsius, Fahrenheit

 9. Pressure unit: MPa, psi, kPa, Bar

 10. Volume unit: Cubic Millimeter, Cubic Centimeter, Cubic Meter, Cubic Inch, Cubic Foot

72
Home Page
Scan

Short scan
Select this option to analyze a pipe scan of 3000 mm or less.

Long scan
Select this option to analyze a pipe scan of 3000 mm or more.

At least, a minimum diameter of 152,4 mm is recommended for long scan.

This option allows to only analyze corrosion on a long pipe. Each scanned
sections will be saved as a single Pipecheck session. If needed, those sessions can
be individually imported using the short scan option.

Example
When scanning a full pipe joint, a dent is observed on section 3.
As it is impossible to analyze the denting using the long scan option, user must
import the scan of the section 3 in the dent assessment of the short scan
workflow.

Analyze and report


Select the required module to perform the analysis.

Corrosion
Dent
Wrinkle

One analysis can be performed per work session. Consequently, if a corrosion


feature and a dent are founded on the same pipe, two different analysis must be
done.
To analyze corrosion on a dent, refer to the Classic mode of the software.

73
Scan Input
Use existing scan

Select this option to use the existing scan.

Import scan

Select this option to import a scan (.stl file) from an existing session.
Only the scan surface is imported. Parameters and the scan positioning of the session are not
imported.

Unavailable options are grayed out.

74
Short Scan
Scan a pipe scan of 3000 mm or less using:
Go!SCAN SPARK
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 3D

75
Scan Parameters
Resolution: The Scan resolution can be adjusted allowing to reach the desired detail level.
Approx. recommended max. scan length: Value set by default. It is the value corresponding to the
approximate maximum length for optimal scan accuracy.
Reference: The pipe can be scanned using 1 of these referencing modes.
Add a reference
The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the flow direction.
This mode is activated by selecting an arrow in the reference drop-down list or by importing a new one.

To add a new reference arrow

 1. Select Add... in the reference drop-down list.

 2. Select the configuration file of the reference arrow (.prf).

 3. Once imported, the selected reference arrow becomes the default referencing mode.

Place the magnetic reference arrow provided with your scanner on the pipe, parallel to the pipe axis,
pointing in the flow direction (down flow). The axial and circumferential origin of the scan will
correspond to the center of its flat extremity.

 1. Origin

 2. Flow direction

 3. Target

The 4 targets of the reference arrow appear in the 3D viewer when launching the Scan function. The
reference arrow must be scanned first; once its 4 targets have been properly detected, remove the
reference arrow and scan the surface under it. The surface of the reference arrow will be automatically
removed from the final 3D model.

Always carry the reference arrow in its protective case; its targets should never
been touched. If the arrow or its targets get damaged, it will no longer be
detected correctly.

The origin of the analysis grid can be offset from the one of the reference arrow by defining an offset
value measured between the arrow origin and a known position on the pipe (e.g. GPS coordinates or a
pipe section join).

76
The reference arrow is displayed in the 2D viewer and the 3D viewer where it is positioned. It can also be
displayed in a report.

Invert flow: Select to invert the flow direction of the pipe model. It is particularly useful when scanning
in the Unreferenced scan mode to define the desired flow direction. This option can be modified before
or after scanning the pipe.
Unreferenced: Set the axial and circumferential reference position.

77
Nominal Information
Nominal outside diameter

The Nominal outside diameter must correspond to the real diameter of the pipe. For instance 323.85 mm
(12.75 in) must be entered for a 300 mm (12 in) nominal pipe. For internal scans, the outside diameter
still have to be used.

Pipe wall thickness

The pipe wall thickness (NWT) must be entered in the Thickness field.

78
Scanner Calibration
Go!SCAN SPARK
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 3D

79
Go!SCAN SPARK Calibration
Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to
the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An
annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The
calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to
fourteen (14) positions as indicated by the shadow of the scanner in the 3D viewer.

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets of the user calibration
plate.

The calibration file is stored on the scanner. If the calibration file is newer on the
scanner, upon starting a new scan session, it will prompt a message to update the
calibration file. Click Update to replace the calibration file in the Product Manager
by the file on the scanner. Best practice suggests to calibrate whenever
environment conditions change, even if the update has been processed.

To optimize the scanner calibration

 1. Click in the System panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration. Alternatively, use the Smart Control to launch calibration.

 2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter. Position the scanner at approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

 3. Press the trigger button to start.

 4. Aim at the center of the target pattern and normal to the plate. Slowly move the scanner away
from the plate, matching the scanner shadow in the 3D viewer. Once 10 measurements are
taken, take 4 measurements at an angle from the plate by slightly tilting the scanner towards
the right, left, top and bottom of the plate.

 5. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

80
Best practice suggests to perform calibration with the plate inside the case.

 
If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decalibrated
scanner:

Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, please contact Creaform Technical Support for further assistance.

If user wants to review previous calibration results or when the last calibration
was performed, a calibration journal is available through Configure | Calibration
journal | Visualize.

Restore to the factory settings


It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

81
HandySCAN BLACK Calibration
Acceptance Test
As specified in the ISO 10360 standard, Creaform performs an acceptance test before the delivery of the system
to certify that it meets the specifications. Creaform does not guarantee the performance of its equipment out-
side the scope and timing of the aforementioned test since the equipment is outside its control or supervision.
Reverification Test
In order to validate that the system complies with specified requirements, ISO 10360 standard recommends to
perform a reverification test periodically. Customer has the responsibility to determine the frequency of this test.
Creaform recommends, as a starting point, to perform this reverification annually.
Interim Check
The ISO 10360 standard recommends to perform an interim check between periodic verifications to demonstrate
the probability that the system complies with specified requirements. The customer must take into account the
interim check results to assess if a reverification test needs to be executed at one of the Creaform service cen-
ters.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to
the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An
annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The
calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to
fifteen (15) positions as indicated by the shadow of the scanner in the 3D viewer.

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets of the user calibration
plate.

The calibration file is stored on the scanner. If the calibration file is newer on the
scanner, upon starting a new scan session, it will prompt a message to update the
calibration file. Click Update to replace the calibration file in the Product Manager
by the file on the scanner. Best practice suggests to calibrate whenever
environment conditions change, even if the update has been processed.

To optimize the scanner calibration

 1. Click .

 2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter. Position the scanner at approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

 3. Press the trigger button to start.

 4. Aim at the bar code for the first measurement, then at the center of the target pattern and
normal to the plate. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the scanner

82
shadow in the 3D viewer. Once eleven (11) measurements are taken, take 4 measurements at an
angle from the plate by slightly tilting the scanner towards the right, left, top and bottom of the
plate.

 5. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests to perform calibration with the plate inside the case.

It is possible to scan under sunlight but calibration might not be possible to


complete under direct sunlight as it can create expansion of the plate. Use a
canopy for faster calibration.

83
Expected results
According to the scanner used, the calibration value should be below:

0.043 mm (HandySCAN BLACK)

0.035 mm (HandySCAN BLACK | Elite)

This value can be defined as the RMS error of the targets position. It represents the scanner stability
over time and should not vary by much. A higher value cannot be directly linked to a less accurate unit,
as long as it is within the limit value. The limit value is calculated based on the volumetric accuracy spe-
cification using the user calibration plate diagonal length.

If the value obtained is above said values, it is recommended to recalibrate the


scanner. If the value is still above, contact Creaform Technical Support for further
investigation.

 
If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decalibrated
scanner:

Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, please contact CreaformTechnical Support for further assistance.

84
Restore to the factory settings
It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

85
HandySCAN 307 Calibration
Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to
the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An
annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The
calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to
fourteen positions represented by the 3 green indicators (3D viewer).

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets of the user calibration
plate.

To optimize the scanner calibration

 1. Click .

 2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter. Position the scanner at approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

 3. Press the trigger button to start.

 4. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the positions describe in the viewer.
Once 10 measurements are taken perpendicular to the plate, take 4 measurements at an angle
from it.

For the first 10 measurements, stay normal to the plate. Try to maintain the red indicator
of the top and left bars as centered as possible. As for the right bar, it goes up each time
a measurement is successfully taken.

For the last 4 measurements, move the scanner at an angle from the plate to match the
red indicator of the top, left and right bars as centered as possible in the green
rectangular. The blue circle indicator must be aligned on the green circle in the middle of
the user calibration plate as well the blue circle's cross must be aligned with the green
indicators.

 5. Click OK to accept the optimization.

86
Best practice suggests to perform calibration with the plate inside the case.

It is important to position the scanner lengthwise during the calibration


otherwise, the optimization will not work.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decal-
ibrated scanner:

Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, please contact Creaform Technical Support for further assistance.

Reset to the factory settings


It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

87
HandySCAN 3D Calibration
To optimize the scanner calibration

 1. Click .

 2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter. Position the scanner at approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

 3. Press the trigger button to start.

 4. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the positions describe in the viewer.
Once 10 measurements are taken perpendicular to the plate, take 4 measurements at an angle
from it.

For the first 10 measurements, stay normal to the plate. Try to maintain the red indicator
of the top and left bars as centered as possible. As for the right bar, it goes up each time
a measurement is successfully taken.

For the last 4 measurements, move the scanner at an angle from the plate to match the
red indicator of the top, left and right bars as centered as possible in the green
rectangular. The blue circle indicator must be aligned on the green circle in the middle of
the user calibration plate as well the blue circle's cross must be aligned with the green
indicators.

 5. Click OK to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests to perform calibration with the plate inside the case.

88
It is important to position the scanner lengthwise during the calibration
otherwise, the optimization will not work.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decal-
ibrated scanner:

Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, please contact Creaform Technical Support for further assistance.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to
the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An
annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The
calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to
fourteen positions represented by the 3 green indicators (3D viewer).

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets of the user calibration
plate.

Reset to the factory settings


It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

89
Scanner Configuration
Go!SCAN SPARK
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 3D

90
Go!SCAN SPARK Configuration
Automatic shutter
Since reflection properties differ from a surface to another, the Automatic shutter option allows the
scanner to automatically adjust its camera shutter speed while scanning for better surface detection. It
works well if the light pattern is entirely contained within the object, otherwise it can be used as an
initial approximation tool.

91
HandySCAN BLACK Configuration
To configure the scanner

 1. Click .

 2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the
trigger button.

A distance meter [1] on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between the
scanner and the object.

 3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

 a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the System panel so the laser
grid pattern [2] is as yellow as possible.

 b. For parts having a uniform color/texture, click the Auto. adjust button and hold the
scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing Parameters message
disappears.

Laser lines must lie only on the part surface. If the part is smaller
than the laser grid pattern size, the slider Scanning area % can be
used to reduce the size of the pattern.

92
Distance meter [1] colors

Colors Scanner position Action


    too close move backward
  correct -

    too far move forward

Laser grid pattern [2] colors

Color Status

The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras. There
underexposed is not enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a
mesh.

The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface calculation is done
optimal
under ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser
saturated lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface
reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise in the data.

Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the con-
figuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The cameras shutter time
according to the surface type should be set before scanning. Configuration parameters can
be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition process, through the System
panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the Smart Control.
Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

Right-click in the grey window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

Click the Save preset link.

To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

To activate a preset: Click the preset.

To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.15 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surfaces. Even darker
surfaces can be acquired with the default value.

93
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests to set
the shutter time value based on the surface color and finish, otherwise the scanning results will be
affected. We recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi-shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change
the shutter value, and finish the scan.

94
HandySCAN 3D Configuration
Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the con-
figuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The laser power and the
cameras shutter time according to the surface type should be set before scanning. Con-
figuration parameters can be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition pro-
cess, through the System panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the
Smart Control.
To configure the scanner

 1. Click .

 2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the
trigger button.

 3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

 a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the System panel so the laser
grid pattern is as yellow as possible.

 b. For parts having a uniform color or texture, click the Auto. adjust button and hold the
scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing Parameters message
disappears.

Laser grid pattern colors

Color Status

The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras. There
underexposed is not enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a
mesh.

95
Color Status

The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface calculation is done
optimal
under ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser
saturated lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface
reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise in the data.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

Right-click in the grey window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

Click the Save preset link.

To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

To activate a preset: Click the preset.

To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.60 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surface. A flat black
surface usually requires a higher shutter value.
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests to set
the shutter time value based on the surface color and finish, otherwise the scanning results will be
affected. We recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi-shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change
the shutter value, and finish the scan.

96
HandySCAN 3D Configuration
Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the con-
figuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The laser power and the
cameras shutter time according to the surface type should be set before scanning. Con-
figuration parameters can be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition pro-
cess, through the System panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the
Smart Control.
To configure the scanner

 1. Click .

 2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the
trigger button.

 3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

 a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the System panel so the laser
grid pattern is as yellow as possible.

 b. For parts having a uniform color or texture, click the Auto. adjust button and hold the
scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing Parameters message
disappears.

Laser grid pattern colors

Color Status

The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras. There
underexposed is not enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a
mesh.

97
Color Status

The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface calculation is done
optimal
under ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser
saturated lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface
reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise in the data.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

Right-click in the grey window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

Click the Save preset link.

To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

To activate a preset: Click the preset.

To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.60 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surface. A flat black
surface usually requires a higher shutter value.
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests to set
the shutter time value based on the surface color and finish, otherwise the scanning results will be
affected. We recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi-shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change
the shutter value, and finish the scan.

98
Scan Target Tips
Surface preparation
Basic recommendations for good quality scans:

Clean the surface with sandblasting before scanning to remove dirt and corrosion residues.

Cover the surface with powder or white paint if the surface is shiny (optional).

Place positioning targets


The positioning targets must be applied randomly on the pipe surface prior to scanning. They are used
by the software to calculate the position of the scanner relatively to the pipe surface.
Pipe diameter Recommended distance between targets
Ø > 25 cm Place the targets about 8 to 10 cm from each other.
Ø ≤ 25 cm Place the targets about 5 to 7 cm from each other.

Ø ≥ 8 cm
Ø < 8 cm If the scanning environment allows it, use a target board instead of placing targets on the pipe. The
board must not move relative to the pipe while scanning.

Try placing the targets on non-damaged spots to avoid missing useful data when scanning. If it
is impossible, try to put the targets on less deep spots, to avoid hiding the deepest point of a
feature.

Make sure there are no damaged or dirty targets as it will affect the quality of the scan.

Try placing the targets further than 3 mm from the edges.

Avoid placing targets in a line.

A minimum of 6-8 targets detected is recommended at all time during the scan.

A minimum of 4 targets must be detected at all time (short scan).


However, a minimum of 6 detected targets is mandatory in the long scan process.

99
 1. Target not detected

 2. Target detected

The color of positioning targets


and laser lines is different using
the HandySCAN BLACK. See
Scan Targets using a
HandySCAN BLACK section for
more information.

Additional targets can be added while scanning, as long as the others are not
moved.

100
Scan Targets
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 3D

101
Scan Targets
Scan positioning targets
Scan the positioning targets to create a positioning model before scanning the pipe surface.

Icon Function Action


Start scanning To start the scanning process.

Stop scanning To stop (or pause) the scanning process.

Reset scan To clear the session scan data. Parameters will not be
reinitialized as in New session.

Minimum recommended scan coverage

 1. Scan 15 cm (6 in) of undamaged surface around the inspected zone.

 2. Acquire a circumferential area of 60° (2 hr).

See acquisition rules sections for more information.

Scan parameters
Scanner Parameters
This panel displays the connection status and the date of the last scanner calibration.
Shutter: This option is used if the part to scan is not detected by the scanner, or with parts of different
colors and/or reflection properties.
Configuration preset: Select a value from the list to set the configuration. The list of values can be
predefined through the configuration function. It can be useful when scanning similar objects in
similar light condition.

Color of positioning targets


Color Description

Recorded, but not seen or used in the last image.

Recorded and seen or used in the last image.

The scanner position is too close. Move forward.*

102
Color Description

Recorded and seen.

The scanner position is correct.*

Recorded and seen or used in the last image.

The scanner position is too close. Move backward.(1)

Recorded.

Not referenced to the origin or the other targets.

Will be deleted after a stop scan if not linked to the other targets.

(1) When the Project distance meter on scan function is enable.

Contextual menu
Other options are available using the contextual menu. A right-click in the viewer gives access to
available options.
Function Description
Lock Viewpoint To bring the viewpoint to the position it was on the latest acquisition. After zooming on a
detail or losing the current view, it enables seeing the whole scan in the 3D viewer.
Lock Zoom To set the zoom level while following the scanner movements. It is useful when scanning
small details.
Fit to Screen To center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.

103
Scan
Scan the surface
Icon Function Action
Start scanning To start the scanning process.

Stop scanning To stop the scanning process.

Reset scan To clear the session scan data. Parameters will not be reinitialized as
in New session.

Optimize volumetric This function considers all the positioning targets observed to
accuracy optimize their position.

Scanner parameters
Shutter: This option is used if the part to scan is not detected by the scanner, or with parts of different
colors and/or reflection properties.
Configuration preset: Select a value from the list to set the configuration. The list of values can be
predefined through the configuration function. It can be useful when scanning similar objects in
similar light condition.

Mesh display
Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Triangles

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display. This option is available when editing the scan
or when an analysis was performed.

General display options


Quick rendering while moving: To reduce image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.

3D viewer display
Items displayed in the 3D viewer:
Item Default Note
Scanned surface Gray facets Can be displayed as Mesh or Wire Frame (see the Display Settings section of
the 3D viewer).
Flow direction White arrow The orientation can be inverted in the Scanning Parameters.
Reference arrow   The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the
flow direction.

Contextual menu

104
Other options are available using the contextual menu. Right- click in the viewer gives access to
available functions.
Function Description
Lock Viewpoint To bring the viewpoint to the position it was on the latest acquisition. After zooming on a
detail or losing the current view, it enables seeing the whole scan in the 3D viewer.
Lock Zoom To set the zoom level while following the scanner movements. It is useful when scanning
small details.
Lock rotation axis Allow the rotate the scan only around the rotation axis.
Fit to Screen To center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.
Standard View To set the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow

3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

Acquisition rules
See acquisition rules section.

Start scanning
Use this function to launch and stop the scan process.

Distance meter

Red / Yellow LEDs to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

Dark Blue / Light Blue LEDs to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

105
Scan Targets
Scan positioning targets
Scan the positioning targets to create a positioning model before scanning the pipe surface.

Icon Function Action


Start scanning To start the scanning process.

Stop scanning To stop (or pause) the scanning process.

Reset scan To clear the session scan data. Parameters will not be
reinitialized as in New session.

If a reference arrow is selected in the Scan parameters, the 4 targets will be


displayed.

Minimum recommended scan coverage

 1. Scan 15 cm (6 in) of undamaged surface around the inspected zone.

 2. Acquire a circumferential area of 60° (2 hr).

See acquisition rules sections for more information.

Color of positioning targets


Color Description

Recorded, but not seen or used in the last image.

Recorded and seen or used in the last image.

 
Recorded.

Not referenced to the origin or to the other targets.

Will be deleted after a stop scan if not linked to the other


  targets.

Contextual menu
Other options are available using the contextual menu. A right-click in the viewer gives access to
available options.

106
Function Description
Lock Viewpoint To bring the viewpoint to the position it was on the latest acquisition. After zooming on a
detail or losing the current view, it enables seeing the whole scan in the 3D viewer.
Lock Zoom To set the zoom level while following the scanner movements. It is useful when scanning
small details.
Fit to Screen To center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.

107
Scan
Go!SCAN SPARK
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 3D

108
Scan
Scan the surface
Icon Function Action
Start scanning To start the scanning process.

Stop scanning To stop the scanning process.

Reset scan To clear the session scan data. Parameters will not be reinitialized as
in New session.

Finalize To finalize the scan.

Scanner parameters
Automatic Shutter: Default option that makes the scanner automatically adjust its camera shutter speed
for better surface acquisition.

Mesh display
Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Triangles

Wire Frame

Transparent

General display options


Quick rendering while moving: To reduce image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.
Project distance meter on scan: To display laser lines or light stripes in different colors according to the
distance from the object.

Color Scanner position Action


  too close move backward
  correct -
  too far move forward

Positioning method
Standard scan: Select for longer scan of 360 degrees. At least 2 targets are required to be seen by the
scanner at any given time.
It is also possible to use a Target only option. This option is mainly used for large diameter pipes and
requires at least 4 targets to be seen.

109
Quick scan: Select for short scan of 180 degrees or less over a maximum length of 3-4 feet. It uses a
combination of texture, geometry and targets to track on the pipe. A scan using only the Pipecheck
arrow can be done, depending on the damage or the surface.
Targets only tracking: Select this option when scanning large diameter pipes. Using this option will
require at least 4 targets to be seen.

110
Scan
Scan the surface
Icon Function Action
Start scanning To start the scanning process.

Stop scanning To stop the scanning process.

Reset scan To clear the session scan data. Parameters will not be reinitialized
as in New session.

Scanner parameters
Shutter: This option is used if the part to scan is not detected by the scanner, or with parts of different
colors and/or reflection properties.
Configuration preset: Select a value from the list to set the configuration. The list of values can be
predefined through the configuration function. It can be useful when scanning similar objects in
similar light condition.

Mesh display
Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Triangles

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display. This option is available when editing the scan
or when an analysis was performed.

General display options


Quick rendering while moving: To reduce image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.
Project distance meter on scan: Default option which enables the distance meter on scan function. Clear
the selection to indicate the distance using a meter on the left side of the 3D viewer.

3D viewer display
Items displayed in the 3D viewer:

Item Default Note


Can be displayed asMesh or Wire Frame (see the Display Settings section
Scanned surface Gray facets
of the 3D viewer).
Flow direction White arrow The orientation can be inverted in the Scanning Parameters.

111
Item Default Note
The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the
Reference arrow  
flow direction.

Contextual menu
Other options are available using the contextual menu. A right-click in the viewer gives access to
available functions.

Function Description
To bring the viewpoint to the position it was on the latest acquisition. After zooming on
Lock Viewpoint
a detail or losing the current view, it enables seeing the whole scan in the 3D viewer.
To set the zoom level while following the scanner movements. It is useful when scanning
Lock Zoom
small details.
Lock rotation axis Allow the rotate the scan only around the rotation axis.

Fit to Screen To center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.
Show inside
Available with an internal scan. It allows displaying the color map of the internal surface
deviations on
on the external one for a better visualization.
outside surface

To set the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow
Standard View 3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

Acquisition rules
See acquisition rules section.

Start scanning
Use this function to launch and stop the scan process.

112
Distance meter

Red / Yellow LEDs to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

Dark Blue / Light Blue LEDs to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

113
Scan
Scan the surface
Icon Function Action
Start scanning To start the scanning process.

Stop scanning To stop the scanning process.

Reset scan To clear the session scan data. Parameters will not be reinitialized as
in New session.

Optimize volumetric This function considers all the positioning targets observed to
accuracy optimize their position.

Scanner parameters
Shutter: This option is used if the part to scan is not detected by the scanner, or with parts of different
colors and/or reflection properties.
Configuration preset: Select a value from the list to set the configuration. The list of values can be
predefined through the configuration function. It can be useful when scanning similar objects in
similar light condition.

Mesh display
Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Triangles

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display. This option is available when editing the scan
or when an analysis was performed.

General display options


Quick rendering while moving: To reduce image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.

3D viewer display
Items displayed in the 3D viewer:
Item Default Note
Scanned surface Gray facets Can be displayed as Mesh or Wire Frame (see the Display Settings section of
the 3D viewer).
Flow direction White arrow The orientation can be inverted in the Scanning Parameters.
Reference arrow   The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the
flow direction.

Contextual menu

114
Other options are available using the contextual menu. Right- click in the viewer gives access to
available functions.
Function Description
Lock Viewpoint To bring the viewpoint to the position it was on the latest acquisition. After zooming on a
detail or losing the current view, it enables seeing the whole scan in the 3D viewer.
Lock Zoom To set the zoom level while following the scanner movements. It is useful when scanning
small details.
Lock rotation axis Allow the rotate the scan only around the rotation axis.
Fit to Screen To center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.
Standard View To set the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow

3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

Acquisition rules
See acquisition rules section.

Start scanning
Use this function to launch and stop the scan process.

Distance meter

Red / Yellow LEDs to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

Dark Blue / Light Blue LEDs to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

115
Scan
Scan the surface
Icon Function Action
Start scanning To start the scanning process.

Stop scanning To stop the scanning process.

Reset scan To clear the session scan data. Parameters will not be reinitialized as
in New session.

Optimize volumetric This function considers all the positioning targets observed to
accuracy optimize their position.

Scanner parameters
Shutter: This option is used if the part to scan is not detected by the scanner, or with parts of different
colors and/or reflection properties.
Configuration preset: Select a value from the list to set the configuration. The list of values can be
predefined through the configuration function. It can be useful when scanning similar objects in
similar light condition.

Mesh display
Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Triangles

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display. This option is available when editing the scan
or when an analysis was performed.

General display options


Quick rendering while moving: To reduce image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.

3D viewer display
Items displayed in the 3D viewer:
Item Default Note
Scanned surface Gray facets Can be displayed as Mesh or Wire Frame (see the Display Settings section of
the 3D viewer).
Flow direction White arrow The orientation can be inverted in the Scanning Parameters.
Reference arrow   The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the
flow direction.

Contextual menu

116
Other options are available using the contextual menu. Right- click in the viewer gives access to
available functions.
Function Description
Lock Viewpoint To bring the viewpoint to the position it was on the latest acquisition. After zooming on a
detail or losing the current view, it enables seeing the whole scan in the 3D viewer.
Lock Zoom To set the zoom level while following the scanner movements. It is useful when scanning
small details.
Lock rotation axis Allow the rotate the scan only around the rotation axis.
Fit to Screen To center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.
Standard View To set the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow

3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

Acquisition rules
See acquisition rules section.

Start scanning
Use this function to launch and stop the scan process.

Distance meter

Red / Yellow LEDs to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

Dark Blue / Light Blue LEDs to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

117
Edit Scan
Some surfaces have to be deleted prior to the analysis process. The remaining surfaces must have only
a curvature in one direction.

Delete any of these surfaces :


Trailing edges.

Other element that does not belong to the main surface.

Isolated mesh patches.

Use the selection tools to:


Delete unwanted areas.

Modify the resolution of an area.

Clean the edge of the scan.

Once the scan is edited, click Next to accept.


Examples:

To edit scan

 1. Select a selection tool in the mini-toolbar.

 2. Hold Ctrl+Click and make the selection.

 3. To deselect a part of the selection, use Ctrl+Shift+Click.

 4. Once the scan is edited, click Next to accept.

Edit scan function is available during or after the scan acquisition.

Mesh display

Table 5-1 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

118
Triangles

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display. This option is available when an analysis was
performed.

General display options


Quick rendering while moving: Reduces image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.

Sections for analysis


Whole model: Default option which meant the whole model will be analyzed. Add section to analyze a
specific section and/or multiple sections.

To add section

 1. Select a selection tool in the mini-toolbar.

 2. Hold Ctrl+Click and make the selection.

 3. To deselect a part of the selection, use Ctrl+Shift+Click.

 4. Click Add in the Sections for analysis section.

By default, a name is given with a numeric suffix incremented by one.

To rename a section

 1. Double-click the section name.

 2. Enter the new name.

 3. Press Enter.

Although it is possible to add several sections, only one analysis can be done at a
time. Once a section analysis process is started, if another section is selected, a
new analysis will started and the analysis of the previous section will be lost.
Make sure to save each analysis done.

Selection tools
Selection tools are available through the mini toolbar which is in the upper left corner of the 3D viewer.
It can be displayed in Compact or Expanded mode using the drop-down arrow. To change the display
mode, click the ▼ in the mini toolbar and select the required display mode.

119
Function Description

Rectangle: To create a rectangular shape selection. Hold Ctrl and left-click, and release it when the
selection is completed.

Free-form: To create a free form selection (lasso). For a straight line contour, hold Ctrl and left-
click.For a free curve contour, hold Ctrl and hold the mouse left button. Once the selection is
completed, right-click to end it or release the Ctrl key.
Brush: This tool allows a brush shape selection (square, circle, oval and so on) with customized
thickness.For a straight line, press Ctrl+the mouse left button.For a free curve, press Ctrl and hold
the mouse left button.Once the selection is completed, right-click to end it or release the Ctrl key.
The Brush size slider allows adjusting the thickness.

Connect: This tool allows to select all triangles connected to a given triangle.

Sudden change: This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to others until sudden curvature
change appears in the mesh using Ctrl+Left mouse button.

Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.


Similar curvature: This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to other triangles with same
curvature.

Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.

Select through: This tool allows to select all the triangles within an area, even those on a different
layer.

Select target with surface: This tool allows to select target (s) with surface.

Select backface: This tool allows to select in the negative normal of the mesh in addition to the
positive normal.

Clear selection: This tool allows clearing the current surface selection.

Inverse selection: This tool allows inverting the current selection; unselected surface will be selected.
In opposition, selected surface will no longer be part of the selection.

Grow selection: This tool increases the current selection size by adding a layer of triangles for each
mouse click (1 triangle in every direction).

Shrink selection: This tool decreases the current selection size by removing a layer of triangles for
each mouse click (1 triangle in every direction).

Editing tools
Icon Function Description

Delete To delete the selected triangles on the scan surface.

120
Icon Function Description

Delete To delete permanently isolated patches that are not connected to the main object. It is
isolated possible to delete isolated patches while scanning.

Increase To increase the selected triangles resolution. Option available with the HandySCAN 3D
resolution scanner (307/700).

Decrease To decrease the selected triangles resolution. Option available with the HandySCAN 3D
resolution scanner (307/700).

Mandatory operation that optimizes the scan surface prior the analysis. It applies the
Finalize Optimize volumetric accuracy function when it is selected. Option is available using a
HandySCAN BLACK scanner.

Contextual menu
Function Description
Lock rotation axis Allow to rotate the scan only around the pipe axis.
Centers and displays the entire scan data in the center of the 3D
Fit to screen
viewer.
This function is available with an internal scan. It allows displaying
Show inside deviations on outside
the color map of the internal surface on the external one for a better
surface
visualization.

Sets the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow
Standard view 3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

121
Save Session
To save the scan session

 1. Click .

 2. In the Save session dialog, in the Folder pane, choose the location and folder where to save the
file.

 3. In the File name field, type the file name.

 4. In the Save as type list, accept the default file type (.pcf).

 5. Click Save.

122
Save Workflow
Save a specific session workflow (.wct file). The structure and parameters will be saved.

To save a workflow

 1. Click .

 2. Navigate through the Export Workflow Data dialog box and choose the folder to save the file.

 3. Type the file name.

 4. Click Save.

123
Final Options
Choose the next action.

Action Description
Continue
To begin a new step-by-step analysis.
analysis
Execute
To execute a selected workflow (.wct file).
workflow
Define new To define parameters and information by answering questions. Then, these can be saved into a
workflow predefined workflow which can be executed later (.wct file).
Edit
To edit a pre-saved workflow (.wct file).
workflow

Open
To open a Pipecheck session (.pcf file).
session
Quit To quit Pipecheck.

124
Scan Action
Scan a pipe of 3000 mm or more.
To perform the corrosion analysis of multiple scans, execute these three steps successively:

 1. "Create Scan Plan" on the next page

 2. "Scan Sections" on page 157

 3. "Compute Analysis" on page 192

125
Create Scan Plan
This step will help to prepare a scan plan by scanning targets and defining the number of sections to
scan before proceeding with the step 2.

The Create scan plan step must be performed with one scanner; it is not possible
to work with two scanners at the same time.

Nominal info
Scan parameters
Scanner calibration
Scanner configuration
Scan targets tips
Scan targets
Validate scan plan
Export scan plan

126
Scan Parameters
The Scan parameters selection is done at the Create scan plan step.

Resolution
The Scan resolution can be adjusted allowing to reach the desired detail level.

Reference
The pipe can be scanned using one of these referencing modes:

Import targets
You may scan the pipe using a known positioning model that must have been previously scanned and
saved using the Export Targets button available in the Classic mode. The Import Targetss function is
useful when scanning different areas separately, as it allows merging them afterward (with short scan
only).
Once selected, the Import Targets mode becomes the default referencing mode for further sessions.

Unreferenced scan
This is the default mode if no reference arrow has been imported in Pipecheck. The origin of the
analysis grid is defined as the first point scanned on the pipe. This scanning mode does not allow
locating the analysis grid regarding a known reference on the pipe.
The Invert Flow option, allows inverting the flow direction of the pipe model. It is particularly useful
when scanning in the Unreferenced Scan mode to define the desired flow direction. This option can be
modified before or after scanning the pipe.

Add a reference
The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the flow direction.
This mode is activated by selecting an arrow in the reference drop-down list or by importing a new one.
To add a new reference arrow

 1. Select Add... in the reference drop-down list.

 2. Select the configuration file of the reference arrow (.prf).

 3. Once imported, the selected reference arrow becomes the default referencing mode.

Place the magnetic reference arrow provided with your scanner on the pipe, parallel to the pipe axis,
pointing in the flow direction (down flow). The axial and circumferential origin of the scan will
correspond to the center of its flat extremity.

127
 1. Origin

 2. Flow direction

 3. Target

The four targets of the reference arrow appear in the 3D viewer when launching the Scan function. The
reference arrow must be scanned first; once its four targets have been properly detected, remove the
reference arrow and scan the surface under it. The surface of the reference arrow will be automatically
removed from the final 3D model.
Always carry the reference arrow in its protective case; its targets should never been touched. If the
arrow or its targets get damaged, it will no longer be detected correctly.
The origin of the analysis grid can be offset from the one of the reference arrow by defining an offset
value measured between the arrow origin and a known position on the pipe (e.g. GPS coordinates or a
pipe section join).
The reference arrow is displayed in the 2D viewer and the 3D viewer where it is positioned. It can also be
displayed in the report.

Reference position
This field allows defining the position of the origin of the analysis grid relative to a known reference,
such as GPS coordinates or a main pipe junction. The position of the features will be offset by the value
entered in the Axial reference position and Circumferential reference position fields.
Before defining a Reference Position, take a look at the Reference arrow section to know how the origin
of the analysis grid is set by default.
Write the reference details in the Comment field.

Example:
Down stream from reference GW (Girth weld).

128
Nominal Information
Nominal outside diameter

The Nominal outside diameter must correspond to the real diameter of the pipe. For instance 323.85 mm
(12.75 in) must be entered for a 300 mm (12 in) nominal pipe. For internal scans, the outside diameter
still have to be used.

Pipe wall thickness

The pipe wall thickness (NWT) must be entered in the Thickness field.

129
Scanner Calibration
Go!SCAN SPARK
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 3D

130
HandySCAN BLACK Configuration
To configure the scanner

 1. Click .

 2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the
trigger button.

A distance meter [1] on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between the
scanner and the object.

 3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

 a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the System panel so the laser
grid pattern [2] is as yellow as possible.

 b. For parts having a uniform color/texture, click the Auto. adjust button and hold the
scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing Parameters message
disappears.

Laser lines must lie only on the part surface. If the part is smaller
than the laser grid pattern size, the slider Scanning area % can be
used to reduce the size of the pattern.

131
Distance meter [1] colors

Colors Scanner position Action


    too close move backward
  correct -

    too far move forward

Laser grid pattern [2] colors

Color Status

The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras. There
underexposed is not enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a
mesh.

The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface calculation is done
optimal
under ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser
saturated lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface
reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise in the data.

Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the con-
figuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The cameras shutter time
according to the surface type should be set before scanning. Configuration parameters can
be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition process, through the System
panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the Smart Control.
Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

Right-click in the grey window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

Click the Save preset link.

To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

To activate a preset: Click the preset.

To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.15 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surfaces. Even darker
surfaces can be acquired with the default value.

132
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests to set
the shutter time value based on the surface color and finish, otherwise the scanning results will be
affected. We recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi-shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change
the shutter value, and finish the scan.

133
HandySCAN 307 Calibration
Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to
the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An
annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The
calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to
fourteen positions represented by the 3 green indicators (3D viewer).

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets of the user calibration
plate.

To optimize the scanner calibration

 1. Click .

 2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter. Position the scanner at approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

 3. Press the trigger button to start.

 4. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the positions describe in the viewer.
Once 10 measurements are taken perpendicular to the plate, take 4 measurements at an angle
from it.

For the first 10 measurements, stay normal to the plate. Try to maintain the red indicator
of the top and left bars as centered as possible. As for the right bar, it goes up each time
a measurement is successfully taken.

For the last 4 measurements, move the scanner at an angle from the plate to match the
red indicator of the top, left and right bars as centered as possible in the green
rectangular. The blue circle indicator must be aligned on the green circle in the middle of
the user calibration plate as well the blue circle's cross must be aligned with the green
indicators.

 5. Click OK to accept the optimization.

134
Best practice suggests to perform calibration with the plate inside the case.

It is important to position the scanner lengthwise during the calibration


otherwise, the optimization will not work.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decal-
ibrated scanner:

Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, please contact Creaform Technical Support for further assistance.

Reset to the factory settings


It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

135
HandySCAN 3D Calibration
To optimize the scanner calibration

 1. Click .

 2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter. Position the scanner at approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

 3. Press the trigger button to start.

 4. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the positions describe in the viewer.
Once 10 measurements are taken perpendicular to the plate, take 4 measurements at an angle
from it.

For the first 10 measurements, stay normal to the plate. Try to maintain the red indicator
of the top and left bars as centered as possible. As for the right bar, it goes up each time
a measurement is successfully taken.

For the last 4 measurements, move the scanner at an angle from the plate to match the
red indicator of the top, left and right bars as centered as possible in the green
rectangular. The blue circle indicator must be aligned on the green circle in the middle of
the user calibration plate as well the blue circle's cross must be aligned with the green
indicators.

 5. Click OK to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests to perform calibration with the plate inside the case.

136
It is important to position the scanner lengthwise during the calibration
otherwise, the optimization will not work.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decal-
ibrated scanner:

Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, please contact Creaform Technical Support for further assistance.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to
the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An
annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The
calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to
fourteen positions represented by the 3 green indicators (3D viewer).

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets of the user calibration
plate.

Reset to the factory settings


It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

137
Scanner Configuration
Go!SCAN SPARK
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 3D

138
HandySCAN BLACK Configuration
To configure the scanner

 1. Click .

 2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the
trigger button.

A distance meter [1] on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between the
scanner and the object.

 3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

 a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the System panel so the laser
grid pattern [2] is as yellow as possible.

 b. For parts having a uniform color/texture, click the Auto. adjust button and hold the
scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing Parameters message
disappears.

Laser lines must lie only on the part surface. If the part is smaller
than the laser grid pattern size, the slider Scanning area % can be
used to reduce the size of the pattern.

139
Distance meter [1] colors

Colors Scanner position Action


    too close move backward
  correct -

    too far move forward

Laser grid pattern [2] colors

Color Status

The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras. There
underexposed is not enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a
mesh.

The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface calculation is done
optimal
under ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser
saturated lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface
reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise in the data.

Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the con-
figuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The cameras shutter time
according to the surface type should be set before scanning. Configuration parameters can
be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition process, through the System
panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the Smart Control.
Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

Right-click in the grey window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

Click the Save preset link.

To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

To activate a preset: Click the preset.

To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.15 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surfaces. Even darker
surfaces can be acquired with the default value.

140
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests to set
the shutter time value based on the surface color and finish, otherwise the scanning results will be
affected. We recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi-shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change
the shutter value, and finish the scan.

141
HandySCAN 3D Configuration
Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the con-
figuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The laser power and the
cameras shutter time according to the surface type should be set before scanning. Con-
figuration parameters can be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition pro-
cess, through the System panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the
Smart Control.
To configure the scanner

 1. Click .

 2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the
trigger button.

 3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

 a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the System panel so the laser
grid pattern is as yellow as possible.

 b. For parts having a uniform color or texture, click the Auto. adjust button and hold the
scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing Parameters message
disappears.

Laser grid pattern colors

Color Status

The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras. There
underexposed is not enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a
mesh.

142
Color Status

The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface calculation is done
optimal
under ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser
saturated lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface
reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise in the data.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

Right-click in the grey window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

Click the Save preset link.

To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

To activate a preset: Click the preset.

To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.60 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surface. A flat black
surface usually requires a higher shutter value.
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests to set
the shutter time value based on the surface color and finish, otherwise the scanning results will be
affected. We recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi-shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change
the shutter value, and finish the scan.

143
HandySCAN 3D Configuration
Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the con-
figuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The laser power and the
cameras shutter time according to the surface type should be set before scanning. Con-
figuration parameters can be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition pro-
cess, through the System panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the
Smart Control.
To configure the scanner

 1. Click .

 2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the
trigger button.

 3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

 a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the System panel so the laser
grid pattern is as yellow as possible.

 b. For parts having a uniform color or texture, click the Auto. adjust button and hold the
scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing Parameters message
disappears.

Laser grid pattern colors

Color Status

The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras. There
underexposed is not enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a
mesh.

144
Color Status

The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface calculation is done
optimal
under ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser
saturated lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface
reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise in the data.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

Right-click in the grey window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

Click the Save preset link.

To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

To activate a preset: Click the preset.

To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.60 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surface. A flat black
surface usually requires a higher shutter value.
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests to set
the shutter time value based on the surface color and finish, otherwise the scanning results will be
affected. We recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi-shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change
the shutter value, and finish the scan.

145
Scan Target Tips
Surface preparation
Basic recommendations for good quality scans:

Clean the surface with sandblasting before scanning to remove dirt and corrosion residues.

Cover the surface with powder or white paint if the surface is shiny (optional).

Place positioning targets


The positioning targets must be applied randomly on the pipe surface prior to scanning. They are used
by the software to calculate the position of the scanner relatively to the pipe surface.
Pipe diameter Recommended distance between targets
Ø > 25 cm Place the targets about 8 to 10 cm from each other.
Ø ≤ 25 cm Place the targets about 5 to 7 cm from each other.

Ø ≥ 8 cm
Ø < 8 cm If the scanning environment allows it, use a target board instead of placing targets on the pipe. The
board must not move relative to the pipe while scanning.

Try placing the targets on non-damaged spots to avoid missing useful data when scanning. If it
is impossible, try to put the targets on less deep spots, to avoid hiding the deepest point of a
feature.

Make sure there are no damaged or dirty targets as it will affect the quality of the scan.

Try placing the targets further than 3 mm from the edges.

Avoid placing targets in a line.

A minimum of 6-8 targets detected is recommended at all time during the scan.

A minimum of 4 targets must be detected at all time (short scan).


However, a minimum of 6 detected targets is mandatory in the long scan process.

146
 1. Target not detected

 2. Target detected

The color of positioning targets


and laser lines is different using
the HandySCAN BLACK. See
Scan Targets using a
HandySCAN BLACK section for
more information.

Additional targets can be added while scanning, as long as the others are not
moved.

147
Scan Targets
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 3D

148
Scan Targets
Scan positioning targets
Scan the positioning targets to create a positioning model before scanning the pipe surface.

Icon Function Action


Start scanning To start the scanning process.

Stop scanning To stop (or pause) the scanning process.

Reset scan To clear the session scan data. Parameters will not be
reinitialized as in New session.

Minimum recommended scan coverage

 1. Scan 15 cm (6 in) of undamaged surface around the inspected zone.

 2. Acquire a circumferential area of 60° (2 hr).

See acquisition rules sections for more information.

Scan parameters
Scanner Parameters
This panel displays the connection status and the date of the last scanner calibration.
Shutter: This option is used if the part to scan is not detected by the scanner, or with parts of different
colors and/or reflection properties.
Configuration preset: Select a value from the list to set the configuration. The list of values can be
predefined through the configuration function. It can be useful when scanning similar objects in
similar light condition.

Color of positioning targets


Color Description

Recorded, but not seen or used in the last image.

Recorded and seen or used in the last image.

The scanner position is too close. Move forward.*

149
Color Description

Recorded and seen.

The scanner position is correct.*

Recorded and seen or used in the last image.

The scanner position is too close. Move backward.(1)

Recorded.

Not referenced to the origin or the other targets.

Will be deleted after a stop scan if not linked to the other targets.

(1) When the Project distance meter on scan function is enable.

Contextual menu
Other options are available using the contextual menu. A right-click in the viewer gives access to
available options.
Function Description
Lock Viewpoint To bring the viewpoint to the position it was on the latest acquisition. After zooming on a
detail or losing the current view, it enables seeing the whole scan in the 3D viewer.
Lock Zoom To set the zoom level while following the scanner movements. It is useful when scanning
small details.
Fit to Screen To center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.

150
Scan Targets
Scan positioning targets
Scan the positioning targets to create a positioning model before scanning the pipe surface.

Icon Function Action


Start scanning To start the scanning process.

Stop scanning To stop (or pause) the scanning process.

Reset scan To clear the session scan data. Parameters will not be
reinitialized as in New session.

If a reference arrow is selected in the Scan parameters, the 4 targets will be


displayed.

Minimum recommended scan coverage

 1. Scan 15 cm (6 in) of undamaged surface around the inspected zone.

 2. Acquire a circumferential area of 60° (2 hr).

See acquisition rules sections for more information.

Color of positioning targets


Color Description

Recorded, but not seen or used in the last image.

Recorded and seen or used in the last image.

 
Recorded.

Not referenced to the origin or to the other targets.

Will be deleted after a stop scan if not linked to the other


  targets.

Contextual menu
Other options are available using the contextual menu. A right-click in the viewer gives access to
available options.

151
Function Description
Lock Viewpoint To bring the viewpoint to the position it was on the latest acquisition. After zooming on a
detail or losing the current view, it enables seeing the whole scan in the 3D viewer.
Lock Zoom To set the zoom level while following the scanner movements. It is useful when scanning
small details.
Fit to Screen To center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.

152
Scan Targets
Scan positioning targets
Scan the positioning targets to create a positioning model before scanning the pipe surface.

Icon Function Action


Start scanning To start the scanning process.

Stop scanning To stop (or pause) the scanning process.

Reset scan To clear the session scan data. Parameters will not be
reinitialized as in New session.

If a reference arrow is selected in the Scan parameters, the 4 targets will be


displayed.

Minimum recommended scan coverage

 1. Scan 15 cm (6 in) of undamaged surface around the inspected zone.

 2. Acquire a circumferential area of 60° (2 hr).

See acquisition rules sections for more information.

Color of positioning targets


Color Description

Recorded, but not seen or used in the last image.

Recorded and seen or used in the last image.

 
Recorded.

Not referenced to the origin or to the other targets.

Will be deleted after a stop scan if not linked to the other


  targets.

Contextual menu
Other options are available using the contextual menu. A right-click in the viewer gives access to
available options.

153
Function Description
Lock Viewpoint To bring the viewpoint to the position it was on the latest acquisition. After zooming on a
detail or losing the current view, it enables seeing the whole scan in the 3D viewer.
Lock Zoom To set the zoom level while following the scanner movements. It is useful when scanning
small details.
Fit to Screen To center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.

154
Validate Scan Plan
Scan plan parameters

Section length: Enter the scan length required for each section to be scanned using the spin box. The
section length will determine the number of sections to be scanned.
The section length refers to the length unit for position previously entered in the Inspection Units page.
The maximum length for each section is 3000 mm.
Number of sections: Number of section according to the section length previously entered.

Example:
A pipe scanned of 15,75 m à section length: 2,75 (m)
6 sections: 5 sections of 2,75 m and 1 section of 2 m

155
Export Scan Plan
To export a scan plan

 1. Click .

 2. In the Export scan plan data dialog choose the location and folder where to save the file.

 3. In the File name field, type the name of the file.

 4. Click Save.

156
Scan Sections
This step will allow to scan the surface of each pipe section using the scan plan done at step 1.
"Section Selection" on the next page
"Scanner Calibration" on page 161
"Scanner Configuration" on page 170
Scan
"Edit Scan" on page 246
"Save Session" on page 122
Final options

157
Section Selection
This step allows to import the scan plan (.psp) and to select the section to be scanned.

To import a scan plan


It is possible to import the scan plan on different computers. It allows to scan sections with several
scanners.

 1. Click .

 2. Browse the Pipecheck - Import scan plan data dialog.

 3. Select the file (.psp).

 4. Click Open.

To select a section
A section turns yellow when the mouse move over.
To select the section to scan, left-click the section in the viewer; the selected section will be highlighted
in orange.

158
Scan Parameters
The Scan parameters selection is done at the Create scan plan step.

Resolution
The Scan resolution can be adjusted allowing to reach the desired detail level.

Reference
The pipe can be scanned using one of these referencing modes:

Import targets
You may scan the pipe using a known positioning model that must have been previously scanned and
saved using the Export Targets button available in the Classic mode. The Import Targetss function is
useful when scanning different areas separately, as it allows merging them afterward (with short scan
only).
Once selected, the Import Targets mode becomes the default referencing mode for further sessions.

Unreferenced scan
This is the default mode if no reference arrow has been imported in Pipecheck. The origin of the
analysis grid is defined as the first point scanned on the pipe. This scanning mode does not allow
locating the analysis grid regarding a known reference on the pipe.
The Invert Flow option, allows inverting the flow direction of the pipe model. It is particularly useful
when scanning in the Unreferenced Scan mode to define the desired flow direction. This option can be
modified before or after scanning the pipe.

Add a reference
The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the flow direction.
This mode is activated by selecting an arrow in the reference drop-down list or by importing a new one.
To add a new reference arrow

 1. Select Add... in the reference drop-down list.

 2. Select the configuration file of the reference arrow (.prf).

 3. Once imported, the selected reference arrow becomes the default referencing mode.

Place the magnetic reference arrow provided with your scanner on the pipe, parallel to the pipe axis,
pointing in the flow direction (down flow). The axial and circumferential origin of the scan will
correspond to the center of its flat extremity.

159
 1. Origin

 2. Flow direction

 3. Target

The four targets of the reference arrow appear in the 3D viewer when launching the Scan function. The
reference arrow must be scanned first; once its four targets have been properly detected, remove the
reference arrow and scan the surface under it. The surface of the reference arrow will be automatically
removed from the final 3D model.
Always carry the reference arrow in its protective case; its targets should never been touched. If the
arrow or its targets get damaged, it will no longer be detected correctly.
The origin of the analysis grid can be offset from the one of the reference arrow by defining an offset
value measured between the arrow origin and a known position on the pipe (e.g. GPS coordinates or a
pipe section join).
The reference arrow is displayed in the 2D viewer and the 3D viewer where it is positioned. It can also be
displayed in the report.

Reference position
This field allows defining the position of the origin of the analysis grid relative to a known reference,
such as GPS coordinates or a main pipe junction. The position of the features will be offset by the value
entered in the Axial reference position and Circumferential reference position fields.
Before defining a Reference Position, take a look at the Reference arrow section to know how the origin
of the analysis grid is set by default.
Write the reference details in the Comment field.

Example:
Down stream from reference GW (Girth weld).

160
Scanner Calibration
Go!SCAN SPARK
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 3D

161
HandySCAN BLACK Calibration
Acceptance Test
As specified in the ISO 10360 standard, Creaform performs an acceptance test before the delivery of the system
to certify that it meets the specifications. Creaform does not guarantee the performance of its equipment out-
side the scope and timing of the aforementioned test since the equipment is outside its control or supervision.
Reverification Test
In order to validate that the system complies with specified requirements, ISO 10360 standard recommends to
perform a reverification test periodically. Customer has the responsibility to determine the frequency of this test.
Creaform recommends, as a starting point, to perform this reverification annually.
Interim Check
The ISO 10360 standard recommends to perform an interim check between periodic verifications to demonstrate
the probability that the system complies with specified requirements. The customer must take into account the
interim check results to assess if a reverification test needs to be executed at one of the Creaform service cen-
ters.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to
the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An
annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The
calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to
fifteen (15) positions as indicated by the shadow of the scanner in the 3D viewer.

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets of the user calibration
plate.

The calibration file is stored on the scanner. If the calibration file is newer on the
scanner, upon starting a new scan session, it will prompt a message to update the
calibration file. Click Update to replace the calibration file in the Product Manager
by the file on the scanner. Best practice suggests to calibrate whenever
environment conditions change, even if the update has been processed.

To optimize the scanner calibration

 1. Click .

 2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter. Position the scanner at approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

 3. Press the trigger button to start.

 4. Aim at the bar code for the first measurement, then at the center of the target pattern and
normal to the plate. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the scanner

162
shadow in the 3D viewer. Once eleven (11) measurements are taken, take 4 measurements at an
angle from the plate by slightly tilting the scanner towards the right, left, top and bottom of the
plate.

 5. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests to perform calibration with the plate inside the case.

It is possible to scan under sunlight but calibration might not be possible to


complete under direct sunlight as it can create expansion of the plate. Use a
canopy for faster calibration.

163
Expected results
According to the scanner used, the calibration value should be below:

0.043 mm (HandySCAN BLACK)

0.035 mm (HandySCAN BLACK | Elite)

This value can be defined as the RMS error of the targets position. It represents the scanner stability
over time and should not vary by much. A higher value cannot be directly linked to a less accurate unit,
as long as it is within the limit value. The limit value is calculated based on the volumetric accuracy spe-
cification using the user calibration plate diagonal length.

If the value obtained is above said values, it is recommended to recalibrate the


scanner. If the value is still above, contact Creaform Technical Support for further
investigation.

 
If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decalibrated
scanner:

Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, please contact CreaformTechnical Support for further assistance.

164
Restore to the factory settings
It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

165
HandySCAN 307 Calibration
Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to
the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An
annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The
calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to
fourteen positions represented by the 3 green indicators (3D viewer).

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets of the user calibration
plate.

To optimize the scanner calibration

 1. Click .

 2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter. Position the scanner at approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

 3. Press the trigger button to start.

 4. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the positions describe in the viewer.
Once 10 measurements are taken perpendicular to the plate, take 4 measurements at an angle
from it.

For the first 10 measurements, stay normal to the plate. Try to maintain the red indicator
of the top and left bars as centered as possible. As for the right bar, it goes up each time
a measurement is successfully taken.

For the last 4 measurements, move the scanner at an angle from the plate to match the
red indicator of the top, left and right bars as centered as possible in the green
rectangular. The blue circle indicator must be aligned on the green circle in the middle of
the user calibration plate as well the blue circle's cross must be aligned with the green
indicators.

 5. Click OK to accept the optimization.

166
Best practice suggests to perform calibration with the plate inside the case.

It is important to position the scanner lengthwise during the calibration


otherwise, the optimization will not work.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decal-
ibrated scanner:

Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, please contact Creaform Technical Support for further assistance.

Reset to the factory settings


It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

167
HandySCAN 3D Calibration
To optimize the scanner calibration

 1. Click .

 2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter. Position the scanner at approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

 3. Press the trigger button to start.

 4. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the positions describe in the viewer.
Once 10 measurements are taken perpendicular to the plate, take 4 measurements at an angle
from it.

For the first 10 measurements, stay normal to the plate. Try to maintain the red indicator
of the top and left bars as centered as possible. As for the right bar, it goes up each time
a measurement is successfully taken.

For the last 4 measurements, move the scanner at an angle from the plate to match the
red indicator of the top, left and right bars as centered as possible in the green
rectangular. The blue circle indicator must be aligned on the green circle in the middle of
the user calibration plate as well the blue circle's cross must be aligned with the green
indicators.

 5. Click OK to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests to perform calibration with the plate inside the case.

168
It is important to position the scanner lengthwise during the calibration
otherwise, the optimization will not work.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decal-
ibrated scanner:

Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, please contact Creaform Technical Support for further assistance.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to
the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An
annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The
calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to
fourteen positions represented by the 3 green indicators (3D viewer).

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets of the user calibration
plate.

Reset to the factory settings


It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

169
Scanner Configuration
Go!SCAN SPARK
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 3D

170
HandySCAN BLACK Configuration
To configure the scanner

 1. Click .

 2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the
trigger button.

A distance meter [1] on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between the
scanner and the object.

 3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

 a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the System panel so the laser
grid pattern [2] is as yellow as possible.

 b. For parts having a uniform color/texture, click the Auto. adjust button and hold the
scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing Parameters message
disappears.

Laser lines must lie only on the part surface. If the part is smaller
than the laser grid pattern size, the slider Scanning area % can be
used to reduce the size of the pattern.

171
Distance meter [1] colors

Colors Scanner position Action


    too close move backward
  correct -

    too far move forward

Laser grid pattern [2] colors

Color Status

The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras. There
underexposed is not enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a
mesh.

The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface calculation is done
optimal
under ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser
saturated lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface
reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise in the data.

Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the con-
figuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The cameras shutter time
according to the surface type should be set before scanning. Configuration parameters can
be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition process, through the System
panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the Smart Control.
Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

Right-click in the grey window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

Click the Save preset link.

To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

To activate a preset: Click the preset.

To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.15 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surfaces. Even darker
surfaces can be acquired with the default value.

172
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests to set
the shutter time value based on the surface color and finish, otherwise the scanning results will be
affected. We recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi-shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change
the shutter value, and finish the scan.

173
HandySCAN 3D Configuration
Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the con-
figuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The laser power and the
cameras shutter time according to the surface type should be set before scanning. Con-
figuration parameters can be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition pro-
cess, through the System panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the
Smart Control.
To configure the scanner

 1. Click .

 2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the
trigger button.

 3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

 a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the System panel so the laser
grid pattern is as yellow as possible.

 b. For parts having a uniform color or texture, click the Auto. adjust button and hold the
scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing Parameters message
disappears.

Laser grid pattern colors

Color Status

The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras. There
underexposed is not enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a
mesh.

174
Color Status

The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface calculation is done
optimal
under ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser
saturated lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface
reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise in the data.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

Right-click in the grey window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

Click the Save preset link.

To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

To activate a preset: Click the preset.

To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.60 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surface. A flat black
surface usually requires a higher shutter value.
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests to set
the shutter time value based on the surface color and finish, otherwise the scanning results will be
affected. We recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi-shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change
the shutter value, and finish the scan.

175
HandySCAN 3D Configuration
Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the con-
figuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The laser power and the
cameras shutter time according to the surface type should be set before scanning. Con-
figuration parameters can be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition pro-
cess, through the System panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the
Smart Control.
To configure the scanner

 1. Click .

 2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the
trigger button.

 3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

 a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the System panel so the laser
grid pattern is as yellow as possible.

 b. For parts having a uniform color or texture, click the Auto. adjust button and hold the
scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing Parameters message
disappears.

Laser grid pattern colors

Color Status

The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras. There
underexposed is not enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a
mesh.

176
Color Status

The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface calculation is done
optimal
under ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser
saturated lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface
reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise in the data.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

Right-click in the grey window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

Click the Save preset link.

To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

To activate a preset: Click the preset.

To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.60 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surface. A flat black
surface usually requires a higher shutter value.
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests to set
the shutter time value based on the surface color and finish, otherwise the scanning results will be
affected. We recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi-shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change
the shutter value, and finish the scan.

177
Scan
Go!SCAN SPARK
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 3D

178
Scan
Scan the surface
Icon Function Action
Start scanning To start the scanning process.

Stop scanning To stop the scanning process.

Reset scan To clear the session scan data. Parameters will not be reinitialized
as in New session.

Scanner parameters
Shutter: This option is used if the part to scan is not detected by the scanner, or with parts of different
colors and/or reflection properties.
Configuration preset: Select a value from the list to set the configuration. The list of values can be
predefined through the configuration function. It can be useful when scanning similar objects in
similar light condition.

Mesh display
Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Triangles

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display. This option is available when editing the scan
or when an analysis was performed.

General display options


Quick rendering while moving: To reduce image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.
Project distance meter on scan: Default option which enables the distance meter on scan function. Clear
the selection to indicate the distance using a meter on the left side of the 3D viewer.

3D viewer display
Items displayed in the 3D viewer:

Item Default Note


Can be displayed asMesh or Wire Frame (see the Display Settings section
Scanned surface Gray facets
of the 3D viewer).
Flow direction White arrow The orientation can be inverted in the Scanning Parameters.

179
Item Default Note
The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the
Reference arrow  
flow direction.

Contextual menu
Other options are available using the contextual menu. A right-click in the viewer gives access to
available functions.

Function Description
To bring the viewpoint to the position it was on the latest acquisition. After zooming on
Lock Viewpoint
a detail or losing the current view, it enables seeing the whole scan in the 3D viewer.
To set the zoom level while following the scanner movements. It is useful when scanning
Lock Zoom
small details.
Lock rotation axis Allow the rotate the scan only around the rotation axis.

Fit to Screen To center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.
Show inside
Available with an internal scan. It allows displaying the color map of the internal surface
deviations on
on the external one for a better visualization.
outside surface

To set the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow
Standard View 3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

Acquisition rules
See acquisition rules section.

Start scanning
Use this function to launch and stop the scan process.

180
Distance meter

Red / Yellow LEDs to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

Dark Blue / Light Blue LEDs to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

181
Scan
Scan the surface
Icon Function Action
Start scanning To start the scanning process.

Stop scanning To stop the scanning process.

Reset scan To clear the session scan data. Parameters will not be reinitialized as
in New session.

Optimize volumetric This function considers all the positioning targets observed to
accuracy optimize their position.

Scanner parameters
Shutter: This option is used if the part to scan is not detected by the scanner, or with parts of different
colors and/or reflection properties.
Configuration preset: Select a value from the list to set the configuration. The list of values can be
predefined through the configuration function. It can be useful when scanning similar objects in
similar light condition.

Mesh display
Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Triangles

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display. This option is available when editing the scan
or when an analysis was performed.

General display options


Quick rendering while moving: To reduce image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.

3D viewer display
Items displayed in the 3D viewer:
Item Default Note
Scanned surface Gray facets Can be displayed as Mesh or Wire Frame (see the Display Settings section of
the 3D viewer).
Flow direction White arrow The orientation can be inverted in the Scanning Parameters.
Reference arrow   The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the
flow direction.

Contextual menu

182
Other options are available using the contextual menu. Right- click in the viewer gives access to
available functions.
Function Description
Lock Viewpoint To bring the viewpoint to the position it was on the latest acquisition. After zooming on a
detail or losing the current view, it enables seeing the whole scan in the 3D viewer.
Lock Zoom To set the zoom level while following the scanner movements. It is useful when scanning
small details.
Lock rotation axis Allow the rotate the scan only around the rotation axis.
Fit to Screen To center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.
Standard View To set the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow

3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

Acquisition rules
See acquisition rules section.

Start scanning
Use this function to launch and stop the scan process.

Distance meter

Red / Yellow LEDs to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

Dark Blue / Light Blue LEDs to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

183
Scan
Scan the surface
Icon Function Action
Start scanning To start the scanning process.

Stop scanning To stop the scanning process.

Reset scan To clear the session scan data. Parameters will not be reinitialized as
in New session.

Optimize volumetric This function considers all the positioning targets observed to
accuracy optimize their position.

Scanner parameters
Shutter: This option is used if the part to scan is not detected by the scanner, or with parts of different
colors and/or reflection properties.
Configuration preset: Select a value from the list to set the configuration. The list of values can be
predefined through the configuration function. It can be useful when scanning similar objects in
similar light condition.

Mesh display
Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Triangles

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display. This option is available when editing the scan
or when an analysis was performed.

General display options


Quick rendering while moving: To reduce image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.

3D viewer display
Items displayed in the 3D viewer:
Item Default Note
Scanned surface Gray facets Can be displayed as Mesh or Wire Frame (see the Display Settings section of
the 3D viewer).
Flow direction White arrow The orientation can be inverted in the Scanning Parameters.
Reference arrow   The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the
flow direction.

Contextual menu

184
Other options are available using the contextual menu. Right- click in the viewer gives access to
available functions.
Function Description
Lock Viewpoint To bring the viewpoint to the position it was on the latest acquisition. After zooming on a
detail or losing the current view, it enables seeing the whole scan in the 3D viewer.
Lock Zoom To set the zoom level while following the scanner movements. It is useful when scanning
small details.
Lock rotation axis Allow the rotate the scan only around the rotation axis.
Fit to Screen To center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.
Standard View To set the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow

3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

Acquisition rules
See acquisition rules section.

Start scanning
Use this function to launch and stop the scan process.

Distance meter

Red / Yellow LEDs to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

Dark Blue / Light Blue LEDs to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

185
Edit Scan
Some surfaces have to be deleted prior to the analysis process. The remaining surfaces must have only
a curvature in one direction.

Delete any of these surfaces :


Trailing edges.

Other element that does not belong to the main surface.

Isolated mesh patches.

Use the selection tools to:


Delete unwanted areas.

Modify the resolution of an area.

Clean the edge of the scan.

Once the scan is edited, click Next to accept.


Examples:

To edit scan

 1. Select a selection tool in the mini-toolbar.

 2. Hold Ctrl+Click and make the selection.

 3. To deselect a part of the selection, use Ctrl+Shift+Click.

 4. Once the scan is edited, click Next to accept.

Edit scan function is available during or after the scan acquisition.

Mesh display

Table 5-2 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

186
Triangles

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display. This option is available when an analysis was
performed.

General display options


Quick rendering while moving: Reduces image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.

Sections for analysis


Whole model: Default option which meant the whole model will be analyzed. Add section to analyze a
specific section and/or multiple sections.

To add section

 1. Select a selection tool in the mini-toolbar.

 2. Hold Ctrl+Click and make the selection.

 3. To deselect a part of the selection, use Ctrl+Shift+Click.

 4. Click Add in the Sections for analysis section.

By default, a name is given with a numeric suffix incremented by one.

To rename a section

 1. Double-click the section name.

 2. Enter the new name.

 3. Press Enter.

Although it is possible to add several sections, only one analysis can be done at a
time. Once a section analysis process is started, if another section is selected, a
new analysis will started and the analysis of the previous section will be lost.
Make sure to save each analysis done.

Selection tools
Selection tools are available through the mini toolbar which is in the upper left corner of the 3D viewer.
It can be displayed in Compact or Expanded mode using the drop-down arrow. To change the display
mode, click the ▼ in the mini toolbar and select the required display mode.

187
Function Description

Rectangle: To create a rectangular shape selection. Hold Ctrl and left-click, and release it when the
selection is completed.

Free-form: To create a free form selection (lasso). For a straight line contour, hold Ctrl and left-
click.For a free curve contour, hold Ctrl and hold the mouse left button. Once the selection is
completed, right-click to end it or release the Ctrl key.
Brush: This tool allows a brush shape selection (square, circle, oval and so on) with customized
thickness.For a straight line, press Ctrl+the mouse left button.For a free curve, press Ctrl and hold
the mouse left button.Once the selection is completed, right-click to end it or release the Ctrl key.
The Brush size slider allows adjusting the thickness.

Connect: This tool allows to select all triangles connected to a given triangle.

Sudden change: This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to others until sudden curvature
change appears in the mesh using Ctrl+Left mouse button.

Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.


Similar curvature: This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to other triangles with same
curvature.

Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.

Select through: This tool allows to select all the triangles within an area, even those on a different
layer.

Select target with surface: This tool allows to select target (s) with surface.

Select backface: This tool allows to select in the negative normal of the mesh in addition to the
positive normal.

Clear selection: This tool allows clearing the current surface selection.

Inverse selection: This tool allows inverting the current selection; unselected surface will be selected.
In opposition, selected surface will no longer be part of the selection.

Grow selection: This tool increases the current selection size by adding a layer of triangles for each
mouse click (1 triangle in every direction).

Shrink selection: This tool decreases the current selection size by removing a layer of triangles for
each mouse click (1 triangle in every direction).

Editing tools
Icon Function Description

Delete To delete the selected triangles on the scan surface.

188
Icon Function Description

Delete To delete permanently isolated patches that are not connected to the main object. It is
isolated possible to delete isolated patches while scanning.

Increase To increase the selected triangles resolution. Option available with the HandySCAN 3D
resolution scanner (307/700).

Decrease To decrease the selected triangles resolution. Option available with the HandySCAN 3D
resolution scanner (307/700).

Mandatory operation that optimizes the scan surface prior the analysis. It applies the
Finalize Optimize volumetric accuracy function when it is selected. Option is available using a
HandySCAN BLACK scanner.

Contextual menu
Function Description
Lock rotation axis Allow to rotate the scan only around the pipe axis.
Centers and displays the entire scan data in the center of the 3D
Fit to screen
viewer.
This function is available with an internal scan. It allows displaying
Show inside deviations on outside
the color map of the internal surface on the external one for a better
surface
visualization.

Sets the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow
Standard view 3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

189
Save Session
To save the scan session

 1. Click .

 2. In the Save session dialog, in the Folder pane, choose the location and folder where to save the
file.

 3. In the File name field, the session will automatically be named Plan name_Section name.pcf. If
required, it is possible to rename the file.

 4. In the Save as type list, accept the default file type (.pcf).

190
Final Options
Scan another section
Select this option to scan one more section (step 2).

Compute analysis
Once all sections are scanned, select this option to move to step 3.

New guided analysis


Select this option to begin a new step-by-step analysis.

Quit
To quit Pipecheck.

191
Compute Analysis
All sections scanned at step 2 will be clustered and analyzed.
Import sessions
Inspection parameters
Nominal information
Code selection
SFlow parameters
Pressure parameters
Interaction parameters
Grid resolution
Color map
Feature status
Pit gauge
Exclude area
Analysis results
Import ILI

192
Import Sessions
To import sessions

 1. Browse the Pipecheck - Open Session dialog.

 2. Select the files (.pcf) to import. It is possible to make a multiple selection using Ctrl+Click.

 3. Click Open.

Make sure to import all the section sessions required to perform the analysis.

Use the Manage sessions panel to Add or Remove sessions.

Surface color description


Color Description
  Scan data available on the scanned section. Data will be analyzed.
  No surface. The surface has not been scanned or the session has not been imported. No analysis
available.
  Overlap. Data of one scanned section only. Data will be analyzed.

193
Inspection Parameters
Information concerning a specific project can be entered here.

Pipe owner

Pipe name

Technician name

Inspector name

The entered information will appear in the analysis report.

194
Nominal Information
Nominal outside diameter

The Nominal outside diameter must correspond to the real diameter of the pipe. For instance 323.85 mm
(12.75 in) must be entered for a 300 mm (12 in) nominal pipe. For internal scans, the outside diameter
still have to be used.

Pipe wall thickness

The pipe wall thickness (NWT) must be entered in the Thickness field.

195
Code Selection
ASME B31G - 2009

Select this option to run the analysis using ASME B31G code.

Depth analysis only

Select this option to go to the next step without using ASME B31G code.

By selecting Depth analysis only option, no parameter page or analysis results


related to the code will be available.

196
Sflow Parameters
The flow stress is used in the B31G , Modified B31G and Effective Area standard to calculate the bursting
pressure. Its value has been estimated and can be calculated using three different methods. The Sflow
parameters must be set and a Sflow calculation method must be selected for every standards.
Select the standard to use to compute the burst pressure.

It is possible to select more than one or none.

Parameters used to calculate the Stress flow value


Parameter Description
Design factor Current pipeline safety regulations require new pipelines to be designed partly based on
the class location. Each class location has an associated Design Factor that must be applied
to determine the operating pressure.
Material Choose between plain carbon steel or low alloy steel.
Material grade Characteristic of the material. The SMYS value is defined automatically depending on the
selected grade. Select Manual to define the SMYS value. Available choices : A / B / X42 /
X46 / X52 / X56 / X60 / X65 / X70 / X80 / manual.
SMYS Specified minimum yield strength at ambient conditions.
Temperature Highest temperature of the pipe during operation.
Sut Specified ultimate tensile strength at operating temperature (Sflow method #3 only).
Syt Specified yield strength at operating temperature (Sflow method #3 only).

For more information, consult the Pipeline Safety Regulations in accordance with
the pipeline location.

Sflow method
The flow stress (Sflow) can be calculated in three different ways depending on the pipe material and
environment:
# Steel Temp. SMYS Other Equation Recommended for
1 Plain carbon ≤ 120°C (250°F)   (Sflow ≤ SMTS 1.1 × SMYS B31G
2 Plain carbon ≤ 120°C (250°F) ≤ 482.63 MPa (70 (Sflow ≤ SMTS SMYS + 68.95 Modified B31GEffective
Low-allow ksi) MPa (10 ksi) Area
31 Plain carbon   ≤ 551.58 MPa (80   (Sut + Syt)/2 High pipe temperature
Low-allow ksi)

1 Sut and Syt are specified at the operating temperature in accordance with the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section II, Part D, or room temperature
strength multiplied bu the temperature derating factor specified by the applicable
construction code. Linear interpolation or strength values is allowed between
listed temperatures.

197
For each standard, the method used to calculate the Sflow must be chosen among these three options
based on the previous recommendation.

198
Pressure Parameters
Two pressure values are involved in the computation:

 1. The Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP)

 2. The Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure (MAOP) is automatically calculated by the software
accordingly to Barlow’s equation:

Use custom value for MAOP: Select to enter a MAOP custom value.
See Stress Flow section for more information on SMYS.

199
Interaction Parameters
During the analysis process, corroded areas are identified and listed as corrosion features. Their
shapes and size will vary depending of the interaction parameters.

Interaction parameters
Interaction Para-
Description
meter
Method Interaction methods are used to apply ASME B31G interaction rules.
Critical factor (%) Depth (in % of wall thickness) at which a corrosion pit is deep enough to be evaluated and
listed.
Threshold for corroded Depth (in % of wall thickness) at which the corrosion feature dimensions are measured
area (%) and interaction rules are applied. Use the critical value or set another value.
Axial criteria Minimal axial distance between two corroded areas for which they will remain separated
features. Length or thickness multiplier can be used as units for this interaction criteria.
Circumferential criteria Minimal circumferential distance between two corroded areas for which they will remain
separated features. Length or thickness multiplier can be used as units for this interaction
criteria. Units for interaction criteria (length or thickness multiplier).

Interaction rules

Axial and circumferential criteria


Surrounding corroded areas may be grouped into a single feature (cluster), according to the following
interaction rules:

Each corroded area is delimited according to the selected Interaction method, at the depth
defined by the Threshold for corroded area.

Delimited areas are enlarger by ½ x Axial and Circumferential criterion (red lines).

If two enlarged areas overlap each other, they are grouped together. If there is no overlap
between two enlarged areas, it means the corroded areas have a distance between each other
at least equal to 1 x the axial and circumferential criteria.

200
 1. Individual features

 2. Interaction rules

2.1 Growing box and Connecting box


2.2 Fit to shape

 3. Feature borders

3.1 Growing box


3.2 Connecting box
3.3 Fit to shape

Feature dimensions do not include the Axial and Circumferential criteria; they are
measured at the depth defined by the threshold for corroded area.

Interaction methods
Border defin-
Method Connection mode
ition
Growing box Rectangle Enlarged rectangles. After every corrosion feature grouping, another larger
rectangle is redrawn from the new corrosion boundaries. The new enlarged
rectangle might overlap some others and the process goes on until there is no
interaction.

Connecting box Rectangle Enlarged rectangles linked together.

201
Border defin-
Method Connection mode
ition
Fit to shape Fit to shape Enlarged shapes linked together.

Critical factor and threshold


The critical factor is used to identify corrosion features:

A virtual pit-gauge depth measurement is taken in every grid (pixel) based on the scan res-
olution set by the user.

Every group of pixels deeper than the critical factor is identified as a single anomaly (called fea-
ture).

The feature dimensions start and end at the threshold depth value.

Anomalies are combined into clusters based on the interaction rules.

The threshold value must be equal or smaller than the critical factor value. If no threshold value is
entered, the feature dimensions and the interaction criteria are measured at the critical factor.

202
 1. Feature depth

 2. Critical factor (%)

 3. Threshold for corroded area (%)

 4. Corroded area (not identified as a feature)

 5. Corroded area (feature)

 6. Feature length without threshold

 7. Feature length with threshold

The critical factor determines the minimum depth that the surface must reach to
be considered damaged. An anomaly needs to contain damaged material to be
listed in the analysis results.

The size of an anomaly is computed using the threshold. Setting a threshold


different from the critical factor helps identify the extent of slightly damaged but
not critically damaged material around an anomaly.

203
Grid Resolution
Analysis grid resolution

Enter the size (resolution) of the analysis grid. This creates a grid listing the deepest point in each grid.
It is related to the grid size drawn manually on pipelines and vessels when not using a scanner.
This grid is used for:

Burst Pressure calculation for Effective Area method.

CSV deepest point export (CSV resolution based on Worst Case Profile resolution).

2D viewer deepest point display.

Display WCP results in analysis viewer and report: Select to activate the function.

A finer resolution will lead to more accurate results for the Effective Area burst
pressure. The minimal resolution is 1 mm (0.3937 in).

204
Color Map
It is possible to change the settings of the difference map, which represents the depth variation on the
pipe surface in the viewers. By default, the depth variation lying within the critical factor value appears
in green.
The following colors are set by default:

Warm colors: Negative deviations

Green: ± Critical factor

Light blue: Deviation between the critical factor value and threshold

Grey: Maximum % of wall thickness

Parameters
Parameter Description
Color scale type Select a Discrete or a Continuous scale type.
Divisions Select the number of divisions in the color map (1 to 15).
Unit type The values of the color scale divisions can be calculated in percentage of wall
thickness, percentage of pipe radius, or percentage of pipe diameter, or using the
depth value set in the Inspection Units page.
Reset divisions Reset divisions to defaults.
Reset color Click on a color of the scale to change it; click on Reset color to reset color to default.
Reset to defaults Reset all color map settings to defaults.

To edit the color map


Once the parameters are
defined:

 1. Click a color of the


scale to change it.

 2. Click a value of the


scale bar to change it
and select Enter to
accept the new value.

 3. Click the separation


between two colors
to change their
values by moving the
line up or down. Click
Reset divisions to reset
the value of divisions
to default.

205
Feature Status
Each corrosion feature has a name, but also a status to tell the user if it meets the criterion or not.
The user can select criteria and standards from the drop-down lists and set a value in the text box. It is
possible to add as many status as wanted.

Pressure related feature status will not be available when Depth analysis only is
selected.

Compliance criteria
Criterion Calculation standard
Max. depth  
RPR (MOP)1 Effective Area

RPR (MAOP)1 Modified B31G

B31G
Ratio over MOP Safe Effective Area

Ratio over MAOP Safe Modified B31G

Safe B31G
1Use design factor: Option is available when RPR (MOP) or RPR (MAOP) criterion is selected. Select to use
a value equal to 1/D.f. design factor previously entered in the SFlow Parameters page.

To add a verification criterion

 1. Click Add.

 2. Select a criterion in the first drop-down list.

 3. Select a calculation standard in the second drop-down list.

 4. Enter a value in the text box.

 5. Click Apply.

 6. To remove a verification criterion, click .

After the analysis is processed, a status icon will be displayed next to the feature.

Status icon Description

Complies with selected criterion.

206
Status icon Description

Does not comply with selected criterion.

Unable to assess.

207
Pit Gauge
Pipecheck allows an easy correlation with conventional inspection techniques. It enables defining a
virtual pit gauge that would share similar characteristics with a pit gauge used during a manual
corrosion inspection.

Recommendations
Pit gauge parameters are suggested based on the inputs given by the user.

Approximate length of the longest corrosion pit


The length of the longer corrosion pit must be entered. The longest corrosion pit represents the
longest length of a corrosion feature from nominal to nominal without using interaction rules. The
value entered will impact the amount of extension brackets use by the pit gauge.

There is a weld on the scan


Check the box if there is a weld on the scan. This will activate the Corrosion interacting with the weldbox.

Corrosion interacting with the weld


Check the box if there is corrosion interacting with a weld.
When this option is activated, the pit gauge boundary behavior is set to Automatic.

 1. Not interacting with weld

 2. Interacting with weld

Parameters

Once the inputs have been entered, the user must click for next step to get the pit gauge

208
recommendations.
At this step, it is possible to change the pit gauge parameters if required.

Pit gauge extensions


Parameter Description
Extension count Minimum and maximum number of extensions per side

Maximum allowable number of extension : 5


Center length Must be set between 50.8 mm and 152.4 mm
Extension length Must be set between 25.4 mm and 304.8 mm
Boundary pit gauge Optimize two-sided
behavior
Activate one-sided

Automatic

Do note use
Force symmetric Check this box to get a symmetrical repartition of the extension(s) on each side of
the pit gauge.

Pipecheck automatically detects the optimal combination of brackets for a specific area with respect to
the entered parameters. The pit gauge, including the extensions, is visible in the 2D viewer.

To move the pit gauge on the surface


Click a point in the 2D viewer.

 1. Pit gauge

 2. Pit gauge extension

 3. Pit gauge center length

 4. Feature

 5. Measured point

If the virtual pit gauge is too small to measure an area of the pipe, a warning
message will appear after the analysis. No measure will be taken on the affected
area, which will appear in bright color in the 2D viewer. To avoid this, select the

209
longest size for the pit gauge center part and extensions, and write 5 for the
maximum extension count.

This option will dictate how Pipecheck pit gauge behave near a boundary. A boundary is defined by an
excluded area or the end of the scan. A manually deleted area will never be seen as a boundary, so if a
surface is virtually cut in two sections, it will not represent a boundary since data was scanned at this
location.

Boundary pit gauge behavior

Optimize two-sided
Pipecheck measures depth near boundary using a two-sided pit gauge with variable center or
extension length. If it cannot fit a complete pit gauge based on the parameters, it will reduce its length
close to the boundary so it can fit and measure depth.

 1. Partial extension

 2. Full extension

Activate one-sided
Close to a boundary or an excluded area, Pipecheck will automatically measure depth using a one-
sided pit gauge . A one-sided pit gauge is mandatory if corrosion is found close to a weld.

The one-sided pit gauge is also used at the edge of the scan. The image below shows a one-sided pit
gauge at the edge of the scan when the Force symmetric option is activated.

210
Automatic
Pipecheck will decide the best way to evaluate depth near boundary and/or excluded area between the
optimize two-side or the one-sidepit gauge.

Do not use
Pipecheck does not evaluate near the boundary and/or excluded area. The width of that area is half the
size of the smallest pit gauge allowed in the parameters.

 1. Each side of excluded area not evaluated.

Force symmetric
Check the Force symmetric box to force Pipecheck to measure the entire surface with a virtual pit gauge
with a symmetric configuration (same amount of extension on each side).

211
Exclude Area
Exclude areas
Prior to the analysis, some areas as welds, dents or high surface points must be excluded.

To exclude area

 1. Define the area using a selection tool.

 2. Click Assign excluded area .

The excluded area will appear in a darker color on the scanned surface, different from the protected
area.

Assign excluded area


This function allows excluding areas from the analysis and sets a boundary between the excluded area.
The virtual pit gauge can never cross over the excluded area. Both sitting points must be on one side
or the other of the weld.
This option must be applied on welds to have an accurate analysis. It prevents Hi-Lo measurement
issues since the complete pit-gauge will always sit on one section or the other delimited by the weld
area. If corrosion is found close to the weld, the pit gauge boundary behavior must be changed
accordingly.

To manually assign an excluded area

 1. Define the area using a selection tool.

 2. Tag the selected area as excluded with the Assign excluded area button.

The excluded area will appear in a darker color on the scanned surface, different from the protected
area.

212
During the analysis, the pit gauge configuration will be automatically adjusted to the selected Boundary
pit gauge behavior in the pit gauge parameters tab.

 1. Excluded area (weld)

 2. Depth

 3. Axial

 4. Circumferential

To unassign an excluded area

 1. Select over the excluded area.

 2. Click Unassign excluded area .

Mesh display

Table 5-3 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Quads

Wire Frame

Transparent

213
Show color map: To show or hide the color map display. This option is available when editing the scan
or when an analysis was performed.

Contextual menu
Function Description
Lock rotation axis Allow to rotate the scan only around the pipe axis.
Fit to screen Centers and displays the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.
Show inside deviations on outside surface This function is available with an internal scan. It allows displaying the
color map of the internal surface on the external one for a better
visualization.
Standard view Sets the pipe display depending on the following selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow

3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

Use all surfaces


Select this option to use all surfaces for analysis.

214
Analysis Results
Interface

Items displayed in the 3D viewer


Item Default Note
Scanned surface Gray facets Can be displayed as Mesh or Wire Frame (see the
Display Settings section of the 3D viewer).
Analysis grid White The square size is defined by the Worst Case Profile
Resolution selected in the corrosion analysis
parameters. Zoom on the grid to see the real square
size.
Origin of the analysis grid White circle Represented without the Reference Position offset.
(See how to define reference when scanning the
pipe.)
Flow direction White arrow The orientation can be inverted in the Scanning
Parameters.
Feature boundary Blue contour The blue contour represent the feature dimensions.
Difference map of selected features   Colored representation of the depth variation on the
scanned surface. Difference Map parameters can be
modified in the Color Map tab of the corrosion
parameters dialog.
Distances Yellow See Measuring Distances to learn how to measure
distances on the surface.
Reference arrow   The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the
analysis grid and the flow direction.
River bottom path of selected features Blue See the River bottom path section for more
information.
Feature annotation Dark blue box See Feature annotation section.

3D viewer contextual menu


Function Description
Lock rotation axis Allows to rotate the scan only around the pipe axis.
Fit to screen Allows to center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D
viewer.
Show inside deviations on outside surface This function is available with an internal scan. It allows displaying the
color map of the internal surface on the external one for a better
visualization.
Standard view Set the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow

3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock
Add snapshot Create a snapshot with the active view.

215
Function Description
Hide all annotations Hide all feature annotations.
Show all annotations Show all feature annotations.

Section views in 2D viewer


The section views is surrounded by 3 graphs:
Graph Position Description
Axial section view Bottom  Axial section view of the pipe at the
circumferential position selected in the
2D viewer

Axial position of the point selected in the


2D viewer
Circumferential section view Right Circumferential section view of the pipe
at the axial position selected in the 2D
viewer

Circumferential position of the point


selected in the 2D viewer
Angular position graph Bottom right Circumferential section view of the pipe
corner  
at the axial position selected in the 2D
viewer

Angular position of the point selected in


the 2D viewer

Angular coverage of the pipe

To resize the display in the 2D viewer

 1. Move the cursor to edge of the window until seeing two sided arrows.

 2. Left click and drag the window to resize it as desired.

Items displayed in the 2D viewer


Item Default Note
Scanned surface Gray  
Analysis grid White The square size is defined by the Worst Case Profile Resolution selected
in the Corrosion analysis Parameters. Zoom on the grid to see the real
square size.
Feature boundary Blue contour The blue contour represent the feature dimensions.
Difference map of selected   Colored representation of the depth variation on the scanned surface.
features Difference Map parameters can be modified in the Color Map tab of the
corrosion parameters dialog.
River bottom path of Blue See the River Bottom Path section for more information.
selected features

216
Item Default Note
Deepest point of each square   Apply the Find deepest points function in a square of the grid to locate
in the analysis grid of its deepest points. Zoom on the grid to see each of its depth value.
selected features

217
Item Default Note
Virtual pit gauge Gray Pit gauge including the extensions.
Red The pit gauge is smaller or longer than the preset value
(parameters).
Examples:

Between two excluded areas, the pit-gauge is forced to


be smaller than the minimum dimension set in the
parameters (extension minimum: 1, extension maximum:
2).

The minimum length of the pit-gauge cannot be


respected. Therefore, the pit-gauge is smaller than its
minimal length.

A feature area (#1) has been identified as force corroded

and the pit-gauge has parameters smaller than


that area. Therefore, an extension will be added (it can
be added in both directions).

218
Item Default Note
Mouse pointer   On the fly depth: hover the mouse on a point of the 2D viewer to see its
position and depth values.
 1. Depth

 2. Axial

 3. Circumferential

Reference arrow   The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and
the flow direction.
Distances Yellow See Measuring Distance to learn how to measure distances on the
surface.

2D viewer contextual menu


Function Description
Fit image Zoom out to show the whole pipe surface.
Find deepest point Find the deepest point ( pipe, feature or current grid position).
Hide all annotations Hide all feature annotations.
Show all annotations Show all feature annotations.

Feature navigation

Sort criteria
User can sort features using the Sort criteria drop down list.

To select a feature

Click on a feature in the list of the Features navigation panel or

Double-click on a damage in the viewer.

Use Ctrl+click for multiple feature selection in the list.

To clear a selection

Click to clear a selection or

Double-click on a selected damage in the viewer.

Feature annotation
Important results are listed in the feature annotation.

219
Feature name

Maximum depth

Feature status results

Error message (1)

(1)
The sign is displayed next to the feature in error in the Navigation panel.

To move a feature annotation


Left-click and drag the annotation in the viewer.

To hide a feature annotation


Right-click on the annotation and select Hide. To display the annotation again, right-click in the viewer
and select Show all annotations.

Feature details
Depending on the interaction parameters entered, various features will be defined during the
corrosion analysis. Each feature corresponds to an isolated corroded area. Once the analysis
completed, the resulting features are listed in the Feature Navigation pane .To show a feature in the
viewers, select it from that list (use the Ctrl+Click method for multiple selections).

Feature name

Anomaly class

Axial length and circumference width

Axial length and circumference width

Maximum depth information

Total volume of material loss

River Bottom Path (RBP)


The River Bottom Path (RBP) of each feature is drawn from the feature deepest point, which consists of
the deepest point of each grid square covered by the feature.River Bottom Path is shown in the 2D and
3D viewers for each selected feature (blue line).

Worst Case Profile


The 2D viewer axial section view shows the Worst Case Profile of a selected feature (blue line).

Feature status legend

220
Status icon Description

Complies with selected criterion.

Does not comply with selected criterion.

Unable to assess.

Pressure details (Effective area, Modified B31G, B31G)

Burst pressures calculated with each standard

RPR (Rupture Pressure Ratio) value (based on MOP and MAOP)

Safe pressure (minimal calculation value obtained: Bursting Pressure *Design Factor or MAOP)

Safe pressure ratio (based on MOP and MAOP)

Mesh display

This option is available only in the 3D view.

Table 5-4 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Quads

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display.

General display options


Grid: To show or hide the analysis grid.
Grid positions: To show or hide the axial and circumferential grid position.
Feature identification: To show or hide the identification number of the selected features.
ILI features: To display the ILI features.
Distances: To show or hide the distances listed.
Effective length: To display or hide the Effective length in red color on the river bottom path.
Quick rendering while moving: To reduce image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.
3D color map: This option is available with a UT data analysis only. It allows to display the 3D color map
according to the selected display type.

221
Analysis depths (by default): True wall thickness (pit gauge and UT values)

UT data depths only

Pit gauge depths only

Unavailable options are grayed out.

2D viewer show options


Zoom on selected feature: To fit the selected feature to the screen.
Deepest points values: To display the grid deepest point. The displayed values are based on the WCP
resolution. It is possible to zoom in/out allowing to see more or less values.

Feature naming options


Use automatic names: Select to activate the function.

Activated: The anomalies (single corrosion pit) and clusters (combined corrosion pits) are auto-
matically detected and a name, with a numeric suffix incremented by one, is given
(example: DMA-1, DMA-2, etc.). To modify the automatic name:

 1. Select text in the field.

 2. Enter the new name.

 3. Click Apply.

Deactivated: By default, all detected corrosion pits are named Feature.The axial position
(upstream to downstream) determines the numeric suffix incremented by one (example: Feature
1, Feature 2, etc.)

Add anomaly class suffix: Select to add the corrosion type in the feature name.
Anomaly dimension class (1)
Axial Grooving AXGR
Axial Slotting AXSL
Circumferential Grooving CIGR
Circumferential Slotting CISL
General GENE
Pinhole PINH
Pitting PITT
(1)
Specifications and requirements for intelligent pig inspection of pipelines, Pipeline
Operators Forum, 2009.

Troubleshooting
Once the analysis is completed, user must make sure that there is no issues by looking at the depth

222
color map for possible measurement errors that are not automatically found by the software.

Common analysis issues


Pit-Gauge is too long

The pit gauge has too many extensions. This usually happens when analyzing a slightly bended
pipeline. Seeing the deflection as corrosion, Pipecheck tries to add more extensions. This error can be
seen by looking at the color-map shape creating elongated lines of corrosion. The 2D axial section also
displays a bended profile, indicating that the bent has been included in the corrosion.
To fix his issue, limit the pit gauge extensions & length.
Examples :
Pit gauge is too long

Optimal pit gauge length

Weld analysis issues


Many issues can come from a weld analysis if not well excluded from the analysis.
Hi-lo issue:

Weld is deleted. Deleted area does not create a boundary and software will still use a Two-sided pit-
gauge, creating Hi-lo issues. Always exclude the weld instead of deleting it.

223
High points :

Long corrosion lines can be seen if the pit gauge sits on a higher point than the pipe surface. This leads
to deeper measurement than reality.
Incomplete weld exclusion. Weld is not completely excluded, leaving some high points where the pit
gauge can sit on. Exclude these high points to solve the issue.

Noise / spot welds:

High points can be created when scanning a spot, remaining coating, sand or anything that was above
the scan surface. To fix this issue, delete or exclude the high points.

224
Pit-gauge behavior issues
Boundary pit-gauge behavior needs to be correctly defined when analyzing corrosion close to
boundary. Some situations can lead to possible analysis errors.
Corrosion beside weld:

Corrosion beside weld needs to be analyzed using a one-sided pit gauge (activate One-sided or
Automatic parameter) and not using an Optimize two-sided.
Optimized two-sided (incorrect parameter)

Activate One-sided or Automatic (correct parameter)

225
Local deformation close to boundary
Local deformation can cause the one-sided pit gauge to lift, especially when using extensions. Try to
use no extension (or smallest as possible) to fix this issue. The other possibility would be not to analyze
anything close to boundary if there is no corrosion.
Long one-sided extension (incorrect parameter for this situation)

No one-sided extension (correct parameter for this situation)

226
Import ILI
The ILI correlation tool allows correlating in-line inspection data with 3D scanning inspection data
provided by Pipecheck.
To properly assess the performances of the ILI tool, operators need to carry out statistically-significant
population analyzes with a device offering better accuracy than magnetic-flux leakage (MFL)
technology.
The scanners quickly capture metal loss and damaged areas, and help building a larger and acceptable
population for statistical analysis.
Operators can assess ILI performances by comparing pig data against Pipecheck data to determine
with more precision the sites that actually need to be dug.

To import ILI data

 1. Click Import ILI data.

 2. Browse through the Open dialog box and select the ILI data file (.csv or .txt) to import.

 3. Click Open.

 4. Select the format or click for the next step to define a new format. It is also possible to
import a format template (.pct) by clicking the Import button.

227
Import ILI | Step 2
To set the starting point and delimiters using drop-down lists

 1. Select the first row to import.

 2. Choose the Column delimiter.

 3. Choose the Decimal delimiter.

The delimiters will follow your Windows number format settings.If you are
experiencing some problems finding a delimiter, you may need to change your
Windows format settings or to save the file in Excel to apply your own number
format.

228
Import ILI | Step 3
To set the column locations for the different parameters

 1. Make sure to enter the appropriate reference position of the ILI feature.

 1. Axial position taken at

 2. Circ. position taken at

 3. Top

 4. Center

 5. Bottom

 6. Left

 7. Center

 8. Right

 2. Enter the format name in the appropriate field.

 3. Click Save format button.

Once imported, the ILI data will show up in the 3D viewer.

229
Reporting
Report type
Report parameters
Export report
Save session
Save workflow
Final options

230
Report Type
Select the type of report to export.

XLS
Complete formatted report (.xls).

Overview page

One analysis result per feature

Signatures page

CSV
Light report (.csv).

One line par analyzed feature

No parameters, only the analysis results

Deepest points
Export of a depth grid containing the deepest points in each grid.
The depth grid can be exported for:

All pipe

All features

Selected features

By default, the depth values are exported in a .csv file where:

The columns represent the axial position(s).

The row represents the circumferential position(s).

The difference between two positions, either axial or circumferential, is equal to the resolution
defined in the Grid Resolution page (analysis grid resolution).

The orientation can be modified trough the CSV Export parameters. The .csv file can be easily viewed in
Excel worksheet.

No report
No report to export.

231
Report Parameters
XLS report
CSV report
Deepest points report

232
Excel Report Parameters
Scan date: Date that the scan was performed.
Report creation date: Date that the report was created.
Number of decimal places: Select the desired number of digits following the decimal point.
Sort criteria: Sort the features using the criteria drop-down list.

Use Ctrl+Click to select multiple features.

Overview page

Data to show below position information: Select the additional information to show below the starting
position (axial and circumferential) in the Overview page of the report.

End position

Length

None

Pressure data - first row : Decide what pressure parameter appears on the first row in the Feature
summary section.
Pressure data - second row: Decide what pressure parameter appears on the second row in the Feature
summary section.
Additional depth data: Select the additional information to show below the Max. depthdata information
in the Features summary section of the Overview page of the report.

Remaining wall

% re. wall

% max. depth

None

Feature page

Data to show below position information: Select the additional information to show in the Results section
of each Feature page of the report. It is possible to select one option or both.

End position

Length

Pressure data: Select the different types of pressure data to display in the report.
Safe pressure data: Select the different types of safe pressure data to display in the report.

233
Other data: Select other types of data (example: Effective length) to display in the report.

General

Unlock all report cells: All cells are locked by default in Excel. Select to unlock cells.
Allow reference arrow to show in overview: Select to show the reference arrow on the picture displayed on
the Overview page of the report.
Logo: Click Import to add a logo (such as a company logo) that will be displayed on all pages of the
report. Click Clear to delete it.
Disclaimer: Enter the disclaimer text in the text field.

234
CSV Report Parameters
Scan date: Date that the scan was performed.
Report creation date: Date that the report was created.
Number of decimal places: Select the desired number of digits following the decimal point.
Sort criteria: Sort the features using the criteria drop-down list.

Use Ctrl+Click to select multiple features.

235
Deepest Points Report Parameters
Scan date: Date that the scan was performed.
Number of decimal places: Select the desired number of digits following the decimal point.
Export points for:

All pipe: Select this option to export deepest points data for the whole pipe.

All features: Select this option to export deepest points data for all features. Sort the features
using the criteria drop-down list.

Selected features: Select this option to export deepest points data for selected features. Sort the
features using the criteria drop-down list. To select features use the Ctrl+Click method.

Exported value: Select the value to export (Depth or Remaining wall).


Orientation: Select an Orientation type for the table (normal or transposed).

236
Export Report
Use this function to export an analysis report and save it.

To export a report

 1. In the Save as dialog, in the Folder pane, choose the location and folder where to save the file.

 2. In the File name field, type a name for the file.

 3. In the Save as type list, accept the default file type (.pcf).

 4. Click Save.

237
Save Session
Use this option to save the current session.

To save a session

 1. Click .

 2. Navigate through the required folder to save the session.

 3. Type a name for the session in the File name box.

 4. Click Save.

238
Save Workflow
Save a specific session workflow (.wct file). The structure and parameters will be saved.

To save a workflow

 1. Click .

 2. Navigate through the Export Workflow Data dialog box and choose the folder to save the file.

 3. Type the file name.

 4. Click Save.

239
Final Options
Choose the next action.

Action Description
Scan another section To scan a section. See Scan sections.
Compute analysis To compute the analysis of previous scanned sections.
New Guided Analysis To begin a new step-by-step analysis.
Quit To quit Pipecheck.

240
Analysis Modules and Reporting
Pipecheck includes three analysis modules:
Corrosion
Dent
Wrinkle
It is possible to produce a report for each analysis.

One analysis can be performed per work session. Consequently, if a corrosion


feature and a dent or wrinkle are founded on the same pipe, two different
analysis must be done.
To analyze corrosion on a dent, refer to the Classic mode of the software.

241
Corrosion Module
Analysis type
Nominal information
Import scan
Edit scan
Geometry type
Straighten scan
Manual alignment
Inspection parameters
Code selection
SFlow parameters
Pressure parameters
Interaction parameters
Grid resolution
Color map
Feature status
Pit gauge
Exclude area
Import UT data
Add manual UT data
Analysis results
Import ILI
Report type
Report parameters
Export report
Save session
Save Workflow
Final options

242
Analysis Type
Scan only

To scan external or internal corrosion using a 3D scanner.

UT only

To import Ultrasonic Testing data (UT) only, without any scan data.

This option is used only for internal corrosion.

Scan and UT

To analyze a combination of 3D scan data and automated UT data imported (AUT, phased array, etc.).

Scan and manual UT

To analyze a combination of 3D scan data and UT data imported (manual UT probe, etc.)

243
Nominal Information
Nominal outside diameter

The Nominal outside diameter must correspond to the real diameter of the pipe. For instance 323.85 mm
(12.75 in) must be entered for a 300 mm (12 in) nominal pipe. For internal scans, the outside diameter
still have to be used.

Pipe wall thickness

The pipe wall thickness (NWT) must be entered in the Thickness field.

244
Import Scan
Import scan
When selected, a dialog box opens:

 1. Browse the scan file (.pcf) through the Pipecheck - Open Session dialog box.

 2. Click Open.

 3. Click for the next step.

It is possible to import single sections of the long scan.

245
Edit Scan
Some surfaces have to be deleted prior to the analysis process. The remaining surfaces must have only
a curvature in one direction.

Delete any of these surfaces :


Trailing edges.

Other element that does not belong to the main surface.

Isolated mesh patches.

Use the selection tools to:


Delete unwanted areas.

Modify the resolution of an area.

Clean the edge of the scan.

Once the scan is edited, click Next to accept.


Examples:

To edit scan

 1. Select a selection tool in the mini-toolbar.

 2. Hold Ctrl+Click and make the selection.

 3. To deselect a part of the selection, use Ctrl+Shift+Click.

 4. Once the scan is edited, click Next to accept.

Edit scan function is available during or after the scan acquisition.

Mesh display

Table 5-5 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

246
Triangles

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display. This option is available when an analysis was
performed.

General display options


Quick rendering while moving: Reduces image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.

Sections for analysis


Whole model: Default option which meant the whole model will be analyzed. Add section to analyze a
specific section and/or multiple sections.

To add section

 1. Select a selection tool in the mini-toolbar.

 2. Hold Ctrl+Click and make the selection.

 3. To deselect a part of the selection, use Ctrl+Shift+Click.

 4. Click Add in the Sections for analysis section.

By default, a name is given with a numeric suffix incremented by one.

To rename a section

 1. Double-click the section name.

 2. Enter the new name.

 3. Press Enter.

Although it is possible to add several sections, only one analysis can be done at a
time. Once a section analysis process is started, if another section is selected, a
new analysis will started and the analysis of the previous section will be lost.
Make sure to save each analysis done.

Selection tools
Selection tools are available through the mini toolbar which is in the upper left corner of the 3D viewer.
It can be displayed in Compact or Expanded mode using the drop-down arrow. To change the display
mode, click the ▼ in the mini toolbar and select the required display mode.

247
Function Description

Rectangle: To create a rectangular shape selection. Hold Ctrl and left-click, and release it when the
selection is completed.

Free-form: To create a free form selection (lasso). For a straight line contour, hold Ctrl and left-
click.For a free curve contour, hold Ctrl and hold the mouse left button. Once the selection is
completed, right-click to end it or release the Ctrl key.
Brush: This tool allows a brush shape selection (square, circle, oval and so on) with customized
thickness.For a straight line, press Ctrl+the mouse left button.For a free curve, press Ctrl and hold
the mouse left button.Once the selection is completed, right-click to end it or release the Ctrl key.
The Brush size slider allows adjusting the thickness.

Connect: This tool allows to select all triangles connected to a given triangle.

Sudden change: This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to others until sudden curvature
change appears in the mesh using Ctrl+Left mouse button.

Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.


Similar curvature: This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to other triangles with same
curvature.

Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.

Select through: This tool allows to select all the triangles within an area, even those on a different
layer.

Select target with surface: This tool allows to select target (s) with surface.

Select backface: This tool allows to select in the negative normal of the mesh in addition to the
positive normal.

Clear selection: This tool allows clearing the current surface selection.

Inverse selection: This tool allows inverting the current selection; unselected surface will be selected.
In opposition, selected surface will no longer be part of the selection.

Grow selection: This tool increases the current selection size by adding a layer of triangles for each
mouse click (1 triangle in every direction).

Shrink selection: This tool decreases the current selection size by removing a layer of triangles for
each mouse click (1 triangle in every direction).

Editing tools
Icon Function Description

Delete To delete the selected triangles on the scan surface.

248
Icon Function Description

Delete To delete permanently isolated patches that are not connected to the main object. It is
isolated possible to delete isolated patches while scanning.

Increase To increase the selected triangles resolution. Option available with the HandySCAN 3D
resolution scanner (307/700).

Decrease To decrease the selected triangles resolution. Option available with the HandySCAN 3D
resolution scanner (307/700).

Mandatory operation that optimizes the scan surface prior the analysis. It applies the
Finalize Optimize volumetric accuracy function when it is selected. Option is available using a
HandySCAN BLACK scanner.

Contextual menu
Function Description
Lock rotation axis Allow to rotate the scan only around the pipe axis.
Centers and displays the entire scan data in the center of the 3D
Fit to screen
viewer.
This function is available with an internal scan. It allows displaying
Show inside deviations on outside
the color map of the internal surface on the external one for a better
surface
visualization.

Sets the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow
Standard view 3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

249
Geometry Type
Choose the geometry type between available options.

Straight

Select this option if the pipe visually looks straight (without apparent curves).

Curved

Select this option if the pipe has field bends (curved).

The software is limited to the analysis of curved pipes. Pipes with elbows cannot
be analyzed using Pipecheck.

250
Straighten Scan

Curved pipe
To get an accurate analysis, curved pipes need to be straightened. Pipecheck has the capability of
straightening slightly curved pipes, but it is not designed to straighten small curvature radius, such as
90° elbows.
Pipecheck uses short cylinders to separate the bended pipe into many straight sections. These sections
are straighten and realigned in order to get a straight cylinder. A smaller cylinder value is needed for
smaller curvature radius. This value can be defined under Straight Cylinder Length in the straightening
tool. The minimum Straight Cylinder Length is about 10-12 times the scanning resolution.
Each section needs to be almost perfectly straight to have efficient straightening. The Straight cylinder
length should be chosen by locking at the color-map around the straight cylinder. The green color
indicates that the section is straight and the cylinder length should be good.
When a pipe is straighten, Pipecheck stretches the inside curvature surface to make sure the whole
cylinder has the same length. Pipecheck never shrinks any surface.

Before Straightening After Straightening

1. Outside curvature surface 3. Outside curvature surface

2. Inside curvature surface 4. Inside curvature surface

First, verify the nominal diameter of the pipe.


Then, align the cylinder on the pipe. There are 2 ways to do this:
Use the selection tools to select a straight section, then click Align cylinder button
to automatically align the cylinder with the selected section of the pipe
or
Click Move grid button to manually align the cylinder with a section of the pipe.
Adjust the length of the cylinder so that more green than red is visible. Use the
Exclude or Restore button with the selection tools to define sections that the
straightening will not use.
Click Apply to launch the straightening computation. the straightened pipe will

251
appear when completed.
Click Next to accept the straightened pipe, or modify the parameters and reapply
to get a different result.

Selection tools
See Edit Scan section.

To straighten a pipe

 1. Define the Nominal outside diameter.

 2. Define the Straight cylinder length.

 3. Exclude area from cylinder straightening .

Some areas such as dents and flanges might affect the cylinder straightening. It is
possible to exclude them from the straightening by selecting them and use the
Exclude from cylinder tool in the toolbar or main menu. These areas will not affect
the straightening process, but will still be straightened. To restore some areas,
Restore to Cylinder tool can be used.

 4. Click Apply to launch the straightening process.

Move grid / Move viewpoint


The Move grid function allows to manually drag and align the grid (dotted white cylinder) over the
scanned pipe.
The Move viewpoint function allows to move the 3D view.

252
An accordion surface profile or a repetitive corrosion pattern in the section view might mean that the
cylinder length is too large and should be changed.

Cancel cylinder straightening


Click Cancel cylinder straightening button to cancel the previous straightening operation.

Users need to be careful when analyzing a feature extracted from straightened


cylinder since the burst pressures might not comply with ASME B31G computation
methods. A warning message will be shown under the details of each feature
created from a straightened cylinder.

Highly bended pipes might not be suitable for straightening operation.

253
Manual Alignment
Manual alignment needs to be done when a best fit cylinder cannot be extracted from the scan data.
The cylindrical fit uses the initial parameters entered by the user (diameter). By example, this can
happens when scanning:

Floor surrounding or background

Perpendicular pipe

Anything scanned which is connected to the pipe itself

Pipecheck automatically detects such situations and allows a manual alignment tool. If so, an error
message will appear at the end of the scanning process.

Manual data alignment


Define the Nominal outside diameter and Pipe wall thickness.

Move grid
Move grid function allows to manually drag and align the grid (dotted white cylinder) over the scanned
pipe.

Move viewpoint
Move viewpoint function allows to move the 3D view.

To process the manual alignment


The grid must be pre-aligned on the scan data. Once done, the surface close to the grid becomes
green and the software uses them to optimize the alignment.

To align the grid


Use Move grid function or Align cylinder.

 1. Make a selection on the scan data to align.

 2. Click to align the cylinder.

 3. Click Apply.

254
If the manual alignment did not work properly

First, verify the nominal diameter and wall thickness of the pipe. Then, align the
cylinder of the pipe. There are 2 ways to do this:
Use the selection tools to select a straight section, then click Align cylinder button
to automatically align the cylinder with the selected section of the pipe
or
Click the Move grid button to manually align the cylinder with a section of the pipe.
Use the tools to make selections and clean the scan.
Click the Apply button to launch the alignment computation. The Next button will
become available when the alignment is validated.

255
Inspection Parameters
Information concerning a specific project can be entered here.

Pipe owner

Pipe name

Technician name

Inspector name

The entered information will appear in the analysis report.

256
Code Selection
ASME B31G - 2009

Select this option to run the analysis using ASME B31G code.

Depth analysis only

Select this option to go to the next step without using ASME B31G code.

By selecting Depth analysis only option, no parameter page or analysis results


related to the code will be available.

257
Sflow Parameters
The flow stress is used in the B31G , Modified B31G and Effective Area standard to calculate the bursting
pressure. Its value has been estimated and can be calculated using three different methods. The Sflow
parameters must be set and a Sflow calculation method must be selected for every standards.
Select the standard to use to compute the burst pressure.

It is possible to select more than one or none.

Parameters used to calculate the Stress flow value


Parameter Description
Design factor Current pipeline safety regulations require new pipelines to be designed partly based on
the class location. Each class location has an associated Design Factor that must be applied
to determine the operating pressure.
Material Choose between plain carbon steel or low alloy steel.
Material grade Characteristic of the material. The SMYS value is defined automatically depending on the
selected grade. Select Manual to define the SMYS value. Available choices : A / B / X42 /
X46 / X52 / X56 / X60 / X65 / X70 / X80 / manual.
SMYS Specified minimum yield strength at ambient conditions.
Temperature Highest temperature of the pipe during operation.
Sut Specified ultimate tensile strength at operating temperature (Sflow method #3 only).
Syt Specified yield strength at operating temperature (Sflow method #3 only).

For more information, consult the Pipeline Safety Regulations in accordance with
the pipeline location.

Sflow method
The flow stress (Sflow) can be calculated in three different ways depending on the pipe material and
environment:
# Steel Temp. SMYS Other Equation Recommended for
1 Plain carbon ≤ 120°C (250°F)   (Sflow ≤ SMTS 1.1 × SMYS B31G
2 Plain carbon ≤ 120°C (250°F) ≤ 482.63 MPa (70 (Sflow ≤ SMTS SMYS + 68.95 Modified B31GEffective
Low-allow ksi) MPa (10 ksi) Area
31 Plain carbon   ≤ 551.58 MPa (80   (Sut + Syt)/2 High pipe temperature
Low-allow ksi)

1 Sut and Syt are specified at the operating temperature in accordance with the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section II, Part D, or room temperature
strength multiplied bu the temperature derating factor specified by the applicable
construction code. Linear interpolation or strength values is allowed between
listed temperatures.

258
For each standard, the method used to calculate the Sflow must be chosen among these three options
based on the previous recommendation.

259
Pressure Parameters
Two pressure values are involved in the computation:

 1. The Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP)

 2. The Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure (MAOP) is automatically calculated by the software
accordingly to Barlow’s equation:

Use custom value for MAOP: Select to enter a MAOP custom value.
See Stress Flow section for more information on SMYS.

260
Interaction Parameters
During the analysis process, corroded areas are identified and listed as corrosion features. Their
shapes and size will vary depending of the interaction parameters.

Interaction parameters
Interaction Para-
Description
meter
Method Interaction methods are used to apply ASME B31G interaction rules.
Critical factor (%) Depth (in % of wall thickness) at which a corrosion pit is deep enough to be evaluated and
listed.
Threshold for corroded Depth (in % of wall thickness) at which the corrosion feature dimensions are measured
area (%) and interaction rules are applied. Use the critical value or set another value.
Axial criteria Minimal axial distance between two corroded areas for which they will remain separated
features. Length or thickness multiplier can be used as units for this interaction criteria.
Circumferential criteria Minimal circumferential distance between two corroded areas for which they will remain
separated features. Length or thickness multiplier can be used as units for this interaction
criteria. Units for interaction criteria (length or thickness multiplier).

Interaction rules

Axial and circumferential criteria


Surrounding corroded areas may be grouped into a single feature (cluster), according to the following
interaction rules:

Each corroded area is delimited according to the selected Interaction method, at the depth
defined by the Threshold for corroded area.

Delimited areas are enlarger by ½ x Axial and Circumferential criterion (red lines).

If two enlarged areas overlap each other, they are grouped together. If there is no overlap
between two enlarged areas, it means the corroded areas have a distance between each other
at least equal to 1 x the axial and circumferential criteria.

261
 1. Individual features

 2. Interaction rules

2.1 Growing box and Connecting box


2.2 Fit to shape

 3. Feature borders

3.1 Growing box


3.2 Connecting box
3.3 Fit to shape

Feature dimensions do not include the Axial and Circumferential criteria; they are
measured at the depth defined by the threshold for corroded area.

Interaction methods
Border defin-
Method Connection mode
ition
Growing box Rectangle Enlarged rectangles. After every corrosion feature grouping, another larger
rectangle is redrawn from the new corrosion boundaries. The new enlarged
rectangle might overlap some others and the process goes on until there is no
interaction.

Connecting box Rectangle Enlarged rectangles linked together.

262
Border defin-
Method Connection mode
ition
Fit to shape Fit to shape Enlarged shapes linked together.

Critical factor and threshold


The critical factor is used to identify corrosion features:

A virtual pit-gauge depth measurement is taken in every grid (pixel) based on the scan res-
olution set by the user.

Every group of pixels deeper than the critical factor is identified as a single anomaly (called fea-
ture).

The feature dimensions start and end at the threshold depth value.

Anomalies are combined into clusters based on the interaction rules.

The threshold value must be equal or smaller than the critical factor value. If no threshold value is
entered, the feature dimensions and the interaction criteria are measured at the critical factor.

263
 1. Feature depth

 2. Critical factor (%)

 3. Threshold for corroded area (%)

 4. Corroded area (not identified as a feature)

 5. Corroded area (feature)

 6. Feature length without threshold

 7. Feature length with threshold

The critical factor determines the minimum depth that the surface must reach to
be considered damaged. An anomaly needs to contain damaged material to be
listed in the analysis results.

The size of an anomaly is computed using the threshold. Setting a threshold


different from the critical factor helps identify the extent of slightly damaged but
not critically damaged material around an anomaly.

264
Grid Resolution
Analysis grid resolution

Enter the size (resolution) of the analysis grid. This creates a grid listing the deepest point in each grid.
It is related to the grid size drawn manually on pipelines and vessels when not using a scanner.
This grid is used for:

Burst Pressure calculation for Effective Area method.

CSV deepest point export (CSV resolution based on Worst Case Profile resolution).

2D viewer deepest point display.

Display WCP results in analysis viewer and report: Select to activate the function.

A finer resolution will lead to more accurate results for the Effective Area burst
pressure. The minimal resolution is 1 mm (0.3937 in).

265
Color Map
It is possible to change the settings of the difference map, which represents the depth variation on the
pipe surface in the viewers. By default, the depth variation lying within the critical factor value appears
in green.
The following colors are set by default:

Warm colors: Negative deviations

Green: ± Critical factor

Light blue: Deviation between the critical factor value and threshold

Grey: Maximum % of wall thickness

Parameters
Parameter Description
Color scale type Select a Discrete or a Continuous scale type.
Divisions Select the number of divisions in the color map (1 to 15).
Unit type The values of the color scale divisions can be calculated in percentage of wall
thickness, percentage of pipe radius, or percentage of pipe diameter, or using the
depth value set in the Inspection Units page.
Reset divisions Reset divisions to defaults.
Reset color Click on a color of the scale to change it; click on Reset color to reset color to default.
Reset to defaults Reset all color map settings to defaults.

To edit the color map


Once the parameters are
defined:

 1. Click a color of the


scale to change it.

 2. Click a value of the


scale bar to change it
and select Enter to
accept the new value.

 3. Click the separation


between two colors
to change their
values by moving the
line up or down. Click
Reset divisions to reset
the value of divisions
to default.

266
Feature Status
Each corrosion feature has a name, but also a status to tell the user if it meets the criterion or not.
The user can select criteria and standards from the drop-down lists and set a value in the text box. It is
possible to add as many status as wanted.

Pressure related feature status will not be available when Depth analysis only is
selected.

Compliance criteria
Criterion Calculation standard
Max. depth  
RPR (MOP)1 Effective Area

RPR (MAOP)1 Modified B31G

B31G
Ratio over MOP Safe Effective Area

Ratio over MAOP Safe Modified B31G

Safe B31G
1Use design factor: Option is available when RPR (MOP) or RPR (MAOP) criterion is selected. Select to use
a value equal to 1/D.f. design factor previously entered in the SFlow Parameters page.

To add a verification criterion

 1. Click Add.

 2. Select a criterion in the first drop-down list.

 3. Select a calculation standard in the second drop-down list.

 4. Enter a value in the text box.

 5. Click Apply.

 6. To remove a verification criterion, click .

After the analysis is processed, a status icon will be displayed next to the feature.

Status icon Description

Complies with selected criterion.

267
Status icon Description

Does not comply with selected criterion.

Unable to assess.

268
Pit Gauge
Pipecheck allows an easy correlation with conventional inspection techniques. It enables defining a
virtual pit gauge that would share similar characteristics with a pit gauge used during a manual
corrosion inspection.

Recommendations
Pit gauge parameters are suggested based on the inputs given by the user.

Approximate length of the longest corrosion pit


The length of the longer corrosion pit must be entered. The longest corrosion pit represents the
longest length of a corrosion feature from nominal to nominal without using interaction rules. The
value entered will impact the amount of extension brackets use by the pit gauge.

There is a weld on the scan


Check the box if there is a weld on the scan. This will activate the Corrosion interacting with the weldbox.

Corrosion interacting with the weld


Check the box if there is corrosion interacting with a weld.
When this option is activated, the pit gauge boundary behavior is set to Automatic.

 1. Not interacting with weld

 2. Interacting with weld

Parameters

Once the inputs have been entered, the user must click for next step to get the pit gauge

269
recommendations.
At this step, it is possible to change the pit gauge parameters if required.

Pit gauge extensions


Parameter Description
Extension count Minimum and maximum number of extensions per side

Maximum allowable number of extension : 5


Center length Must be set between 50.8 mm and 152.4 mm
Extension length Must be set between 25.4 mm and 304.8 mm
Boundary pit gauge Optimize two-sided
behavior
Activate one-sided

Automatic

Do note use
Force symmetric Check this box to get a symmetrical repartition of the extension(s) on each side of
the pit gauge.

Pipecheck automatically detects the optimal combination of brackets for a specific area with respect to
the entered parameters. The pit gauge, including the extensions, is visible in the 2D viewer.

To move the pit gauge on the surface


Click a point in the 2D viewer.

 1. Pit gauge

 2. Pit gauge extension

 3. Pit gauge center length

 4. Feature

 5. Measured point

If the virtual pit gauge is too small to measure an area of the pipe, a warning
message will appear after the analysis. No measure will be taken on the affected
area, which will appear in bright color in the 2D viewer. To avoid this, select the

270
longest size for the pit gauge center part and extensions, and write 5 for the
maximum extension count.

This option will dictate how Pipecheck pit gauge behave near a boundary. A boundary is defined by an
excluded area or the end of the scan. A manually deleted area will never be seen as a boundary, so if a
surface is virtually cut in two sections, it will not represent a boundary since data was scanned at this
location.

Boundary pit gauge behavior

Optimize two-sided
Pipecheck measures depth near boundary using a two-sided pit gauge with variable center or
extension length. If it cannot fit a complete pit gauge based on the parameters, it will reduce its length
close to the boundary so it can fit and measure depth.

 1. Partial extension

 2. Full extension

Activate one-sided
Close to a boundary or an excluded area, Pipecheck will automatically measure depth using a one-
sided pit gauge . A one-sided pit gauge is mandatory if corrosion is found close to a weld.

The one-sided pit gauge is also used at the edge of the scan. The image below shows a one-sided pit
gauge at the edge of the scan when the Force symmetric option is activated.

271
Automatic
Pipecheck will decide the best way to evaluate depth near boundary and/or excluded area between the
optimize two-side or the one-sidepit gauge.

Do not use
Pipecheck does not evaluate near the boundary and/or excluded area. The width of that area is half the
size of the smallest pit gauge allowed in the parameters.

 1. Each side of excluded area not evaluated.

Force symmetric
Check the Force symmetric box to force Pipecheck to measure the entire surface with a virtual pit gauge
with a symmetric configuration (same amount of extension on each side).

272
Exclude Area
Exclude areas
Prior to the analysis, some areas as welds, dents or high surface points must be excluded.

To exclude area

 1. Define the area using a selection tool.

 2. Click Assign excluded area .

The excluded area will appear in a darker color on the scanned surface, different from the protected
area.

Assign excluded area


This function allows excluding areas from the analysis and sets a boundary between the excluded area.
The virtual pit gauge can never cross over the excluded area. Both sitting points must be on one side
or the other of the weld.
This option must be applied on welds to have an accurate analysis. It prevents Hi-Lo measurement
issues since the complete pit-gauge will always sit on one section or the other delimited by the weld
area. If corrosion is found close to the weld, the pit gauge boundary behavior must be changed
accordingly.

To manually assign an excluded area

 1. Define the area using a selection tool.

 2. Tag the selected area as excluded with the Assign excluded area button.

The excluded area will appear in a darker color on the scanned surface, different from the protected
area.

273
During the analysis, the pit gauge configuration will be automatically adjusted to the selected Boundary
pit gauge behavior in the pit gauge parameters tab.

 1. Excluded area (weld)

 2. Depth

 3. Axial

 4. Circumferential

To unassign an excluded area

 1. Select over the excluded area.

 2. Click Unassign excluded area .

Mesh display

Table 5-6 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Quads

Wire Frame

Transparent

274
Show color map: To show or hide the color map display. This option is available when editing the scan
or when an analysis was performed.

Contextual menu
Function Description
Lock rotation axis Allow to rotate the scan only around the pipe axis.
Fit to screen Centers and displays the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.
Show inside deviations on outside surface This function is available with an internal scan. It allows displaying the
color map of the internal surface on the external one for a better
visualization.
Standard view Sets the pipe display depending on the following selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow

3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

Use all surfaces


Select this option to use all surfaces for analysis.

275
Import UT Data
When the analysis type selected requires to import UT data, at the Import UT step, a dialog box opens.

 1. Browse through the Open dialog and select the UT data file (.csv or .txt) to import.

 2. Click Open.

 3. Select the format or click for the next step to define a new format. By default, the Define
new format option is selected.

To import a format

 1. Click on Import button.

 2. Browse through the Import Analysis Parameters dialog and select the analysis parameters
template (.pct).

 3. Click Open. The UT data will be imported using the selected template.

 4. If required, click Edit format button, to edit the selected format.

 5. Click for the next step.

Once a format is selected, clicking on will directly import data with that
format. The format details are shown above the imported data table.

276
Import UT Data | Step 2
Set the delimiters using drop-down lists:

Column delimiter (based on CSV file format)

Decimal delimiter (based on region and language format)

UT data from manual: Select this option if the data was acquired with a UT Manual probe.
When option is cleared, the UT data found within the external corrosion will be discarded. Instead, an
interpolation will be done using the closest data outside the corroded area.

A scan session is required for this function to work.

277
Import UT Data | Step 3
Set the orientation and starting point of the data.
Position of the first UT data: Click a cell to select the fist data. The grayed out data will not be imported.
Only UT thickness measurements should remain in white.
UT data orientation: Select the orientation of the axial and circumferential position of the UT data. It is
possible to invert the axis orientation by clicking on the relevant arrow.

In the UT data orientation, the arrow must be set in the same direction that the
position (axial or circumferential) increases.

278
279
Import UT Data | Step 4
Set the axial and circumferential reference positions and the scan resolution using the drop-down lists.

 1. Set the axial first position.

 2. Set the circumferential first position.

 3. Set the axial resolution.

 4. Set the circumferential resolution.

 5. Set the UT data unit.

It is also possible to right-click a cell in the table to assign it with one of the elements.

To save the UT data format


Enter the format name in the text field and click Save format.

Scattered UT data
Spread value over radius of: This changes the interpolation radius of UT data based on the value entered.
If data are scattered, this prevent the interpolation between each point to reach the nominal surface
creating a smoother result.

Mesh display
Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Quads

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display.

General display options


Grid: To show or hide the analysis grid.
Grid positions: To show or hide the axial and circumferential grid position.
Feature identification: To show or hide the identification number of the selected features.
ILI features: To display the ILI features.
Distances: To show or hide the distances listed.
Effective length: To display the effective length over the worst case profile when a feature is selected.
Quick rendering while moving: To reduce image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.
Lock rotation axis: Select to allow the rotation of the scan only around the pipe axis.

280
Unavailable options are grayed out.

281
Add Manual UT
Add manual UT data

This option allows to manually add UT data points on the surface of the pipe.

282
Add Manual UT
To manually add UT data points

 1. Click a point on the surface in the 3D viewer.

 2. A target sign is displayed to represent the UT data added.

 3. In the Input field, enter the remaining thickness value.

 4. Click to accept the value.

 5. Repeat the previous steps for each manual input.

 6. The UT data panel will be displayed on right.

UT data
List of the manual UT features created.
UT data are named with a numeric suffix incremented by one.

UT data details
UT data minimum thickness information is available for each manual UT feature:

Min. thickness

Axial position

Circumferential position

Scattered UT data
This value represents the spread radius value of the UT feature. This changes the interpolation radius
of UT data based on the value entered.
To change the default value, use the spin box or enter manually a value in the field.

Mesh display

Table 5-7 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Quads

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display.

General display options


Grid: To show or hide the analysis grid.
Grid positions: To show or hide the axial and circumferential grid position.

283
Feature identification: To show or hide the identification number of the selected features.
ILI features: To display the ILI features.
Distances: To show or hide the distances listed.
Effective length: To display or hide the Effective length in color on the river bottom path.
Quick rendering while moving: To reduce image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.
Lock rotation axis: Select to allow the rotation of the scan only around the pipe axis.

Unavailable options are grayed out.

284
Analysis Results
Interface

Items displayed in the 3D viewer


Item Default Note
Scanned surface Gray facets Can be displayed as Mesh or Wire Frame (see the
Display Settings section of the 3D viewer).
Analysis grid White The square size is defined by the Worst Case Profile
Resolution selected in the corrosion analysis
parameters. Zoom on the grid to see the real square
size.
Origin of the analysis grid White circle Represented without the Reference Position offset.
(See how to define reference when scanning the
pipe.)
Flow direction White arrow The orientation can be inverted in the Scanning
Parameters.
Feature boundary Blue contour The blue contour represent the feature dimensions.
Difference map of selected features   Colored representation of the depth variation on the
scanned surface. Difference Map parameters can be
modified in the Color Map tab of the corrosion
parameters dialog.
Distances Yellow See Measuring Distances to learn how to measure
distances on the surface.
Reference arrow   The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the
analysis grid and the flow direction.
River bottom path of selected features Blue See the River bottom path section for more
information.
Feature annotation Dark blue box See Feature annotation section.

3D viewer contextual menu


Function Description
Lock rotation axis Allows to rotate the scan only around the pipe axis.
Fit to screen Allows to center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D
viewer.
Show inside deviations on outside surface This function is available with an internal scan. It allows displaying the
color map of the internal surface on the external one for a better
visualization.
Standard view Set the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow

3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock
Add snapshot Create a snapshot with the active view.

285
Function Description
Hide all annotations Hide all feature annotations.
Show all annotations Show all feature annotations.

Section views in 2D viewer


The section views is surrounded by 3 graphs:
Graph Position Description
Axial section view Bottom  Axial section view of the pipe at the
circumferential position selected in the
2D viewer

Axial position of the point selected in the


2D viewer
Circumferential section view Right Circumferential section view of the pipe
at the axial position selected in the 2D
viewer

Circumferential position of the point


selected in the 2D viewer
Angular position graph Bottom right Circumferential section view of the pipe
corner  
at the axial position selected in the 2D
viewer

Angular position of the point selected in


the 2D viewer

Angular coverage of the pipe

To resize the display in the 2D viewer

 1. Move the cursor to edge of the window until seeing two sided arrows.

 2. Left click and drag the window to resize it as desired.

Items displayed in the 2D viewer


Item Default Note
Scanned surface Gray  
Analysis grid White The square size is defined by the Worst Case Profile Resolution selected
in the Corrosion analysis Parameters. Zoom on the grid to see the real
square size.
Feature boundary Blue contour The blue contour represent the feature dimensions.
Difference map of selected   Colored representation of the depth variation on the scanned surface.
features Difference Map parameters can be modified in the Color Map tab of the
corrosion parameters dialog.
River bottom path of Blue See the River Bottom Path section for more information.
selected features

286
Item Default Note
Deepest point of each square   Apply the Find deepest points function in a square of the grid to locate
in the analysis grid of its deepest points. Zoom on the grid to see each of its depth value.
selected features

287
Item Default Note
Virtual pit gauge Gray Pit gauge including the extensions.
Red The pit gauge is smaller or longer than the preset value
(parameters).
Examples:

Between two excluded areas, the pit-gauge is forced to


be smaller than the minimum dimension set in the
parameters (extension minimum: 1, extension maximum:
2).

The minimum length of the pit-gauge cannot be


respected. Therefore, the pit-gauge is smaller than its
minimal length.

A feature area (#1) has been identified as force corroded

and the pit-gauge has parameters smaller than


that area. Therefore, an extension will be added (it can
be added in both directions).

288
Item Default Note
Mouse pointer   On the fly depth: hover the mouse on a point of the 2D viewer to see its
position and depth values.
 1. Depth

 2. Axial

 3. Circumferential

Reference arrow   The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and
the flow direction.
Distances Yellow See Measuring Distance to learn how to measure distances on the
surface.

2D viewer contextual menu


Function Description
Fit image Zoom out to show the whole pipe surface.
Find deepest point Find the deepest point ( pipe, feature or current grid position).
Hide all annotations Hide all feature annotations.
Show all annotations Show all feature annotations.

Feature navigation

Sort criteria
User can sort features using the Sort criteria drop down list.

To select a feature

Click on a feature in the list of the Features navigation panel or

Double-click on a damage in the viewer.

Use Ctrl+click for multiple feature selection in the list.

To clear a selection

Click to clear a selection or

Double-click on a selected damage in the viewer.

Feature annotation
Important results are listed in the feature annotation.

289
Feature name

Maximum depth

Feature status results

Error message (1)

(1)
The sign is displayed next to the feature in error in the Navigation panel.

To move a feature annotation


Left-click and drag the annotation in the viewer.

To hide a feature annotation


Right-click on the annotation and select Hide. To display the annotation again, right-click in the viewer
and select Show all annotations.

Feature details
Depending on the interaction parameters entered, various features will be defined during the
corrosion analysis. Each feature corresponds to an isolated corroded area. Once the analysis
completed, the resulting features are listed in the Feature Navigation pane .To show a feature in the
viewers, select it from that list (use the Ctrl+Click method for multiple selections).

Feature name

Anomaly class

Axial length and circumference width

Axial length and circumference width

Maximum depth information

Total volume of material loss

River Bottom Path (RBP)


The River Bottom Path (RBP) of each feature is drawn from the feature deepest point, which consists of
the deepest point of each grid square covered by the feature.River Bottom Path is shown in the 2D and
3D viewers for each selected feature (blue line).

Worst Case Profile


The 2D viewer axial section view shows the Worst Case Profile of a selected feature (blue line).

Feature status legend

290
Status icon Description

Complies with selected criterion.

Does not comply with selected criterion.

Unable to assess.

Pressure details (Effective area, Modified B31G, B31G)

Burst pressures calculated with each standard

RPR (Rupture Pressure Ratio) value (based on MOP and MAOP)

Safe pressure (minimal calculation value obtained: Bursting Pressure *Design Factor or MAOP)

Safe pressure ratio (based on MOP and MAOP)

Mesh display

This option is available only in the 3D view.

Table 5-8 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Quads

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display.

General display options


Grid: To show or hide the analysis grid.
Grid positions: To show or hide the axial and circumferential grid position.
Feature identification: To show or hide the identification number of the selected features.
ILI features: To display the ILI features.
Distances: To show or hide the distances listed.
Effective length: To display or hide the Effective length in red color on the river bottom path.
Quick rendering while moving: To reduce image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.
3D color map: This option is available with a UT data analysis only. It allows to display the 3D color map
according to the selected display type.

291
Analysis depths (by default): True wall thickness (pit gauge and UT values)

UT data depths only

Pit gauge depths only

Unavailable options are grayed out.

2D viewer show options


Zoom on selected feature: To fit the selected feature to the screen.
Deepest points values: To display the grid deepest point. The displayed values are based on the WCP
resolution. It is possible to zoom in/out allowing to see more or less values.

Feature naming options


Use automatic names: Select to activate the function.

Activated: The anomalies (single corrosion pit) and clusters (combined corrosion pits) are auto-
matically detected and a name, with a numeric suffix incremented by one, is given
(example: DMA-1, DMA-2, etc.). To modify the automatic name:

 1. Select text in the field.

 2. Enter the new name.

 3. Click Apply.

Deactivated: By default, all detected corrosion pits are named Feature.The axial position
(upstream to downstream) determines the numeric suffix incremented by one (example: Feature
1, Feature 2, etc.)

Add anomaly class suffix: Select to add the corrosion type in the feature name.
Anomaly dimension class (1)
Axial Grooving AXGR
Axial Slotting AXSL
Circumferential Grooving CIGR
Circumferential Slotting CISL
General GENE
Pinhole PINH
Pitting PITT
(1)
Specifications and requirements for intelligent pig inspection of pipelines, Pipeline
Operators Forum, 2009.

Troubleshooting
Once the analysis is completed, user must make sure that there is no issues by looking at the depth

292
color map for possible measurement errors that are not automatically found by the software.

Common analysis issues


Pit-Gauge is too long

The pit gauge has too many extensions. This usually happens when analyzing a slightly bended
pipeline. Seeing the deflection as corrosion, Pipecheck tries to add more extensions. This error can be
seen by looking at the color-map shape creating elongated lines of corrosion. The 2D axial section also
displays a bended profile, indicating that the bent has been included in the corrosion.
To fix his issue, limit the pit gauge extensions & length.
Examples :
Pit gauge is too long

Optimal pit gauge length

Weld analysis issues


Many issues can come from a weld analysis if not well excluded from the analysis.
Hi-lo issue:

Weld is deleted. Deleted area does not create a boundary and software will still use a Two-sided pit-
gauge, creating Hi-lo issues. Always exclude the weld instead of deleting it.

293
High points :

Long corrosion lines can be seen if the pit gauge sits on a higher point than the pipe surface. This leads
to deeper measurement than reality.
Incomplete weld exclusion. Weld is not completely excluded, leaving some high points where the pit
gauge can sit on. Exclude these high points to solve the issue.

Noise / spot welds:

High points can be created when scanning a spot, remaining coating, sand or anything that was above
the scan surface. To fix this issue, delete or exclude the high points.

294
Pit-gauge behavior issues
Boundary pit-gauge behavior needs to be correctly defined when analyzing corrosion close to
boundary. Some situations can lead to possible analysis errors.
Corrosion beside weld:

Corrosion beside weld needs to be analyzed using a one-sided pit gauge (activate One-sided or
Automatic parameter) and not using an Optimize two-sided.
Optimized two-sided (incorrect parameter)

Activate One-sided or Automatic (correct parameter)

295
Local deformation close to boundary
Local deformation can cause the one-sided pit gauge to lift, especially when using extensions. Try to
use no extension (or smallest as possible) to fix this issue. The other possibility would be not to analyze
anything close to boundary if there is no corrosion.
Long one-sided extension (incorrect parameter for this situation)

No one-sided extension (correct parameter for this situation)

296
Import ILI
Import ILI data

Select this option to start the import process of ILI data.

Do not import

Select this option to go to the next step without importing ILI data.

297
Import ILI
The ILI correlation tool allows correlating in-line inspection data with 3D scanning inspection data
provided by Pipecheck.
To properly assess the performances of the ILI tool, operators need to carry out statistically-significant
population analyzes with a device offering better accuracy than magnetic-flux leakage (MFL)
technology.
The scanners quickly capture metal loss and damaged areas, and help building a larger and acceptable
population for statistical analysis.
Operators can assess ILI performances by comparing pig data against Pipecheck data to determine
with more precision the sites that actually need to be dug.

To import ILI data

 1. Click Import ILI data.

 2. Browse through the Open dialog box and select the ILI data file (.csv or .txt) to import.

 3. Click Open.

 4. Select the format or click for the next step to define a new format. It is also possible to
import a format template (.pct) by clicking the Import button.

298
Import ILI | Step 2
To set the starting point and delimiters using drop-down lists

 1. Select the first row to import.

 2. Choose the Column delimiter.

 3. Choose the Decimal delimiter.

The delimiters will follow your Windows number format settings.If you are
experiencing some problems finding a delimiter, you may need to change your
Windows format settings or to save the file in Excel to apply your own number
format.

299
Import ILI | Step 3
To set the column locations for the different parameters

 1. Make sure to enter the appropriate reference position of the ILI feature.

 1. Axial position taken at

 2. Circ. position taken at

 3. Top

 4. Center

 5. Bottom

 6. Left

 7. Center

 8. Right

 2. Enter the format name in the appropriate field.

 3. Click Save format button.

Once imported, the ILI data will show up in the 3D viewer.

300
Report Type
Select the type of report to export.

XLS
Complete formatted report (.xls).

Overview page

One analysis result per feature

Signatures page

CSV
Light report (.csv).

One line par analyzed feature

No parameters, only the analysis results

Deepest points
Export of a depth grid containing the deepest points in each grid.
The depth grid can be exported for:

All pipe

All features

Selected features

By default, the depth values are exported in a .csv file where:

The columns represent the axial position(s).

The row represents the circumferential position(s).

The difference between two positions, either axial or circumferential, is equal to the resolution
defined in the Grid Resolution page (analysis grid resolution).

The orientation can be modified trough the CSV Export parameters. The .csv file can be easily viewed in
Excel worksheet.

No report
No report to export.

301
Report Parameters
XLS report
CSV report
Deepest points report

302
Excel Report Parameters
Scan date: Date that the scan was performed.
Report creation date: Date that the report was created.
Number of decimal places: Select the desired number of digits following the decimal point.
Sort criteria: Sort the features using the criteria drop-down list.

Use Ctrl+Click to select multiple features.

Overview page

Data to show below position information: Select the additional information to show below the starting
position (axial and circumferential) in the Overview page of the report.

End position

Length

None

Pressure data - first row : Decide what pressure parameter appears on the first row in the Feature
summary section.
Pressure data - second row: Decide what pressure parameter appears on the second row in the Feature
summary section.
Additional depth data: Select the additional information to show below the Max. depthdata information
in the Features summary section of the Overview page of the report.

Remaining wall

% re. wall

% max. depth

None

Feature page

Data to show below position information: Select the additional information to show in the Results section
of each Feature page of the report. It is possible to select one option or both.

End position

Length

Pressure data: Select the different types of pressure data to display in the report.
Safe pressure data: Select the different types of safe pressure data to display in the report.

303
Other data: Select other types of data (example: Effective length) to display in the report.

General

Unlock all report cells: All cells are locked by default in Excel. Select to unlock cells.
Allow reference arrow to show in overview: Select to show the reference arrow on the picture displayed on
the Overview page of the report.
Logo: Click Import to add a logo (such as a company logo) that will be displayed on all pages of the
report. Click Clear to delete it.
Disclaimer: Enter the disclaimer text in the text field.

304
CSV Report Parameters
Scan date: Date that the scan was performed.
Report creation date: Date that the report was created.
Number of decimal places: Select the desired number of digits following the decimal point.
Sort criteria: Sort the features using the criteria drop-down list.

Use Ctrl+Click to select multiple features.

305
Deepest Points Report Parameters
Scan date: Date that the scan was performed.
Number of decimal places: Select the desired number of digits following the decimal point.
Export points for:

All pipe: Select this option to export deepest points data for the whole pipe.

All features: Select this option to export deepest points data for all features. Sort the features
using the criteria drop-down list.

Selected features: Select this option to export deepest points data for selected features. Sort the
features using the criteria drop-down list. To select features use the Ctrl+Click method.

Exported value: Select the value to export (Depth or Remaining wall).


Orientation: Select an Orientation type for the table (normal or transposed).

306
Export Report
Use this function to export an analysis report and save it.

To export a report

 1. In the Save as dialog, in the Folder pane, choose the location and folder where to save the file.

 2. In the File name field, type a name for the file.

 3. In the Save as type list, accept the default file type (.pcf).

 4. Click Save.

307
Save Session
Use this option to save the current session.

To save a session

 1. Click .

 2. Navigate through the required folder to save the session.

 3. Type a name for the session in the File name box.

 4. Click Save.

308
Save Workflow
Save a specific session workflow (.wct file). The structure and parameters will be saved.

To save a workflow

 1. Click .

 2. Navigate through the Export Workflow Data dialog box and choose the folder to save the file.

 3. Type the file name.

 4. Click Save.

309
Dent Module
Nominal information
Import scan
Edit scan
Geometry type
Straighten scan
Manual alignment
Inspection parameters
Analysis diameter
Interactions
Interaction parameters
Depth color map
Strain
Strain parameters
Strain color map
Feature status
Analysis results
Import ILI
Report type
Report parameters
Export report
Save session
Save workflow
Final options

310
Nominal Information
Nominal outside diameter

The Nominal outside diameter must correspond to the real diameter of the pipe. For instance 323.85 mm
(12.75 in) must be entered for a 300 mm (12 in) nominal pipe. For internal scans, the outside diameter
still have to be used.

Pipe wall thickness

The pipe wall thickness (NWT) must be entered in the Thickness field.

311
Import Scan
Import scan
When selected, a dialog box opens:

 1. Browse the scan file (.pcf) through the Pipecheck - Open Session dialog box.

 2. Click Open.

 3. Click for the next step.

It is possible to import single sections of the long scan.

312
Edit Scan
Some surfaces have to be deleted prior to the analysis process. The remaining surfaces must have only
a curvature in one direction.

Delete any of these surfaces :


Trailing edges.

Other element that does not belong to the main surface.

Isolated mesh patches.

Use the selection tools to:


Delete unwanted areas.

Modify the resolution of an area.

Clean the edge of the scan.

Once the scan is edited, click Next to accept.


Examples:

To edit scan

 1. Select a selection tool in the mini-toolbar.

 2. Hold Ctrl+Click and make the selection.

 3. To deselect a part of the selection, use Ctrl+Shift+Click.

 4. Once the scan is edited, click Next to accept.

Edit scan function is available during or after the scan acquisition.

Mesh display

Table 5-9 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

313
Triangles

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display. This option is available when an analysis was
performed.

General display options


Quick rendering while moving: Reduces image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.

Section s for analysis


Whole model: Default option which meant the whole model will be analyzed. Add section to analyze a
specific section and/or multiple sections.

To add section

 1. Select a selection tool in the mini-toolbar.

 2. Hold Ctrl+Click and make the selection.

 3. To deselect a part of the selection, use Ctrl+Shift+Click.

 4. Click Add in the Sections for analysis section.

By default, a name is given with a numeric suffix incremented by one.

To rename a section

 1. Double-click the section name.

 2. Enter the new name.

 3. Press Enter.

Although it is possible to add several sections, only one analysis can be done at a
time. Once a section analysis process is started, if another section is selected, a
new analysis will started and the analysis of the previous section will be lost.
Make sure to save each analysis done.

Selection tools
Selection tools are available through the mini toolbar which is in the upper left corner of the 3D viewer.
It can be displayed in Compact or Expanded mode using the drop-down arrow. To change the display
mode, click the ▼ in the mini toolbar and select the required display mode.

314
Function Description

Rectangle: To create a rectangular shape selection. Hold Ctrl and left-click, and release it when the
selection is completed.

Free-form: To create a free form selection (lasso). For a straight line contour, hold Ctrl and left-
click.For a free curve contour, hold Ctrl and hold the mouse left button. Once the selection is
completed, right-click to end it or release the Ctrl key.
Brush: This tool allows a brush shape selection (square, circle, oval and so on) with customized
thickness.For a straight line, press Ctrl+the mouse left button.For a free curve, press Ctrl and hold
the mouse left button.Once the selection is completed, right-click to end it or release the Ctrl key.
The Brush size slider allows adjusting the thickness.

Connect: This tool allows to select all triangles connected to a given triangle.

Sudden change: This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to others until sudden curvature
change appears in the mesh using Ctrl+Left mouse button.

Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.


Similar curvature: This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to other triangles with same
curvature.

Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.

Select through: This tool allows to select all the triangles within an area, even those on a different
layer.

Select target with surface: This tool allows to select target (s) with surface.

Select backface: This tool allows to select in the negative normal of the mesh in addition to the
positive normal.

Clear selection: This tool allows clearing the current surface selection.

Inverse selection: This tool allows inverting the current selection; unselected surface will be selected.
In opposition, selected surface will no longer be part of the selection.

Grow selection: This tool increases the current selection size by adding a layer of triangles for each
mouse click (1 triangle in every direction).

Shrink selection: This tool decreases the current selection size by removing a layer of triangles for
each mouse click (1 triangle in every direction).

Editing tools
Icon Function Description

Delete To delete the selected triangles on the scan surface.

315
Icon Function Description

Delete To delete permanently isolated patches that are not connected to the main object. It is
isolated possible to delete isolated patches while scanning.

Increase To increase the selected triangles resolution. Option available with the HandySCAN 3D
resolution scanner (307/700).

Decrease To decrease the selected triangles resolution. Option available with the HandySCAN 3D
resolution scanner (307/700).

Mandatory operation that optimizes the scan surface prior the analysis. It applies the
Finalize Optimize volumetric accuracy function when it is selected. Option is available using a
HandySCAN BLACK scanner.

Contextual menu
Function Description
Lock rotation axis Allow to rotate the scan only around the pipe axis.
Centers and displays the entire scan data in the center of the 3D
Fit to screen
viewer.
This function is available with an internal scan. It allows displaying
Show inside deviations on outside
the color map of the internal surface on the external one for a better
surface
visualization.

Sets the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow
Standard view 3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

316
Geometry Type
Choose the geometry type between available options.

Straight

Select this option if the pipe visually looks straight (without apparent curves).

Curved

Select this option if the pipe has field bends (curved).

The software is limited to the analysis of curved pipes. Pipes with elbows cannot
be analyzed using Pipecheck.

317
Straighten Scan

Curved pipe
To get an accurate analysis, curved pipes need to be straightened. Pipecheck has the capability of
straightening slightly curved pipes, but it is not designed to straighten small curvature radius, such as
90° elbows.
Pipecheck uses short cylinders to separate the bended pipe into many straight sections. These sections
are straighten and realigned in order to get a straight cylinder. A smaller cylinder value is needed for
smaller curvature radius. This value can be defined under Straight Cylinder Length in the straightening
tool. The minimum Straight Cylinder Length is about 10-12 times the scanning resolution.
Each section needs to be almost perfectly straight to have efficient straightening. The Straight cylinder
length should be chosen by locking at the color-map around the straight cylinder. The green color
indicates that the section is straight and the cylinder length should be good.
When a pipe is straighten, Pipecheck stretches the inside curvature surface to make sure the whole
cylinder has the same length. Pipecheck never shrinks any surface.

Before Straightening After Straightening

1. Outside curvature surface 3. Outside curvature surface

2. Inside curvature surface 4. Inside curvature surface

First, verify the nominal diameter of the pipe.


Then, align the cylinder on the pipe. There are 2 ways to do this:
Use the selection tools to select a straight section, then click Align cylinder button
to automatically align the cylinder with the selected section of the pipe
or
Click Move grid button to manually align the cylinder with a section of the pipe.
Adjust the length of the cylinder so that more green than red is visible. Use the
Exclude or Restore button with the selection tools to define sections that the
straightening will not use.
Click Apply to launch the straightening computation. the straightened pipe will

318
appear when completed.
Click Next to accept the straightened pipe, or modify the parameters and reapply
to get a different result.

Selection tools
See Edit Scan section.

To straighten a pipe

 1. Define the Nominal outside diameter.

 2. Define the Straight cylinder length.

 3. Exclude area from cylinder straightening .

Some areas such as dents and flanges might affect the cylinder straightening. It is
possible to exclude them from the straightening by selecting them and use the
Exclude from cylinder tool in the toolbar or main menu. These areas will not affect
the straightening process, but will still be straightened. To restore some areas,
Restore to Cylinder tool can be used.

 4. Click Apply to launch the straightening process.

Move grid / Move viewpoint


The Move grid function allows to manually drag and align the grid (dotted white cylinder) over the
scanned pipe.
The Move viewpoint function allows to move the 3D view.

319
An accordion surface profile or a repetitive corrosion pattern in the section view might mean that the
cylinder length is too large and should be changed.

Cancel cylinder straightening


Click Cancel cylinder straightening button to cancel the previous straightening operation.

Users need to be careful when analyzing a feature extracted from straightened


cylinder since the burst pressures might not comply with ASME B31G computation
methods. A warning message will be shown under the details of each feature
created from a straightened cylinder.

Highly bended pipes might not be suitable for straightening operation.

320
Manual Alignment
Manual alignment needs to be done when a best fit cylinder cannot be extracted from the scan data.
The cylindrical fit uses the initial parameters entered by the user (diameter). By example, this can
happens when scanning:

Floor surrounding or background

Perpendicular pipe

Anything scanned which is connected to the pipe itself

Pipecheck automatically detects such situations and allows a manual alignment tool. If so, an error
message will appear at the end of the scanning process.

Manual data alignment


Define the Nominal outside diameter and Pipe wall thickness.

Move grid
Move grid function allows to manually drag and align the grid (dotted white cylinder) over the scanned
pipe.

Move viewpoint
Move viewpoint function allows to move the 3D view.

To process the manual alignment


The grid must be pre-aligned on the scan data. Once done, the surface close to the grid becomes
green and the software uses them to optimize the alignment.

To align the grid


Use Move grid function or Align cylinder.

 1. Make a selection on the scan data to align.

 2. Click to align the cylinder.

 3. Click Apply.

321
If the manual alignment did not work properly

First, verify the nominal diameter and wall thickness of the pipe. Then, align the
cylinder of the pipe. There are 2 ways to do this:
Use the selection tools to select a straight section, then click Align cylinder button
to automatically align the cylinder with the selected section of the pipe
or
Click the Move grid button to manually align the cylinder with a section of the pipe.
Use the tools to make selections and clean the scan.
Click the Apply button to launch the alignment computation. The Next button will
become available when the alignment is validated.

322
Inspection Parameters
Information concerning a specific project can be entered here.

Pipe owner

Pipe name

Technician name

Inspector name

The entered information will appear in the analysis report.

323
Analysis Diameter
Critical factor
Percentage of the pipe radius at which a dent is deep enough to be identified as dent feature. The
results display will depend on the on critical factor. Positive deviations (higher than critical factor) are
displayed in cold color and the negative in warm color (lower than critical factor). Insignificant deviation
(within critical factor value) are displayed in green.

Critical factor units


The percentage radius unit can be selected using the drop-down list.

Deviation vector multiplier


Lengthen the deviation vectors of the section views to see them more easily.

Create shoulder sections


Automatically creates circumferential sections on either side of a defect, using a given distance (distance
from deepest points).

Assess damage with

Pipe diameter: Corresponds to the input nominal diameter.

Calculated diameter: Corresponds to the calculated diameter from the surface scanned.

Radial deviations are measured between scan data and a perfect cylinder using
the selected diameter. The calculated diameter is more accurate especially for
partial scan.

Black : Scan data


Blue: Perfect cylinder
Red: Deviation vectors

324
Interactions
Use interaction rules

Select this option to use interaction rules.

Do not use rules

Select this option to go to the next step without using interaction rules.

325
Interaction Parameters
Use a threshold value identical to the critical factor value: Select to use the critical factor value for threshold.
Other value: Percentage of the pipe radius at which the feature dimensions are measured. This option is
available only if Use a threshold value identical to the critical factor value option is disable.
Axial criteria: Minimal axial distance between two dent areas for which they will remain separated
features.
Circumferential criteria: Minimal circumferential distance between two dent areas for which they will
remain separated features.

The critical factor determines the minimum depth that the surface must reach to
be considered damaged. An anomaly needs to contain damaged material to be
listed in the analysis results.

The size of an anomaly is computed using the threshold. Setting a threshold


different from the critical factor helps identify the extent of slightly damaged but
not critically damaged material around an anomaly.

326
Depth Color Map
The depth color map illustrates the radial deviations on the pipe surface in the viewers.
The following colors are set by default:

Warm colors: Negative deviations

Green: ± Critical factor

Cold colors: Positive deviations

Grey: Maximum and minimum % of pipe radius

Parameters
Parameter Description
Color scale type Select a Discrete or a Continuous scale type.
Positive divisions Select the number of positive divisions in the color map (maximum of 15).
Negative divisions Number of negative divisions; automatically set according to the number of positive
divisions.
Symmetric Check the box to get a symmetric color scale (same separations on positive and
negative sides). Clear the check box to modify the negative divisions amount.
Unit type The values of the color scale divisions can be calculated in percentage of wall thickness,
percentage of pipe radius, percentage of pipe diameter or using the depth value.
Reset divisions Restore the default display color map with default divisions.
Reset color Click on a color of the scale to change it; click on Reset color to go back to the default
color.
Reset to defaults Restore all the default settings.

To edit the depth color map

 1. Select a Discrete or aContinuous color scale type.

 2. Select the number of divisions (1 to 15) for each side of the scale (positive and negative depth
values).

 3. Select a symmetric color scale (same separations on positive and negative sides) if needed.

 4. Click on a color of the scale to change it for another color; click on Reset color to come back to
the default color.

 5. Click on a value of the scale bar to change it and press Enter to accept the new value.

 6. Click on the separation between two colors to change their values by moving the line up or
down; click on Reset divisions to restore color separations of equal size.

 7. Click on Reset to defaults to restore the default color map.

327
Strain
Depth analysis only

Select this option to analyze only the depth.

Depth and strain analysis

Select this option to analyze depth and strain. This analysis is based on the ASME B31.8-2018 standard.

Corrosion might be found in dents, where a direct pit-gauge measurement


cannot be done. To analyze corrosion inside dents, the Corrosion and Dent
modules must be used. Please refer to the Classic mode.

328
Strain Parameters
Critical factor (%)
The critical factor is the effective strain limit. The default value is 6 %, but it can be set by the user. The
results display will depend on the on critical factor. Values higher than the strain limit will appear in
warm colors indicating possible defects.

Distance for curvature computation


Axial distance: The axial search distance used to select points on the dent surface in order to fit a circle
that provides the radius of curvature in longitudinal plane (R2).
Circumferential distance: The circumferential search distance used to select points on the dent surface in
order to fit a circle that provides the radius of curvature in transverse plane (R1).

329
Strain Color Map
Pipecheck uses the point-to-point strain values to create a strain-based color map.
The strain color map can be used to change the settings of the dent strain color map, which illustrates
the strain values on the pipe surface in the viewers.
The following colors are set by default:

Warm colors: Positive strain values

Green: ± Critical factor

Cold colors: Negative strain values

Grey: Maximum % of wall thickness

By default, the strain variation lying within the critical factor value appears in green.

Parameters
Parameter Description
Color scale type Select a Discrete or a Continuous scale type.
Positive divisions Select the number of positive divisions in the color map (maximum of 15).
Negative divisions Number of negative divisions; by default this number is set according to the number of
positive divisions.
Symmetric Check the box to get a symmetric color scale (same separations on positive and negative
sides). Clear the check box to modify the negative divisions amount.
Reset divisions Restore the default display color map with default divisions.
Reset color Click on a color of the scale to change it; click on Reset color to go back to the default
color.
Reset to defaults Restore all the default settings.

To edit the strain color map


Once the parameters are defined:

 1. Click on a color of the scale to


change it.

 2. Click on a value of the scale bar


to change it and press Enter to
accept the new value.

 3. Click on the separation between


two colors to change their values
by moving the line up or down.

330
Feature Status
Each dent feature has a name, but also a status to tell the user if it meets the criterion or not. The user
can select criteria and controls from the drop-down lists and set a percentage value in the text box. It is
possible to add as many status as wanted.

Compliance criteria

Criterion Calculation standard

Rad. depth Radius measurement at deepest point.

Rmin
Minimum and maximum radius measurement at deepest point.
Rmax

Rmin/Rnominal
Minimum and maximum radius ratio to nominal.
Rmax/Rnominal

Axial straight edge depth


Axial and circumferential straight edge depth
Circ. straight edge depth

Diam at deepest point Diameter with caliper at deepest point

Diam max Maximum diameter with caliper on all scanned data

Effective maximum strain


Effective internal strain
Effective external strain
Based on strain calculation assessment.
Circumferential bending strain
Longitudinal bending strain
Longitudinal extension strain

Use design factor: This option is available when RPR (MOP) or RPR (MAOP) criterion is selected. Select to
use a value equal to 1/D.f. design factor previously entered in the SFlow Parameters page.

To add a verification criterion

 1. Select a criterion in the first drop-down list.

 2. Select a control in the second drop-down list.

 3. Enter a percentage value in the text box.

 4. Choose a unit.

 5. Click Add to add one more criterion.

331
 6. To remove a verification criterion, click to clear the selection.

Status icon
Status icon Description

Complies with selected criterion.

Does not comply with selected criterion.

Unable to assess.

332
Analysis Results
Pipecheck uses the following workflow to analyze a dent :

 1. Deviations measurement : Distances are measured in each grid (based on scan resolution) from
the nominal cylinder to the scan surface.

Deviations can be negative or positive.

 2. Depth Color Map : A color map (depth color map ) is established based on the deviations
measurement. Each pixel has a color based on its deviation.

 3. Feature dimensions and identification : Anomalies are identified using a Critical factor. These are
call Features in Pipecheck. Once anomalies are found, their dimensions are defined based on the
selected method.

 4. Measurements : Straight-edge depths and other measurements are taken for every feature.

Interface

Items displayed in the 2D viewer and 3D viewer


Item Default Note
Analysis grid White The square size is defined by the Worst Case Profile
Resolution selected in the corrosion analysis parameters.
Zoom on the grid to see the real square size.
Feature boundary Blue contour The blue contour represent the feature dimensions.
Straight-edge Gray The straight-edge is displayed in the 2D viewer using
Classic view.
Feature annotation   Annotation contains important feature information, error
message if so and the status based on dent.
Circumferential section profile On right of the Axial
unrolled viewer
Circumferential

Angular position graph


Deviation vectors Color map color Whiskers of an axial or circumferential section. Right-
click on the 3D viewer to show or hide the section
whiskers.
Deviation values Numerical values Deviation value at the grid position of the feature.
displayed

3D viewer contextual menu


Function Description
Lock rotation axis Check that box to allow the rotation of the scan only around the
rotation axis.
Fit to screen Centers and displays the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.

333
Function Description
Show inside deviations on outside surface This function is available with an internal scan. It allows displaying the
color map of the internal surface on the external one for a better
visualization.
Standard view Sets the pipe display depending on the following selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow

3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock
Add snapshot Creates a snapshot with the active view.
Hide all annotations Hide all feature annotations.
Show all annotations Show all feature annotations.

2D viewer contextual menu


Function Description
Fit image Zoom out to show the whole pipe surface.
Find max. deviation  

of pipe

in feature
Hide all annotations Hide all feature annotations.
Show all annotations Show all feature annotations.

Section views
The section views provide three sources of information:

 1. Axial section view

 2. Circumferential section view

 3. Angular position graph

To resize the display in the 2D viewer

 1. Move the cursor to edge of the window until seeing two sided arrows.

 2. Left click and drag the window to resize it as desired.

Graph Position Description


Axial section view Bottom Axial section view of the pipe at the circumferential position
  selected in the 2D viewer

Axial position of the point selected in the 2D viewer

334
Graph Position Description
Circumferential Right Circumferential section view of the pipe at the axial position
section view
selected in the 2D viewer

Circumferential position of the point selected in the 2D


viewer
Angular position Bottom right Circumferential section view of the pipe at the axial position
graph corner
selected in the 2D viewer

Angular position of the point selected in the 2D viewer

Angular coverage of the pipe

Feature navigation
Sort criteria
User can sort features using the Sort criteria drop down list.
To select a feature

Click on a feature in the list of the Features navigation panel.

Double click on a damage in the viewer.

Use Ctrl+Click method for multiple feature selection in the list.

To clear the selection

Click .

Feature annotation
Important results are listed in the feature annotation.

Feature name

Maximum depth

Feature status results

Error message

To move a feature annotation


Left-click and drag the annotation in the viewer.
To hide a feature annotation
Right-click on the annotation and select Hide. To display the annotation again, right-click in the viewer
and select Show all annotations.

Feature details

335
Detail Description
Feature name Name of the feature.
Section count Number of sections created for this feature.
Axial length Feature size.

Circumferential width
Radius and diameter Maximum and minimum radius found on the feature, maximum diameter of the
pipe, diameter at deepest point and diameter at 90° of deepest point.
Axial and circumferential The feature deepest point location.
position of maximum depth
Radial depth Depth of the deepest point measured from the pipe diameter (taken along the pipe
radius).
Straight-edge depth Depth of the deepest point evaluated with a Straight-Edge tool along the pipe axis
(axial depth) and circumference (circumferential depth).

Diameter Measurements

336
 1. Circumferential Straight edge depth

 2. Nominal radius

 3. Minimum radius (Rmin)

 4. Nominal diameter

 5. Diameter at deepest point

 6. Diameter at 90° of deepest point

Depth-based analysis
Detail Description
Axial and
circumferential
position of The feature deepest point location
maximum
depth

337
Detail Description

Depth of the deepest point measured from the pipe diameter (taken along
the pipe radius).

The radial depth is the measured distance from the pipe diameter to the
scanned surface. The measure is taken along the pipe radius. The pipe
Radial depth
diameter value depends on the selection made in the dent parameters. It is
either the nominal diameter input in Pipecheck or the measured diameter
which is automatically calculated. This method is used to evaluate the
deviation of each square of the grid and to identify the feature deepest point.
Straight-edge Depth of the deepest point evaluated with a straight edge tool along the pipe axis (axial depth)
depth and circumference (circumferential depth).

Feature status legend


Status icon Description

Complies with selected criterion.

Does not comply with selected criterion.

Unable to assess.

Strain B31.8-2018
Pipecheck is ASME B31.8-2018 code compliant where pipe failure is determined by the value of an
effective strain. The effective strain is the combination of three different strains. Their values can be
obtained from formulas where measurement of two radius (R1 & R2) at the maximum depth is needed.

Dent Apex

Strain values at deepest point

Point-to-point

Maximum strain values found on the pipe

Mesh display

Table 5-10 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

338
Quads

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display.

General display options


Grid: To show or hide the analysis grid.
Grid positions: To show or hide the axial and circumferential grid position.
Feature identification: To show or hide the identification number of the selected features.
ILI features: To display the ILI features.
Distances: To show or hide the distances listed.
Deviation vectors: Whiskers of an axial or circumferential section. Right-click on the 3D viewer to show or
hide the section whiskers.
Quick rendering while moving: To reduce image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.

Unavailable options are grayed out.

2D viewer show options


Zoom on selected feature: To fit the feature to the screen size.
Straight edge: To display the straight edge when a specific section is selected.
Deviation values: To display the deviation values at the grid position of the selected features.
Curvature radius: This option is available with the Strain analysis. To display the curvature radius:

 1. Select a strain color map in the General Display Options.

 2. Select a feature. The curvature radius will be displayed in blue in the Axial and Angular position
graph sections.

By default, the Axial and Circumferential distances are displayed in blue when Curvature radius option is
unchecked.

Unavailable options are grayed out.

Troubleshooting

Feature too close to the edge


A warning message appears if a deviation exceeding the critical factor is detected on the edges of the
scan while analyzing the entire surface (the analysis of the scanned surface is still carried out). The dent
analysis might not be optimal when:

339
There is not enough scanned surface on the borders of a dent.
Scan the missing parts, particularly around the damage to avoid points deeper than the critical factor
on the edges of the scan. The damage must be surrounded by green and all the points on the edges of
the scan must be green too.

 1. Points that are deeper than critical

 2. Surface border

 3. Points within the critical factor (green area)

 
Enough data around the dent:

The deformation of the pipe is such that the deviation value of the edges is higher than the critical factor.
The warning message can be ignored since those deeper points are not linked to a dent. In the
example below, although the border of the surface is orange, enough scanned surface (green)
surrounds the dent.

340
 1. Dent

 2. Surface border (point deeper than the critical factor)

 3. Dent

 4. Surface border (point deeper than the critical factor)

 5. Nominal diameter

The Feature too close to the edge message appears when points deeper than the critical factor affect the
borders of the scan (yellow/orange). If they pertain to a defect, extra surface must be scanned around
it. Otherwise the warning message can be ignored.
No warning message will appear if a dent has been assigned by the user, even if the assigned area
does not include the whole dent, or if positive deformations bigger than the critical factor are detected
on the edges of the scan (blue area).

Feature with data exceeding the critical factor


A warning message will appear:
The scanned surface has no defect bigger than the critical factor (the entire surface becomes green after
analysis).
The analysis will not be possible since a deepest point must be identified.

341
Import ILI
Import ILI data

Select this option to start the import process of ILI data.

Do not import

Select this option to go to the next step without importing ILI data.

342
Import ILI
The ILI correlation tool allows correlating in-line inspection data with 3D scanning inspection data
provided by Pipecheck.
To properly assess the performances of the ILI tool, operators need to carry out statistically-significant
population analyzes with a device offering better accuracy than magnetic-flux leakage (MFL)
technology.
The scanners quickly capture metal loss and damaged areas, and help building a larger and acceptable
population for statistical analysis.
Operators can assess ILI performances by comparing pig data against Pipecheck data to determine
with more precision the sites that actually need to be dug.

To import ILI data

 1. Click Import ILI data.

 2. Browse through the Open dialog box and select the ILI data file (.csv or .txt) to import.

 3. Click Open.

 4. Select the format or click for the next step to define a new format. It is also possible to
import a format template (.pct) by clicking the Import button.

343
Import ILI | Step 2
To set the starting point and delimiters using drop-down lists

 1. Select the first row to import.

 2. Choose the Column delimiter.

 3. Choose the Decimal delimiter.

The delimiters will follow your Windows number format settings.If you are
experiencing some problems finding a delimiter, you may need to change your
Windows format settings or to save the file in Excel to apply your own number
format.

344
Import ILI | Step 3
To set the column locations for the different parameters

 1. Make sure to enter the appropriate reference position of the ILI feature.

 1. Axial position taken at

 2. Circ. position taken at

 3. Top

 4. Center

 5. Bottom

 6. Left

 7. Center

 8. Right

 2. Enter the format name in the appropriate field.

 3. Click Save format button.

Once imported, the ILI data will show up in the 3D viewer.

345
Report Type
Select the type of report to export.

XLS
Complete formatted report (.xls).

Overview page

One analysis result per feature

CSV
Light report (.csv).

One line par analyzed feature

No parameters, only the analysis results

Deviation Values
Export of the deviation (at grid corner) measured of the analysis grid for a specific area of the pipe
based on the scan resolution.
The deviation values for one of the following selection:

All pipe

All features

Selected feature (s)

The values will be exported in a table (.csv) of the same size and shape as the analysis grid for the
selected area, where:

The columns represent the axial position(s).

The rows represent the circumferential position(s).

The difference between two positions, either axial or circumferential, is equal to the resolution
defined in the Grid Resolution page (analysis grid resolution).

The CSV file can be easily viewed in an Excel worksheet.

No report
No report to export.

346
Report Parameters
XLS report
CSV report
Deviation values report

347
Excel Report Parameters
Scan date: Date that the scan was performed.
Report creation date: Date that the report was created.
Number of decimal places: Select the desired number of digits following the decimal point.
Sort criteria: Sort the features using the criteria drop-down list.

Use Ctrl+Click to select multiple features.

Unlock all report cells: All cells are locked by default in Excel. Select to unlock cells.
Allow reference arrow to show in overview: Select to show the reference arrow on the picture displayed on
the Overview page of the report.
Logo: Click Import to add a logo (such as a company logo) that will be displayed on all pages of the
report. Click Clear to delete it.
Disclaimer: Enter the disclaimer text in the text field.

348
CSV Report Parameters
Scan date: Date that the scan was performed.
Report creation date: Date that the report was created.
Number of decimal places: Select the desired number of digits following the decimal point.
Sort criteria: Sort the features using the criteria drop-down list.

Use Ctrl+Click to select multiple features.

349
Deviation Values Report Parameters
Scan date: Date that the scan was performed.
Number of decimal places: Select the desired number of digits following the decimal point.
Export points for:

All pipe: Select this option to export deviation grid data for the whole pipe.

All features: Select this option to export deviation grid data for all features. Sort the features
using the criteria drop-down list.

Selected features: Select this option to export deviation grid data for selected features. Sort the
features using the criteria drop-down list. To select features use the Ctrl+Click method.

Sort criteria: Sort the features using the criteria drop-down list (not available if All pipe option is selected
in Export points for parameter.
Values to export: The positive and negative deviation values will be exported in a table (.csv) of the same
size and shape as the analysis grid for the selected area, where:

The columns represent the axial position (s).

The rows represent the circumferential position (s).

The difference between two positions, either axial or circumferential, is equal to the scan res-
olution defined in the Scan parameters (size of the grid squares).

This parameters is available with the strain analysis.


It does not export the deviation point of a grid based on the specified resolution,
but exports the deviation at the grid corner.

Orientation: Select an Orientation type for the table (normal or transposed), the angle representing the
axial position, and the height being the circumferential position.

350
Export Report
Use this function to export an analysis report and save it.

To export a report

 1. In the Save as dialog, in the Folder pane, choose the location and folder where to save the file.

 2. In the File name field, type a name for the file.

 3. In the Save as type list, accept the default file type (.pcf).

 4. Click Save.

351
Save Session
Use this option to save the current session.

To save a session

 1. Click .

 2. Navigate through the required folder to save the session.

 3. Type a name for the session in the File namebox.

 4. Click Save.

352
Save Workflow
Save a specific session workflow (.wct file). The structure and parameters will be saved.

To save a workflow

 1. Click .

 2. Navigate through the Export Workflow Data dialog box and choose the folder to save the file.

 3. Type the file name.

 4. Click Save.

353
Wrinkle Module
Nominal information
Import scan
Edit scan
Inspection parameters
Analysis parameters
Color map
Analysis results
Report type
Export report
Save session
Save workflow
Final options

354
Nominal Information
Nominal outside diameter

The Nominal outside diameter must correspond to the real diameter of the pipe. For instance 323.85 mm
(12.75 in) must be entered for a 300 mm (12 in) nominal pipe. For internal scans, the outside diameter
still have to be used.

Pipe wall thickness

The pipe wall thickness (NWT) must be entered in the Thickness field.

355
Import Scan
Import scan
When selected, a dialog box opens:

 1. Browse the scan file (.pcf) through the Pipecheck - Open Session dialog box.

 2. Click Open.

 3. Click for the next step.

It is possible to import single sections of the long scan.

356
Edit Scan
Some surfaces have to be deleted prior to the analysis process. The remaining surfaces must have only
a curvature in one direction.

Delete any of these surfaces :


Trailing edges.

Other element that does not belong to the main surface.

Isolated mesh patches.

Use the selection tools to:


Delete unwanted areas.

Modify the resolution of an area.

Clean the edge of the scan.

Once the scan is edited, click Next to accept.


Examples:

To edit scan

 1. Select a selection tool in the mini-toolbar.

 2. Hold Ctrl+Click and make the selection.

 3. To deselect a part of the selection, use Ctrl+Shift+Click.

 4. Once the scan is edited, click Next to accept.

Edit scan function is available during or after the scan acquisition.

Mesh display

Table 5-11 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

357
Triangles

Wire Frame

Transparent

Show color map: To show or hide the color map display. This option is available when an analysis was
performed.

General display options


Quick rendering while moving: Reduces image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.

Section s for analysis


Whole model: Default option which meant the whole model will be analyzed. Add section to analyze a
specific section and/or multiple sections.

To add section

 1. Select a selection tool in the mini-toolbar.

 2. Hold Ctrl+Click and make the selection.

 3. To deselect a part of the selection, use Ctrl+Shift+Click.

 4. Click Add in the Sections for analysis section.

By default, a name is given with a numeric suffix incremented by one.

To rename a section

 1. Double-click the section name.

 2. Enter the new name.

 3. Press Enter.

Although it is possible to add several sections, only one analysis can be done at a
time. Once a section analysis process is started, if another section is selected, a
new analysis will started and the analysis of the previous section will be lost.
Make sure to save each analysis done.

Selection tools
Selection tools are available through the mini toolbar which is in the upper left corner of the 3D viewer.
It can be displayed in Compact or Expanded mode using the drop-down arrow. To change the display
mode, click the ▼ in the mini toolbar and select the required display mode.

358
Function Description

Rectangle: To create a rectangular shape selection. Hold Ctrl and left-click, and release it when the
selection is completed.

Free-form: To create a free form selection (lasso). For a straight line contour, hold Ctrl and left-
click.For a free curve contour, hold Ctrl and hold the mouse left button. Once the selection is
completed, right-click to end it or release the Ctrl key.
Brush: This tool allows a brush shape selection (square, circle, oval and so on) with customized
thickness.For a straight line, press Ctrl+the mouse left button.For a free curve, press Ctrl and hold
the mouse left button.Once the selection is completed, right-click to end it or release the Ctrl key.
The Brush size slider allows adjusting the thickness.

Connect: This tool allows to select all triangles connected to a given triangle.

Sudden change: This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to others until sudden curvature
change appears in the mesh using Ctrl+Left mouse button.

Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.


Similar curvature: This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to other triangles with same
curvature.

Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.

Select through: This tool allows to select all the triangles within an area, even those on a different
layer.

Select target with surface: This tool allows to select target (s) with surface.

Select backface: This tool allows to select in the negative normal of the mesh in addition to the
positive normal.

Clear selection: This tool allows clearing the current surface selection.

Inverse selection: This tool allows inverting the current selection; unselected surface will be selected.
In opposition, selected surface will no longer be part of the selection.

Grow selection: This tool increases the current selection size by adding a layer of triangles for each
mouse click (1 triangle in every direction).

Shrink selection: This tool decreases the current selection size by removing a layer of triangles for
each mouse click (1 triangle in every direction).

Editing tools
Icon Function Description

Delete To delete the selected triangles on the scan surface.

359
Icon Function Description

Delete To delete permanently isolated patches that are not connected to the main object. It is
isolated possible to delete isolated patches while scanning.

Increase To increase the selected triangles resolution. Option available with the HandySCAN 3D
resolution scanner (307/700).

Decrease To decrease the selected triangles resolution. Option available with the HandySCAN 3D
resolution scanner (307/700).

Mandatory operation that optimizes the scan surface prior the analysis. It applies the
Finalize Optimize volumetric accuracy function when it is selected. Option is available using a
HandySCAN BLACK scanner.

Contextual menu
Function Description
Lock rotation axis Allow to rotate the scan only around the pipe axis.
Centers and displays the entire scan data in the center of the 3D
Fit to screen
viewer.
This function is available with an internal scan. It allows displaying
Show inside deviations on outside
the color map of the internal surface on the external one for a better
surface
visualization.

Sets the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow
Standard view 3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

360
Inspection Parameters
Information concerning a specific project can be entered here.

Pipe owner

Pipe name

Technician name

Inspector name

The entered information will appear in the analysis report.

361
Analysis Parameters
Diameter critical factor

Critical difference between nominal diameter and measured diameter. This factor will also determine
the color scale of the color map and help to identify the wrinkle.

Crest to trough critical factor

Critical difference between the crest (top of the wrinkle) and trough (bottom) will help to identify the
wrinkle.

362
Color Map
It is possible to change the settings of the difference map, which represents the depth variation on the
pipe surface in the viewers. By default, the depth variation lying within the critical factor value appears
in green.
The following colors are set by default:

Warm colors: Negative deviations

Green: ± Critical factor

Light blue: Deviation between the critical factor value and threshold

Grey: Maximum % of wall thickness

Parameters
Parameter Description
Color scale type Select a Discrete or a Continuous scale type.
Positive divisions Select the number of positive divisions in the color map (maximum of 15).
Negative divisions Number of negative divisions; automatically set according to the number of positive
divisions.
Symmetric Check the box to get a symmetric color scale (same separations on positive and
negative sides). Clear the check box to modify the negative divisions amount.
Unit type The values of the color scale divisions can be calculated in percentage of wall thickness,
percentage of pipe radius, percentage of pipe diameter or using the depth value.
Reset divisions Restore the default display color map with default divisions.
Reset color Click on a color of the scale to change it; click on Reset color to go back to the default
color.
Reset to defaults Restore all the default settings.

To edit the color map

363
Once the parameters are
defined:

 1. Click a color of the


scale to change it.

 2. Click a value of the


scale bar to change it
and select Enter to
accept the new value.

 3. Click the separation


between two colors
to change their
values by moving the
line up or down. Click
Reset divisions to reset
the value of divisions
to default.

364
Analysis Results
Pipecheck uses the following workflow to analyze a wrinkle :

Deviations can be negative (yellow) or positive (blue).

A feature is created when a positive and a negative deviation are both detected to be over the critical
factor.

Interface

Items displayed in the 2D viewer and 3D viewer


Item Default Note
Analysis grid White The square size is defined by the Worst Case Profile
Resolution selected in the corrosion analysis parameters.
Zoom on the grid to see the real square size.
Feature boundary Blue contour The blue contour represent the feature dimensions.
Circumferential section profile On right of the Axial
unrolled viewer
Circumferential

Angular position graph

3D viewer contextual menu


Function Description
Lock rotation axis Check that box to allow the rotation of the scan only around the
rotation axis.
Fit to screen Centers and displays the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.

365
Function Description
Standard view Sets the pipe display depending on the following selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow

3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

2D viewer contextual menu


Function Description
Fit image Zoom out to show the whole pipe surface.
Find Max. crest-to-through in feature: Maximum distance
between the highest and lowest point on the wrinkle.

Minimum diameter in feature

Maximum diameter in feature

Minimum diameter of pipe

Maximum diameter of pipe


Hide all annotations Hide all feature annotations.
Show all annotations Show all feature annotations.

Section views
The section views provide three sources of information:

 1. Axial section view

 2. Circumferential section view

 3. Angular position graph

To resize the display in the 2D viewer

 1. Move the cursor to edge of the window until seeing two sided arrows.

 2. Left click and drag the window to resize it as desired.

Graph Position Description


Axial section view Bottom Axial section view of the pipe at the circumferential position
  selected in the 2D viewer

Axial position of the point selected in the 2D viewer

366
Graph Position Description
Circumferential Right Circumferential section view of the pipe at the axial position
section view
selected in the 2D viewer

Circumferential position of the point selected in the 2D


viewer
Angular position Bottom right Circumferential section view of the pipe at the axial position
graph corner
selected in the 2D viewer

Angular position of the point selected in the 2D viewer

Angular coverage of the pipe

Feature navigation
Sort criteria
User can sort features using the Sort criteria drop down list.
To select a feature

Click on a feature in the list of the Features navigation panel.

Double click on a damage in the viewer.

Use Ctrl+Click method for multiple feature selection in the list.

To clear the selection

Click .

Feature details
Detail Description
Feature name Name of the feature.
Maximum crest-to-trough Maximum depth between the highest and lowest point on the wrinkle.
Dimensions Wavelength and Circumferential width.
Axial positions Feature size.

Circumferential positions
Diameters Maximum and minimum diameters of the pipe section.

Mesh display

Table 5-12 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Quads

Wire Frame

Transparent

367
Show color map: To show or hide the color map display.

General display options


Reference arrow: To display the reference arrow in the 3D viewer.
Grid: To show or hide the analysis grid.
Grid positions: To show or hide the axial and circumferential grid position.
Feature identification: To show or hide the identification number of the selected features.
Distances: To show or hide the distances listed.
Quick rendering while moving: To reduce image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.

Unavailable options are grayed out.

2D viewer show options


Zoom on selected feature: To fit the feature to the screen size.

368
Report Type
XLS
To generate a formatted report (.xls).

Overview page of the wrinkle analysis results.

One analysis result per feature.

No report
No report to export.

369
Export Report
Use this function to export an analysis report and save it.

To export a report

 1. In the Save as dialog, in the Folder pane, choose the location and folder where to save the file.

 2. In the File name field, type a name for the file.

 3. In the Save as type list, accept the default file type (.pcf).

 4. Click Save.

370
Save Session
Use this option to save the current session.

To save a session

 1. Click .

 2. Navigate through the required folder to save the session.

 3. Type a name for the session in the File namebox.

 4. Click Save.

371
Save Workflow
Save a specific session workflow (.wct file). The structure and parameters will be saved.

To save a workflow

 1. Click .

 2. Navigate through the Export Workflow Data dialog box and choose the folder to save the file.

 3. Type the file name.

 4. Click Save.

372
Final Options
Choose the next action.

Action Description
Continue
To begin a new step-by-step analysis.
analysis
Execute
To execute a selected workflow (.wct file).
workflow
Define new To define parameters and information by answering questions. Then, these can be saved into a
workflow predefined workflow which can be executed later (.wct file).
Edit
To edit a pre-saved workflow (.wct file).
workflow

Open
To open a Pipecheck session (.pcf file).
session
Quit To quit Pipecheck.

373
This page intentionally left blank to ensure new
chapters start on right (odd number) pages.

374
Pipecheck Classic Mode
Pipecheck includes one scanning module and two pipeline analysis modules. You can navigate from
one module to another through the toolbar.
Module Description
Scan Allows scanning the surface of the pipe and/or the positioning targets.
Corrosion Allows performing a corrosion analysis to observe the results in the viewers and to output a
report.
Dent Allows performing a dent analysis to observe the results in the viewers and to output a report.

Corrosion module
Pipecheck Corrosion module offers very fast, efficient and streamlined data processing based on the
ASME B31G standard.

Key functions:

Automatically applied interaction rules

3D and 2D color mapping with River bottom pathoverlay

2D section generation in both axis

Worst Case Profile generated for all corrosion features

Estimated burst pressure calculation based on ASME standard (B31G, Modified B31G and Effect-
ive Area)

Corrosion depth measurement, dimensions and position on the pipe

Depth-on-the-fly: Simply drag the mouse over a point to obtain local corrosion depth meas-
urement

Point-to-point distance measurement directly in the 3D model

Enhanced virtual pit gauge capabilities

Corrosion near welds supported

Internal and external assessment

Customizable depth export (CSV format)

UT data import

ILI data import & correlation

Predefined views

Cylinder straightening

Corrosion analysis inside dents

Automatic anomaly classification

375
Automatic feature status (complies/do not comply) based on single/multiple criteria

Dent dimension measurement (hybrid method using Straight edge technique and Radial devi-
ations

Automatic reporting (Excel and CSV)

Dent module
Pipecheck Dent module features depth-based analysis tools that increase dent understanding and
facilitate decision making.

Key functions:

Radius measurement

Maximum depth measurement using straight-edge technique in both directions

Automatic maximum depth detection

Automatic creation of 2D cross-sections in both directions at maximum depth

Strain-based analysis

3D and 2D color mapping of damaged area

Visualization tool to increase dent shape understanding

Depth-over-diameter ratio

Maximum diameter at 90 degrees of the dent

Length and width measurement for each dent

376
Multiple dent analysis

Internal and external assessment

Customizable depths (Excel export)

Predefined views

ILI data import & correlation

Cylinder straightening

Corrosion analysis inside dents

Pipecheck free viewer


Live reporting can be performed through Pipecheck Viewer, a freeware that allows to open Pipecheck
session files and observe the analysis results without carry out additional analysis.
This application offers the same interface as Pipecheck (see Interface Overview), including the viewers,
the Navigation and Details panels. To learn more about it, visit Creaform website.

377
Interface Overview
Main menu
The main menu and the toolbar are complementary to each other. The toolbar offers main functions as
well as editing tools. Most of the functions are also available through the main menu.

Toolbar
The toolbar icons allow for easy navigation through Pipecheck main functions.

Scan functions
Scan function Description
Click the icon to enter the Scan module

Default module when opening a new session


Launch and stop the scan function

Scan the surface and the positioning targets (Scan Surface)

Scan the positioning targets only (Scan Positioning Targets)

Only available in the Scan module

Mesh editing tools


Before editing the mesh, the user must make a selection by pressing and holding Ctrl key. To unselect
an area previously selected, press and hold Ctrl+Shift key.

Available selection tools depend on the function and/or the module used.

Tool Description
Rectangle: To create a rectangular shape selection. Hold Ctrl and left-click, and release it when the selection
is completed.
Free form: To create a free form selection (lasso). For a straight line contour, hold Ctrl and left-click.For a free
curve contour, hold Ctrl and hold the mouse left button. Once the selection is completed, right-click to end
it or release the Ctrl key.
Brush: This tool allows a brush shape selection (square, circle, oval and so on) with customized thickness.For
a straight line, press Ctrl+the mouse left button.For a free curve, press Ctrl and hold the mouse left
button.Once the selection is completed, right-click to end it or release the Ctrl key. The Brush size slider
allows adjusting the thickness.
Connect: This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to a given triangle.

Sudden change: This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to others until sudden curvature change
appears in the mesh using Ctrl+Left mouse button.
Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.
Similar curvature: This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to other triangles with same curvature.
Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.

378
Tool Description
Select through: This tool allows to select all the triangles within an area, even those on a different layer.

Select target with surface: This tool allows to select target (s) with surface.

This tool allows to select in the negative normal of the mesh in addition to the positive normal.

Connect: This tool allows to select all triangles connected to a given triangle.

Clear selection: This tool allows clearing the current selection of triangles.

Inverse selection: This tool allows inverting the current triangle selection; unselected triangles will be
selected. In opposition, selected triangles will no longer be part of the selection.
Grow the selection: This tool increases the current selection size by adding a layer of triangles for each
mouse click (1 triangle in every direction).
Shrink the selection: This tool decreases the current selection size by removing a layer of triangles for each
mouse click (1 triangle in every direction).

Selection Modes

Clear selection
To clear the current selection of triangles.

Inverse selection
To invert the current triangle selection; unselected triangles will be selected. In opposition, selected
triangles will no longer be part of the selection.

Analysis functions
Function Description
To open the Parameters dialog, when analysis parameters must be entered before
launching the data analysis.
or To launch the Analyze function ( Corrosion or Dent). It only becomes available once the
analysis parameters have been correctly filled.

▼ To create a Report including the analysis results ( Excel worksheet) or CSV ). It only
becomes available once the analysis has been performed.

Project management functions


Function Description
New session: To create a new session. The current session will be lost if it has not
been previously saved.
Open session: To open a previously saved session (.pcf file).

379
Function Description
Save session: To save the current session (scanned surface, positioning targets,
scanner and analysis parameters, analysis results).
Import:

Import UT Data

Import ILI

Merge scans
Export:

Export mesh: To export the raw .stl. Only available from Scan module.

Export surface : To export a mesh after its conversion to quads. Only


available from Corrosion or Dent module.

Export deepest points

Export CSV

Export targets
Clear raw data : To permanently delete the raw scan data for a lighter session. The
surface is kept and can still be analyzed, but cannot be reprocessed with a different
resolution. This function is mainly used to get a lighter session thus making it easier
to transfer quickly.

When clearing data, none of scan functions will be


available anymore. As an example, the user will not be
able to change resolution or merge scans. It is
recommended to Save as a new file after clearing data,
to keep the raw data in another session. The Save
session operation will overwrite the entire project and
the raw data will be lost.

Edit scan: To edit the scan and access the mesh editing functions

Optimize volumetric accuracy: This function considers all the positioning targets
observed and optimize their position.
Straighten cylinder

Export targets: To export the session positioning model (.txt file). The file can be
imported in a future session through the Import Targets referencing mode. This is the
only option available through the Positioning Targets node.
Reset project: To reset the current project. The scanning and analysis parameters are
kept, but the scanned surface, the positioning targets and the features are
permanently deleted.

380
Function Description
3D view This function allows choosing between the 3D or 2D viewer, or a combined view
(both viewers).
2D view (Corrosion)

2D view (Dent)

Combined view

Navigation panel
The Navigation panel contains information which allows navigating between the components of a
Pipecheck session and performing some functions. Select one node to show its components in the
software viewer and to get access to its details in the Details panel.
The elements listed in Features will be defined differently in the Corrosion and the Dent modules, while
all other components are common only in both analysis modules.

To rename a feature
Double-click on the feature and enter the new name. The change will also appear in the report.
Available function(s) when the node
Node Item
is selected
Surface1 Scanned surface Edit scan, cylinder straightening and
selection tool
Positioning Targets1 Scanned targets Saved targets
Features Corrosion or dent features Feature details
ILI Features Imported In-Line-Inspection data ILI features offset and details
UT Data Imported UT data UT data details
Distances Created distances Distances details and options
Snapshots Created snapshots Snapshots details and options
Parent Material Extend parent material surface Parent material color map deviation
1Surface and Positioning Targets nodes are only available in the Scan module.

Details
The left panel provides information about an item selected in a node (Features, Targets, Sections, etc.).
The information is divided into sections displayed in an expandable panel.

Display panel
The options of the Display panel vary depending on the selected module:
Scan module
Corrosion module
Dent module

3D viewer
The 3D viewer displays the pipe in a 3D model.

381
The specific items shown in the 3D viewer may vary depending on the analysis module you are working
in. See the Scan, Corrosion or the Dent modules for further information.

3D viewer contextual menu


Right-click in the 3D viewer to access to the contextual menu.
Function Description
Lock rotation axis Check that box to allow the rotation of the scan only around the rotation axis.
Fit to screen This allows user to bring the 3D model in the center of the 3D viewer.
Show inside deviations on This function is available with an internal scan. It allows displaying the color map of
outside surface the internal surface on the external one for a better visualization.
Standard view This function allows predetermining the view in which the scan is going to
be displayed, either up flow, down flow, at 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock, 9 o'clock or
12 o'clock (H:M).
Lock viewpoint This function brings the viewpoint to the position it was on the latest acquisition.
After zooming on a detail or losing the current view, it enables seeing the whole scan
in the 3D viewer.
Add snapshot Creates a snapshot with the active view.
Hide all annotations This function allows to hide all feature annotations in the 3D viewer.
Show all annotations This function allows to show all feature annotations in the 3D viewer.
Lock zoom This function sets the zoom level while following the scanner movements. It is useful
when scanning small details.

The 3D viewer contextual menu will vary depending on module. See the specific description for Scan,
Corrosion or Dent module.

2D viewer

The 2D viewer offers a planar view of the pipe surface, like if the pipe had been unrolled into a flat
surface.
Refer to Corrosion and Dent modules to learn about the specific items showed in the 2D viewer.

2D viewer specific mouse controls


Button Effect
Right button Allows to minimize or maximize the view (axial and circumferential sections)
Double-click

382
Button Effect
Left button Allows to select a point to get its depth and position on the pipe

Section views
The section views provide three sources of information:

 1. Axial section view

 2. Circumferential section view

 3. Angular position graph

To resize the display

 1. Move the cursor to edge of the window until seeing two sided arrows.

 2. Left click and drag the window to resize it as desired.

383
Graph Position Description
Axial section view Bottom Axial section view of the pipe at the circumferential
position selected in the 2D viewer

Axial position of the point selected in the 2D viewer


Circumferential section view Right Circumferential section view of the pipe at the axial
position selected in the 2D viewer

Circumferential position of the point selected in the 2D


viewer
Angular position graph Bottom right Circumferential section view of the pipe at the axial
corner
position selected in the 2D viewer

Angular position of the point selected in the 2D viewer

Angular coverage of the pipe

384
Configuration Options
The options available are listed below and can be set through Configure | Options.
The user can easily toggle from one section tab to another.

General options

Software language: The software is available in several languages. It must be restarted every
time the language setting is modified.

Color theme: Allows changing the theme or modifying the interface colors of the software.

User's rights: This option is only available when a scanner is active in the Product Manager. It
allows changing the user’s right. The option by default is Super User rights. When set to User,
some parameters are locked and cannot be modified.

To change the user's rights for User:

 1. Select User option in the drop-down list.

 2. Enter New Password and Confirm New Password.

 3. Click OK.

To come back to the Super user rights, you need to Enter password to activate Super user mode.
If you forgot the password, click on Forgot your password?

Activate touchscreen: Select to enable the touchscreen option.

Show message when position is lost: Select to enable the function. A warning message stating
that the position is lost will appear when scanning.

Click volume and Position lost volume: Use sliders to adjust the volume of the click or the loss
of position sound when using a HandySCAN BLACK.

Show toolbar button labels: Labels will appear in the toolbar if this option is selected.

Use projects folder: The software will create a folder in My Documents. This is the default folder
for saving sessions.

Temporary folder: Set the location for the temporary files. It can be useful in the case user
wants to optimize either space or speed of the local disk.

Clear list of silenced message boxes: Click to delete the list of all the message boxes that were
ignored and closed.

Pipecheck units options (Classic view only)


This allows selecting a range of different units depending on the user's informational needs:

385
Length unit for position: Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter, Inch, Foot

Length unit for size: Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter, Inch, Foot

Depth unit: Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter, Inch, Foot, %WT, %Diam, %Rad

Angle unit for position: Radian, Degree, Clock, Clock (H:M)

Angle unit for size: Radian, Degree, Clock, Clock (H:M)

Temperature unit: Celsius, Fahrenheit

Pressure unit: kPa, MPa, psi, Bar

Volume unit: Cubic Millimeter, Cubic Centimeter, Cubic Meter, Cubic Inch, Cubic Foot

VXremote options

Enable VXremote: When checked, the function is activated. It allows using the software with a
wireless tablet and the Splashtop® application (network SSID and security key required). See
VXremote Configuration section for more details.

Online services options

Connect: Select to activate the Online Services function (for more details, see Online Services).

Check for new version: Select the frequency at which the update check will occurred.

Remember password: Select to save the password.

386
Mouse and Keyboard Controls
Mouse controls
The 3D model is located in the 3D viewer, where interaction is made through mouse actions.
The default mouse actions are summarized below. They have different actions depending on the
selected mode.

Action Effect
Rotates the object by clicking and holding the left button (or draws a
Left button
selection box when the selection tools are activated)
Ctrl+Left button Selects an area (targets, triangles, etc.)
Opens a contextual menu containing the display options and
Right button
commonly used tools

Left and right buttons Spins the object around the current optical axis
Middle button drag Translates the object (or the scanning volume)
Middle button click Centers the viewpoint and the rotation center
Scroll wheel Zooms in and out

Keyboard shortcuts
Keyboard shortcuts are available through the Help menu (Help | Keyboard shortcuts).

Function Keyboard shortcut


New session Ctrl+N
Open session Ctrl+O
Save session Ctrl+S
Save session as Ctrl+Shift+S

Start/Stop scanning

Left click the 3D


viewer , prior to Space
using the
function.

Full screen F11


Delete Del
Reset project Ctrl+R
Open parameters window Ctrl+P
Start analysis Ctrl+A

387
Function Keyboard shortcut
Generate report Ctrl+E
Smart Control F4
Lock rotation axis Alt+A
Edit | Selection | Rectangle selection Ctrl+Alt+R
Edit | Selection | Free form selection Ctrl+Alt+F
Edit | Selection | Brush selection Ctrl+Alt+B
Edit | Selection | Connect Ctrl+Alt+C
Edit | Selection | Similar curvature Ctrl+Alt+S
Edit | Selection | Sudden change Ctrl+Alt+H
Edit | Selection | Isolated patches Ctrl+Alt+I

Edit | Selection | Grow selection Ctrl+Ins


Edit | Selection | Shrink selection Ctrl+Del
Edit | Selection | Select through Ctrl+Alt+T
Edit | Selection | Select backface Ctrl+Alt+K
Edit | Selection | Clear selection Ctrl+D
Edit | Selection | Inverse selection Ctrl+I
Help | Contextual help F1

Navigation modes
Action Pipecheck
Rotate Left button
Spin Left and right buttons
Pan Middle button
Zoom Scroll wheel

A Touchscreen navigation mode is available in Configure | Options | VXremote (see the Remote Mode
section).

388
Pipecheck Parameters

The Parameters dialog box allows to define scan, analysis and reporting parameters. It can be
opened at anytime during a session.
The super user mode allows a user to lock and/or unlock the editing of certain parameters by clicking

on or . See Configuration options section.

Scan Parameters
Scan parameters are also available in the Scan tab of the Parameters dialog.

Resolution

Normal flow/ Inverted flow: To change the flow direction from the one pointed by the Pipecheck
arrow.

Allow edit scan: To permanently modify scan data by giving access to the Edit Scan tools of the
scan module.

Common Parameters
The Common parameters are available through different tabs:

General
Disable scan date and Disable report date modification

When creating a report, the scan and report dates are automatically set.
Reference position

To define the position of the origin of the analysis grid relative to a known reference, such as GPS
coordinates or a main pipe junction. The position of the features will be offset by the value entered in
the Reference Position boxes.
Before defining a Reference Position, take a look at the Scan Referencing Mode section to know how
the origin of the analysis grid is set by default. Write the reference details in the Comment field.

Nominal parameters

The Outside diameter must correspond to the real diameter of the pipe. For instance 323.85 mm (12.75
in) must be entered for a 300 mm (12 in) nominal pipe. For internal scans, the outside diameter still
have to be used. The nominal wall thickness (NWT) must be entered in the Thickness box.
Display data

Select between orienting the 2D viewer and the longitudinal axis of the grid from left to right or in the
opposite way (Right to left). This option can be changed before or after performing the data analysis.

389
Analysis message

Enable or disable displaying different warning messages listed in Troubleshooting section.


 

Report - Options
Number format

Define how many decimals of the values must be displayed in the report. Between 0 to 4 digits must be
selected.
Lock/Unlock Report

Enables or disable the possibility to write and edit an Excel report. By selecting Lock mode, the report
will be created in read-only format.

390
Reference arrow

Enable or disables the possibility to display the information about the position of the Reference Arrow
on the Overview page of the report.
 

Report - Include
Add a Logo or a Disclaimer in the Signature page of the report.
 

ILI Features
Feature correlation

Minimum overlap for correlation: Set the minimum percentage at which a ILI feature must overlap
a Pipecheck feature to be automatically associated. The percentage is based on the smallest of
the two features.

Ignore Clusters: Clusters will not be correlated with Pipecheck features.

Use Only Clusters: Only clusters will be correlated with Pipecheck features.

Only the correlated ILI features will be used for statistical analysis in the report.

See the ILI Correlation section for more information.


Available CSV formats

Use to Import, Export or Remove ILI correlation formats (.pct).


Automatic corrosion feature name

Use automatic name


Check this option to activate the function. Anomalies (DMA) and clusters (CLS) are automatically
detected and a name, with a numeric suffix incremented by one, is given (example: DMA-1, DMA-2,
etc.).
To edit the name

 1. Select a DMA or CLS in the ILI Features tree

 2. Left-click in the file name and set the change

Add anomaly class suffix


Check this option to activate the function. It will allow to add the corrosion type in the name of the
feature. That information will appear in the Features tree as in the Details panel.
Anomaly dimension class (1)
Axial Grooving AXGR

391
Anomaly dimension class (1)
Axial Slotting AXSL
Circumferential Grooving CIGR
Circumferential Slotting CISL
General GENE
Pinhole PINH
Pitting PITT

(1) Specifications and requirements for intelligent pig inspection of pipelines, Pipeline Operators Forum,
2009.
 

Report - ILI Features


Position data

Determines at which position the ILI and Pipecheck features are reported in the ILI tab, either at the
Center or the top Corner of the feature.
Tool performance

To statically analyze the level of correlation between the imported ILI data and Pipecheck actual data in
the report. To define the acceptance level, a percentage of points or dimensional ranges must be
selected.

Use envelope: Allows defining the acceptance level by entering a percentage of points that must be con-
tained within the envelope. The default value has been set to 80 % (for 20 % outliers). The percentage is
being defined while the range is calculated.

Use range: Enable to precisely define variations by entering four values the features must respect. The
range is defined while the percentage is calculated.

See the ILI Correlation section for more information.

Corrosion parameters
See Corrosion parameters section.

Dent parameters
See Dent parameters section.

Parameters template
When opening a Pipecheck session, the parameters template attributed to this session is automatically
loaded in the Parameters dialog.
Another parameters template may be loaded by selecting it from the Configuration drop-down list and
by clicking on Load. The selected template must have been previously imported in the Parameters
manager (Configure | Parameters manager) in order to be available in the drop-down list.

392
An asterisk (*) will appear next to the drop-down list (the one that has been loaded while opening the
session or via the Load button).

To create a new template

 1. Make sure that parameters are applied.

 2. Rename the template .

 3. Click Save. The template will be added to the Configuration drop-down list and to the Parameters
manager. It will be selected as the default template.

Parameters manager (Configure | Parameters manager)


Import/ Export: Templates can be imported in or exported out of the templates list using the Import and
Export buttons (.pct file).
Set as default: To set a default template, select a previously imported .pct file and click Set as default.
Remove: To delete a template, select the file and click Remove.

393
Acquisition
Interface
Preparation
Scanning in Pipecheck
Editing the 3D Model
Merge scans
Cylinder straightening

394
Scan Interface
See the Interface Overview for a general description of Pipecheck interface.
Specific elements of the Scan module are:

Navigation panel
The Navigation panel displays information that will depend on the selected node or item.

Node  

Scan parameters .
Surface Scanner parameters allow to change the scanner configuration.

Finalize parameters to optimize the volumetric accuracy.

Targets details indicate the count of targets. Click a target to display its
Positioning targets
center position and normal.

Display panel
In the Display panel, available options depend on the selected mode and view. When an option is
available, its name is highlighted and it is possible to toggle it on or off using the check box.
Display panel functions
Panes Function Description
Mesh Display Display as
Table 6-1 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Triangles

Wire frame

Transparent
General display Reference arrow Displays the reference arrow to indicate the flux direction and the
options scanned surface origin.
Quick rendering Reduces image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.
while moving

3D viewer
Element Default Note
Can be displayed as Mesh or Wire Frame (see the Display Settings section of
Scanned surface Gray facets
the 3D viewer).
The orientation can be inverted in the Scanning Parameters. The color of
Flow direction White/Black arrow
the arrow will change depending of the selected color theme.
The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the
Reference arrow  
flow direction.

Contextual menu
Right-click in the viewer to access more options.

395
Function Description
Brings the viewpoint to the position it was on the latest acquisition. After
Lock viewpoint zooming on a detail or losing the current view, it enables seeing the
whole scan in the 3D viewer.
Sets the zoom level while following the scanner movements. It is useful
Lock zoom
when scanning small details.
Lock rotation axis Allows the rotation of the scan only around the rotation axis.
Fit to screen Centers and displays the entire scan data in the center of the 3D viewer.
Show inside deviations on outside Option available with an internal scan. It allows displaying the color map
surface of the internal surface on the external one for a better visualization.
Sets the pipe display using different view:

Up Flow

Down Flow
Standard View 3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock

396
Preparation
Pipes require the following preparation steps to be followed:

Surface preparation
Basic recommendations for good quality scans:

Clean the surface with sandblasting before scanning to remove dirt and corrosion residues.

Cover the surface with powder or white paint if the surface is shiny (optional).

Scanner calibration

Scanner configuration
Place positioning targets
The positioning targets must be applied randomly on the pipe surface prior to scanning. They are used
by the software to calculate the position of the scanner relatively to the pipe surface.
Pipe dia-
Recommended distance between targets
meter
Ø > 25 cm Place the targets about 8 to 10 cm from each other.
Ø ≤ 25 cm
Place the targets about 5 to 7 cm from each other.
Ø ≥ 8 cm
If the scanning environment allows it, use a target board instead of placing targets on the pipe. The
board must not move relative to the pipe while scanning.

Ø < 8 cm

Try placing the targets on non-damaged spots to avoid missing useful data when scanning. If it
is impossible, try to put the targets on less deep spots, to avoid hiding the deepest point of a
feature.

Make sure there are no damaged or dirty targets as it will affect the quality of the scan.

Try placing the targets further than 3 mm from the edges.

Avoid placing targets in a line.

Minimum of 6 targets must be seen when scanning.

397
 1. Target not detected

 2. Target detected

The color of positioning targets


and laser lines is different using
the HandySCAN BLACK. See
Scan Targets_ HandySCAN
BLACK section for more
information.

Additional targets can be added while scanning, as long as the others are not
moved.

Set the Scan Parameters

Resolution
The scan resolution defines the size of the triangles of the meshed surface. Its value can be modified in
the Scan Parameters dialog before or after scanning. Click on the Surface node in Navigation panel to
show the Scan Parameters panel.

Maximum scan length: The maximum scan length is based on the scan resolution, the Worst Case
Profile resolution, the nominal diameter and the RAM memory available.

A coarse resolution reduces the required scanning time and the size of the session, while a finer
resolution allows small flaws to be more precisely modeled. The recommended starting resolution is 1.0
to 1.5 mm (0.04 to 0.06 in). The lowest available value will vary depending on the device used.

Reference
The pipe can be scanned using one of these referencing modes:

Import targets (Import Targets)

Unreferenced scan

Reference arrow (Add Reference)

398
The referencing mode must be chosen before starting to scan, in the Scan Parameters pane (available
through the Surface node).

Reference arrow
The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the flow direction.
This mode is activated by selecting an arrow in the reference drop-down list or by importing a new one.

To add a new reference arrow

 1. Choose Add Reference in the reference drop-down list

 2. Select the configuration file of the reference arrow (.prf).

 3. Once imported, the selected reference arrow becomes the default referencing mode.

 4. Place the magnetic reference arrow provided with your scanner on the pipe, parallel to the pipe
axis, pointing in the flow direction (down flow). The axial and circumferential origin of the scan
will correspond to the center of its flat extremity.

 1. Origin

 2. Flow direction

 3. Target

 5. The four targets of the reference arrow appear in the 3D viewer when launching the Scan
function. The reference arrow must be scanned first; once its four targets have been properly
detected, remove the reference arrow and scan the surface under it. The surface of the
reference arrow will be automatically removed from the final 3D model.

Always carry the reference arrow in its protective case; its targets should never
been touched. If the arrow or its targets get damaged, it will no longer be
detected correctly.

The origin of the analysis grid can be offset from the one of the reference arrow by defining an offset
value (see Parameters section) measured between the arrow origin and a known position on the pipe
(e.g. GPS coordinates or a pipe section join).
The reference arrow is displayed in the 2D viewer and the 3D viewer where it is positioned. It can also be
displayed in the report.

399
Import targets
You may scan the pipe using a known positioning model that must have been previously scanned and
saved using the Save Targets button.
This option is useful when scanning different areas separately, as it allows merging them afterward
(see Merge Scans).
Once selected, the Import Targets mode becomes the default referencing mode for further sessions.

Unreferenced scan
This is the default mode if no reference arrow has been imported.
The origin of the analysis grid is defined as the first point scanned on the pipe.

This scanning mode does not allow locating the analysis grid regarding a known
reference on the pipe.

Invert flow
This option is available in the Scan Parameters panel. It allows inverting the flow direction of the pipe
model. It is particularly useful when scanning in the Unreferenced scan mode to define the desired flow
direction.
This option can be modified before or after scanning the pipe.

Optimize volumetric accuracy


This option considers all the positioning targets observed to optimize their position. This option
becomes unavailable if:

No target has been scanned.

The positioning model is loaded with the Import Targets option.

The Optimize volumetric accuracy option has already been performed.

This function is highly recommended for 360° scans and/or when laser crosses are seen especially on
large scale scans.

400
Before After

Set Common parameters

401
Scanning in Pipecheck

Scan surface
Use this function to scan the pipe surface and the positioning targets.
The output are a mesh and a positioning model. The scanned surface is shown under the Surface node,
while the positioning model appears under the Positioning Targets node.

Scan positioning targets


Use this function to scan only the positioning targets to create a positioning model before scanning
the pipe surface.
The positioning model scanned can then be exported using Export Targets, and imported in another
session using Import Targets (see Reference mode for more information).
The scan function will not be available if starting Pipecheck without plugging the scanner first.
Connect the scanner to the computer and create a New session prior to start scanning.

Positioning targets colors


The positioning targets colors depend on the scanner used:

HandySCAN BLACK

HandySCAN 307

HandySCAN 3D Previous Generation

Recommended scan coverage

Scan 13 cm (6 in) of undamaged surface around the inspected zone

Acquire a circumferential area of 60° (2 hr)

402
Editing the 3D Model in Scan Module
Manual data alignment
When data that does not belong to the desired pipe surface is being scanned, for instance the floor
surrounding or even a perpendicular pipe, the cylindrical fit is likely to fail since the initial parameters
entered by the user, like the pipe diameter, will not correspond to the detected ones.
Pipecheck automatically detects such situations and allows a manual alignment tool. An error message
will appear at the end of the scanning process.
By closing this message, the user will get access to the manual tool alignment.

Nominal dimensions
Define the Nominal outside diameter and Pipe wall thickness.

Move grid / Move viewpoint


Move grid: To manually drag and align the grid (dotted white cylinder) over the scanned pipe.
Move viewpoint: To move the 3D view.

To process the manual alignment


The grid must be pre aligned on the scan data. Once done, the surface close to the grid become green
and the software use them to optimize the alignment.

To align the grid

Use Move grid function or

Use Align cylinder

 1. Make a selection on the scan data to align.

 2. Click to align the cylinder.

 3. Click Apply.

Editing the 3D model


This is useful to remove undesired areas acquired during the scan process. The area must be selected

403
before to be removed.

Allows permanent editing of the mesh prior to its conversion to quad in the analysis module. Click
Edit scan function to enter the edition mode.

Mesh editing functions


Before editing the mesh, the user must make a selection by pressing and holding Ctrl key. To unselect
an area previously selected, press and hold Ctrl+Shift key.
▼ Different selections are available:  , and .
Select backface Clear selection Inverse selection
Once a selection is made on the surface, it is possible to:

Delete triangles

Increase triangle resolution (by 4 times)

Decrease triangle resolution (by 4 times)

Delete permanently isolated patches automatically hidden by Pipecheck.

Pipecheck converts triangles to quads in order to reproduce pit gauge analysis. Sometimes, the
conversion of undesired data can cause display issues. Editing the mesh in the scanning module might
help to reduce these issues.

For more information , see the Mesh editing tools section.

404
Merge Scans
When scanning a large area, it is useful to scan over multiple sessions and/or with multiple scanners.
This function allows merging scans into one single session hence outputting one single mesh for the
whole surface. The alignment is performed using common positioning targets or common surface by
best fit.
This tool is available (if the raw data have not been cleared) in the menu (Edit | Merge).

To merge scans

 1. Open a session in which you can align the others.

 2. In Scan module, open Merge scans (Import | Merge scans).

 3. Add session(s) to merge.

 4. Align session(s) one by one to the fixed one.

 5. Accept each alignment.

 6. Define the merge resolution and click Merge.

Session list
The session that is already loaded when launching the merge function will be considered as the fix
scan.

Add or Remove sessions to merge in the mobile box.

Select the scan to align in the mobile box before choosing the alignment method.

Align and merge with targets


Minimum match points: Minimum number of targets to match within the accepted alignment tolerance.
Matching tolerance: Maximum distance between the targets to consider them a match.
Align: Launches the alignment with the given parameters. All targets used for the alignment will be
displayed in red.
Accept: Accepts the alignment and switches to the next scan to align.
Reset: Cancels the resulting alignment.
Merge: Merges and creates a final session which includes all data.

Targets displayed in red color are the one used for the alignment.

405
Cylinder Straightening
The manual alignment pop-up window might appear if the scanned pipe is bended since Pipecheck is
unable to find a proper fit of a cylinder on the data.
The manual alignment needs to be processed before the straightening.

If the manual alignment was canceled by the user, it can be retrieved by editing
the scan.

To get an accurate analysis, curved pipes need to be straightened.


Pipecheck has the capability of straightening slightly curved pipes, but it is not designed to straighten
small curvature radius, such as 90° elbows.
It uses short cylinders to separate the bended pipe into many straight sections. These sections are
straighten and realigned in order to get a straight cylinder. A smaller cylinder value is needed for
smaller curvature radius. This value can be defined under Straight Cylinder Length in the straightening
tool. The minimum Straight Cylinder Length is about 10-12 times the scanning resolution.
Each section needs to be almost perfectly straight to have efficient straightening. The Straight cylinder
length should be chosen by locking at the color-map around the straight cylinder. The green color
indicates that the section is straight and the cylinder length should be good.
When a pipe is straighten, Pipecheck stretches the inside curvature surface to make sure the whole
cylinder has the same length. It never shrinks any surface.

Before Straightening After Straightening

 1. Outside curvature surface  3. Outside curvature surface

 2. Inside curvature surface  4. Inside curvature surface

To straighten a pipe

 1. Click Straighten cylinder from the toolbar to launch the operation.

 2. Define the Nominal outside diameter and the Straight cylinder length.

406
 3. Exclude area from cylinder straightening.
Some areas such as dents and flanges might affect the cylinder straightening. It is possible to
exclude them from the straightening by selecting them and use the Exclude from cylinder tool in
the toolbar or main menu. These areas won’t affect the straightening process, but will still be
straightened. To restore some areas, Restore to Cylinder tool can be used.

 4. Click Apply to launch the straightening process.

 5. Look at the results in the corrosion or dent module. To cancel the straightening operation, go
through Edit | Cancel Cylinder Straightening in the main menu.

An accordion surface profile or a repetitive corrosion pattern in the section


view might mean that the cylinder length is too large and should be
changed.

407
Users need to be careful when analyzing a feature extracted from straightened
cylinder since the burst pressures might not comply with ASMEB31G computation
methods. A warning message will be shown under the details of each feature
created from a straightened cylinder.

Highly bended pipes might not be suitable for straightening operation.

408
Analysis
Workflow
Corrosion module
Dent module
ILI correlation
Reporting
Troubleshooting

409
Analysis
Both Pipecheck Corrosion and Dent modules are designed to be as user-friendly as possible.

Typical analysis workflow

Step Action  

Prepare  1. Place the targets and the reference arrow on the pipe.

 2. Calibrate the scanner.


1
 3. Configure the scanner parameters.

 4. Define the scan parameters.


Scan
 1. Scan the reference arrow, the targets and the pipe surface.
2
 2. Edit the mesh.

Parameters
3  1. Define the analysis parameters.

Analyze
 1. Launch the scan analysis.
4
 2. Visualize the results in the software viewer.
or

Report  1. Define the reporting parameters.


5  2. Export a complete analysis report (Excel worksheet).

 3. Export the deepest points table.

The Prepare and Scan steps must be carried out in the Scan module, while the Parameters, Analyze and
Report steps must be performed in the Corrosion or the Dent module.
To perform a step-by-step guided analysis, refer to the Guided analysis mode section.

410
Corrosion Module
Interface
Editing the 3D model
Corrosion parameters
Corrosion analysis
Export deepest points
Import UT data

411
Corrosion Module Interface
See the Interface Overview for a general description of Pipecheck interface.
The specific interface elements of the Corrosion module are:

Navigation panel
The Navigation panel lists all nodes created during the corrosion analysis (Surface, Features, Distances,
Snapshots, etc.).
The Features node is automatically created following the analysis process. When selected, the feature
information appears in expanding panels. To rename a feature, click it to select and click again to
rename.

Display panel
In the Display panel, available options depend on the selected mode and view. When an option is
available, its name is highlighted and it is possible to toggle it on or off using the check box.
Display panel functions

Section Function Description


Mesh display Display as
Table 6-2 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Quads

Wire frame

Transparent
Show color map Shows or hides the color map display.
General display Reference arrow Displays the reference arrow to indicate the flux direction and the
options scanned surface origin.
Grid Shows or hides the analysis grid.
Grid positions Shows or hides the axial and circumferential grid position.
Feature identification Shows or hides the identification number of the selected features.
ILI Features Displays the ILI features.
Distances Shows or hides the distances listed under them in Distance node.
Effective length Displays or hides the Effective length in color on the river bottom path.
Quick rendering while Reduces image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer.
moving
3D color map Displays the color map according to the selected option (available with
UT data only).
2D viewer Zoom on selected feature If this option is activated, the next feature (s) selected in the
show options Feature node will be zoomed.
Deepest points values Shows or hides the values of the deepest points of each square of the
grid.

412
Contextual menu
Other options are available using the contextual menu. A right-click in the viewer gives access to the
following functions:
3D view

Function Description
Lock rotation axis Allows to rotate the scan only around the pipe axis.
Fit to screen Allows to center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D
viewer.
Show inside deviations on outside surface This function is available with an internal scan. It allows displaying the
color map of the internal surface on the external one for a better
visualization.
Standard view Set the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow

3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock
Add snapshot Create a snapshot with the active view.
Hide all annotations Hide all feature annotations.
Show all annotations Show all feature annotations.

2D view

Function Description
Fit image Zoom out to show the whole pipe surface.
Find deepest point Find the deepest point ( pipe, feature or current grid position).
Hide all annotations Hide all feature annotations.
Show all annotations Show all feature annotations.

3D viewer

413
 1. Difference map

 2. Feature ID

 3. Flow direction

 4. Analysis grid

 5. River bottom path

 6. Origin

Items displayed in the 3D viewer:

Item Default Note


Scanned surface Gray facets Can be displayed as Mesh or Wire Frame (see the Display Settings section of
the 3D viewer).
Analysis grid White The square size is defined by the Worst Case Profile Resolution selected in
the corrosion analysis parameters. Zoom on the grid to see the real square
size.
Origin of the White circle Represented without the Reference Position offset.
analysis grid
Flow direction White arrow The orientation can be inverted in the Scanning Parameters.
Difference map of   Colored representation of the depth variation on the scanned surface.
selected features Difference Map parameters can be modified in the Color Map tab of the
corrosion parameters dialog.
Distances Yellow See Measuring Distances to learn how to measure distances on the surface.
Reference arrow   The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the
flow direction.
River bottom path Blue See the River Bottom Path section for more information.
of selected
features

2D viewer

414
 1. River bottom path

 2. Virtual pit gauge

Items displayed in the 2D viewer:

Item Default Note


Scanned surface Gray  
Analysis grid White The square size is defined by the Worst Case Profile Resolution selected in
the Corrosion analysis parameters. Zoom on the grid to see the real square
size.
Difference map of   Colored representation of the depth variation on the scanned surface
selected features .Difference Map parameters can be modified in the Color Map tab of the
corrosion parameters dialog.
River bottom path of Blue See the River Bottom Path section for more information.
selected features
Deepest point of each   Apply the Find deepest points function in a square of the grid to locate its
square in the analysis deepest points. Zoom on the grid to see each of its depth value.
grid of selected features
Virtual pit gauge Gray  
Tool tip   Click on a point of the 2D viewer to see its position and depth values.
 1. Depth

 2. Axial

 3. Circumferential

Reference arrow   The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the
flow direction.
Distances Yellow See Measuring Distance to learn how to measure distances on the surface.

Section views
The 2D viewer is surrounded by 3 graphs:

415
Graph Position Description
Axial section view Bottom Axial section view of the pipe at the circumferential
position selected in the 2D viewer

Axial position of the point selected in the 2D viewer

Worst Case Profile of the selected feature


Circumferential section view Right Circumferential section view of the pipe at the axial position
selected in the 2D viewer

Circumferential position of the point selected in the 2D


viewer
Angular position graph Bottom right Circumferential section view of the pipe at the axial position
corner
selected in the 2D viewer

Angular position of the point selected in the 2D viewer

Angular coverage of the pipe

Hold the cursor while moving the mouse in the 2D viewer to see the changes in the section views.

416
Editing the 3D Model in Corrosion Module
Before launching the corrosion analysis, it may be necessary to edit the 3D model.

To edit the 3D model

 1. Select a selection tool in the mini-toolbar.

 2. Hold Ctrl+Click and make the selection.

 3. To deselect a part of the selection, use Ctrl+Shift+Click.

 4. Select the editing function in the Edit area of the toolbar.

Force corroded
When performing a corrosion analysis, you may wish to prevent the virtual pit gauge to sit on a
particular area of the scanned surface. The function allows to manually force the selected area as fully
corroded.

 1. Define the area using a selection tool.

 2. Tag the selected area as corroded using the Force corroded button.

The protected area will appear in a darker color on the scanned surface.

During the analysis, the pit gauge configuration will be adjusted so that the latter will sit outside the
protected area. If the maximum number of bracket extensions set in the Pit Gauge tab of the Corrosion
parameters is insufficient to cover the corroded area, additional brackets will be added, visible in red in
the 2D viewer. A message informs of that change.

417
Convex areas
The surface can sometimes be a bit curved relatively to the pipe axis (convex area). If a protected area is
located on such surface, it may be impossible to sit the virtual pit gauge correctly on the pipe surface to
measure the convex area. A warning message will appear and the affected surfaces will be shown in
pink in the 3D viewer.

 1. Protected area

 2. Convex surface

 3. Axial section

418
 1. Feature depth measurement

 2. Convex pipe surface

 3. Pipe axis

 4. Protected area

 5. Virtual pit gauge (the feature depth is not possible)

Undo forced corroded


This function allows to restore an automatic detection of corrosion in a selected area. This is available
only when Forced corroded option has been previously performed.

 1. Select over the protected area.

 2. Clear it by clicking .

Assign excluded area


This function allows excluding areas from the analysis and sets a boundary between the excluded area.
The virtual pit gauge can never cross over the excluded area. Both sitting points must be on one side
or the other of the weld.
This option must be applied on welds to have an accurate analysis. It prevents Hi-Lo measurement
issues since the complete pit-gauge will always sit on one section or the other delimited by the weld
area. If corrosion is found close to the weld, the pit gauge boundary behavior must be changed
accordingly.

419
To manually assign an excluded area

 1. Define the area using a selection tool.

 2. Click to tag the selected area as excluded.

The excluded area will appear darker on the scanned surface, different from the protected area.

During the analysis, the pit gauge configuration will be automatically adjusted to the selected Boundary
pit gauge behavior in the pit gauge parameters tab.

 1. Excluded area (weld)

 2. Depth

 3. Axial

 4. Circumferential

Unassign excluded area


To remove the exclusion area of a selected area.

420
 1. Select over the excluded area.

 2. Click .

Assign manual corrosion


This function allows to manually assign the area as a single corrosion feature. Once the area is
assigned as a single corroded feature, Pipecheck assumes all corrosion pits within the selected area
interact with each other independently from the corrosion around. Standard pressure values will be
computed for this manual feature.
The feature dimensions are defined by the manual selection boundaries.
This function is useful to calculate the bursting pressure of a specific area (i.e. to figure out the
bursting pressure of the green area in case the red area was repaired).

To manually assign the area as a single corrosion feature

 1. Select the area using a selection tool.

 2. Click .

When assigning a corrosion area, the assigned surface will appear in pink on the scanned surface and
a feature will be added under the Manual featuresin the Feature node.

Delete
This function allows to delete a selected area from the analysis process.
Data can always be restored from the recycle bin.
To retrieve deleted surfaces, right-click them in the Recycle Bin and select Restore.
The surface will only be deleted in the module you are working in. It allows deleting different parts of
the surface depending on the module (i.e. if you plan to analyze both a corroded area and a dented
area in the same session).

421
Corrosion Parameters
Parameters for Corrosion analysis and reporting are available through different tabs. To access it, click

and .

Analysis
Interaction parameters

During the analysis process, corroded areas are identified and listed as corrosion features in the
Features node. Their shapes and size will vary depending of the interaction parameters.
Interaction Parameters Description
Critical factor (%) Depth (in % of wall thickness) at which a corrosion pit is deep enough to be
evaluated and listed.
Threshold for corroded area (%) Depth (in % of wall thickness) at which the corrosion feature dimensions are
measured.
Interaction criteria Units for interaction criteria (length or thickness multiplier).
Axial criteria Minimal axial distance between two corroded areas for which they will
remain separated features.
Circumferential criteria Minimal circumferential distance between two corroded areas for which
they will remain separated features.

The interaction methods are used to apply B31G interaction rules.


Interaction method Border definition Connection mode
Growing box Rectangle Enlarged rectangles. After every corrosion feature grouping,
another larger rectangle is redrawn from the new corrosion
boundaries. The new enlarged rectangle might overlap
some others and the process goes on until there is no
interaction.
Connecting box Rectangle Enlarged rectangles linked together.
Fit to shape Fit to shape Enlarged shapes linked together.

Filter features

Two filters can be used to limit the amount of small features shown in the results:

Minimum depth to keep (%).

Minimum length to keep (axial and circumferential).

The features excluded by these filters will not appear in the analysis results. Only features with a
Deepest point as well as axial and circumferential lengths lower than the filter values will be excluded
from the analysis results. If a feature satisfies only one of both conditions, it will be kept in the list.
Pressure

Two pressure values are involved in the computation:

422
The Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) entered by the user.

The Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure (MAOP) calculated by the software accordingly to Bar-
low’s equation:

Select Use custom value for MAOP check box to enter a custom value.
See Stress Flow section for more information on SMYS.
Worst Case Profile

Enter the size (resolution) of the analysis grid. This creates a grid listing the deepest point in each grid.
It is related to the grid size drawn manually on pipelines and vessels when not using a scanner. This
grid is used for:

Burst Pressure calculation for Effective Area method.

CSV deepest point export (CSV resolution based on WCP resolution).

2D viewer deepest point display.

A finer resolution will lead to more accurate results for the Effective Area burst pressure. The minimal
resolution is 1 mm (0.3937 in).

UT Data
UT Data parameters need to be defined only if UT data is imported to Pipecheck. For more information ,
see Import UT data.

Sflow
Stress flow parameters

The Stress flow is the concept relevant to fracture mechanics. Not a property specified in material grade
or finished product standard. This value is used in the B31G , Modified B31G and Effective Area standard
to calculate the bursting pressure. Its value has been estimated and can be calculated by tree different
methods than can be selected by the user.

Parameters used to calculate the Stress flow value


Parameters Description
Material Choose between plain carbon steel or low alloy steel.
Material Characteristic of the material. The SMYS value is defined automatically depending on the selected
grade grade. Select “Manual” to define the SMYS value. Available choices : A / B / X42 / X46 / X52 / X56 /
X60 / X65 / X70 / X80 / manual.
SUT Specified ultimate tensile strength at operating temperature (Sflow method #3 only).
Design Current pipeline safety regulations require new pipelines to be designed partly based on the class
factor location. Each class location has an associated Design Factor that must be applied to determine the
operating pressure.

423
Parameters Description
SMYS Specified minimum yield strength at ambient conditions.
SYT Specified yield strength at operating temperature (Sflow method #3 only).
Temperature Highest temperature of the pipe during operation.

Sflow method

The Sflow can be calculated in three different ways depending on the pipe material and environment:

# Steel Temp. SMYS Other Equation Recommended for


≤ 120°C SFlow ≤
1 Plain carbon   1.1 × SMYS B31G
(250°F) SMTS
Plain carbon ≤ 120°C ≤ 482.63 MPa SFlow ≤ SMYS + 68.95 Modified B31G
2
Low-allow (250°F) (70 ksi) SMTS MPa(10 ksi) Effective Area
Plain carbon ≤ 551.58 MPa High pipe
3     (SYT + SUT)/2
Low-allow (80 ksi) temperature

For each standard, the method used to calculate the Sflow must be chosen among these three options
based on the previous recommendation. When leaving the cursor above the label of a method, a tool
tip appears showing an extract from the B31G Standard.

Feature status
Each corrosion feature has a name, but also a status to tell the user if it meets the criterion or not. The
user can select criteria and standards from the drop-down lists and set a value in the text box. It is
possible to add as many status as wanted.

To add a verification criterion

 1. Click Add.

 2. Select a criterion in the first drop-down list.

 3. Select a calculation standard in the second drop-down list.

 4. Enter a value in the text box.

 5. Click Apply.

 6. To remove a verification criterion, click .

Criterion Calculation standard


RPR (MOP) Effective Area

RPR (MAOP) Modified B31G


Ratio over MOP B31G
Ratio over MAOP Safe Effective Area

Safe Modified B31G

Safe B31G

424
After the analysis is processed, a status icon will be displayed:

Beside each Feature in the Features node (verification based on all criteria).

Beside each criterion in the Feature Details panel (verification based on the specific criterion).

Status icon Description

Complies with selected criterion.

Does not comply with selected criterion.

Unable to assess.

Pit gauge
Pipecheck allows an easy correlation with conventional inspection techniques. This tab enables
defining a virtual pit gauge that would share similar characteristics with a pit gauge used during a
manual corrosion inspection.
Parameters Description
Extension length Must be set between 25.4 mm and 304.8 mm.
Center length Must be set between 50.8 mm and 152.4 mm.
Extension count Minimum and maximum number of extensions per side.

Maximum allowable number of extension : 5.

Select Force symmetric check box to get a symmetrical repartition of the


extension(s) on each side of the pit gauge.
Force symmetry Select to force Pipecheck to measure the entire surface with a virtual pit gauge with a
symmetric configuration. For any given point on the surface, if Pipecheck calculates that it is
better to measure depth with one extension on one side and not necessarily on the other, it will
add one on the other side to keep the configuration symmetric.

Pipecheck automatically detects the optimal combination of brackets for a specific area with respect to
the entered parameters. The pit gauge, including the extensions, is visible in the 2D viewer. Click on a
point in the 2D viewer to move the pit gauge on the surface.

425
 1. Pit gauge

 2. Pit gauge extension

 3. Pit gauge center length

 4. Feature

 5. Measured point

If the virtual pit gauge is too small to measure an area of the pipe, a warning message will appear after
the analysis. No measure will be taken on the affected area and it will appear in bright color in the 2D
viewer. To avoid this, select the longest size for the pit gauge center part and extensions, and write 5
for the maximum extension count.
Boundary pit gauge behavior

This option will determine how the virtual pit gauge behave near a boundary. A boundary is defined by
an excluded area or the end of the scan. A manually deleted area will never be seen as a boundary, so if
a surface is virtually cut in two sections, it will not represent a boundary since data was scanned at this
location.
Optimize two-sided
Pipecheck measures depth near boundary using a two-sided pit gauge with variable center or
extension length. If it cannot fit a complete pit gauge based on the parameters, it will reduce its length
close to the boundary so it can fit and measure depth.

 1. Partial extension

 2. Full extension

Activate one-sided
Close to a boundary or an excluded area, Pipecheck will automatically measure depth using a one-
sided pit gauge . A one-sided pit gauge is mandatory if corrosion is found close to a weld.

426
The one-sided pit gauge is also used at the edge of the scan. The image below shows a one-sided pit
gauge at the edge of the scan when the Force symmetric option is activated.

Automatic
Pipecheck will decide the best way to evaluate depth near boundary and/or excluded area between the
optimize two-side or the one-sidepit gauge.
Do not use
Pipecheck does not evaluate near the boundary and/or excluded area. The width of that area is half the
size of the smallest pit gauge allowed in the parameters.

Color Map
The Color Map tab allows changing the settings of the difference map, which represents the depth
variation on the pipe surface in the viewers. By default, the depth variation lying within the critical
factor value appears in green.

427
Parameters Description
Color scale Select a Discrete or a Continuous scale type.
type
Divisions Select the number of divisions in the color map (1 to 15).
Unit type The values of the color scale divisions can be calculated in percentage of wall thickness,
percentage of pipe radius, or percentage of pipe diameter, or using the depth value set in
the Configure | Options | Units | Depths unit.
Reset Restore the default display color map with default divisions.
divisions
Reset color Click on a color of the scale to change it; click on Reset color to go back to the default color.
Reset to Restore all the default settings.
defaults
Once the parameters are defined, the color map can be edited :

 1. Click on a color of the scale to change it

 2. Click on value of the scale bar to change it and press


Enter to accept the new value

 3. Click on the separation between two colors to change


their values by moving the line up or down

CSV Export
The export of depths values in a table (.csv file) is customizable.
Parameters Description
Orientation Select which position information (Axial and Circumferential positions) will be displayed in the rows
and columns of the table.
Number Select the wanted number of digits to the right of the decimal point.
format
Exported Select the value to export between the Depth or Remaining wall.
value

Report - Overview
Select data to be included in the Features Summary table of the report Overviewpages:

2 axial and 2 circumferential position values.

2 pressure values per standard.

2 depth values

428
Position data

The Feature table shows 4 position values for each feature (2 first columns):
Row Description
First row Axial and circumferential starting position of the feature
Second row One of the following position values, as selected in the Report – Overview tab:

Axial and circumferential ending position of the feature

Axial and circumferential length of the feature

None

Pressure data

For each feature, the table shows two pressure values by standard (B31G, Modified B31G and Effective
Area). Select which value you wish to display among the choices provided in the Report - Overview tab
(two choices):

 1. Burst pressure

 2. Ratio of the burst pressure (RPR) to the MOP

 3. Ratio of the burst pressure (RPR) to the MAOP

 4. Safe pressure

 5. None

Depth data

The last column of the table shows 2 depth values:


Row Description
First row Maximum depth of the feature (depth unit)
Second row One of the following depth values, as selected in the Report – Overview tab:

Remaining wall thickness (depth unit)


Remaining wall thickness (percentage of wall thickness)
Maximum depth of the feature (percentage of wall thickness)
None

Report - Features
Use this tab to choose which information you wish to include in the Analysis Results table of the Features

429
page of the report. You can select as many values as desired.
Position data

Axial and circumferential starting and ending positions of the feature

Axial and circumferential lengths of the feature

Pressure data

Burst pressure

RPR (MOP): Ratio of the burst pressure to MOP

RPR (MAOP): Ratio of the burst pressure to MAOP

These values are calculated for each standard (B31G, Modified B31G, Effective Area).
Safe pressure data

 1. Safe pressure

 2. Ratio of the safe pressure to MOP

 3. Ratio of the safe pressure to MAOP

Other data

 1. Effective length of the feature

 2. Effective Area of the feature

 3. Hoop Stress

Refer to the B31G standard for information about these values.


Worst Case Profile positions

Positions of the Worst Case Profile points are listed in the Worst Case Profile table and can be
determined using:

430
The top left corner of the grid squares.

The real position of the points.

431
Corrosion Analysis
Once all parameters have been correctly defined, the Analyze function becomes available.

Click to launch the corrosion analysis.

Feature identification and dimension

Critical factor and threshold


The critical factor is used to identify corrosion features:

A virtual pit-gauge depth measurement is taken in every grid (pixel) based on the scanning res-
olution set by the user.

Every group of pixels deeper than the critical factor is identified as a single anomaly (called fea-
ture).

The feature dimensions start and end at the threshold depth value.

Anomalies are combined into clusters based on the interaction rules.

The threshold value must be equal or smaller than the critical factor value. If no threshold value is
entered, the feature dimensions and the interaction criteria are measured at the critical factor.

Interaction rules

Axial and circumferential criteria


Surrounding corroded areas may be grouped into a single feature (cluster), according to the
interaction rules:

 1. Each corroded area is delimited according to the selected Interaction method, at the depth
defined by the Threshold for corroded area.

 2. Delimited areas are enlarger by ½ x Axial and Circumferential criterion (red lines).

 3. If two enlarged areas overlap each other, they are grouped together. If there is no overlap
between two enlarged areas, it means the corroded areas have a distance between each other
at least equal to 1 x the axial and circumferential criteria.

432
 1. Individual features

 2. Interaction rules

 1. Growing box and Connecting box

 2. Fit to shape

 3. Feature borders

 1. Growing box

 2. Connecting box

 3. Fit to shape

Feature dimensions do not include the Axial and Circumferential criteria ; they are
measured at the depth defined by the threshold for corroded area.

Results

Features details
Depending on the interaction parameters entered in the Analysis tab, various features will be defined
during the corrosion analysis, each one corresponding to an isolated corroded area. Once the analysis
completed, the resulting features are listed under the Feature node. To show a feature in the viewers,
select it from that list (use the Ctrl key for multiple selections). To rename a feature, select it and left-
click on it.
The Navigation pane, in the bottom left corner of the interface, displays information when:

Selecting the feature group


Feature count: How many features were found.

433
Maximum depth on the pipe:

Name of the feature on which it was found

Maximum depth value

Axial position

Circumferential position

Total volume of corrosion found on the entire pipe

Selecting a single feature

Feature details

Eff. are pressure details

Modif. B31G pressure details

B31G pressure details

2D & 3D viewer details

Information that can be seen in both 2D and 3D viewer:

 1. Depth color map

 2. River bottom path (blue line)

 3. Effective length (red line)

434
 4. Analysis grid and positions (white grid)

 5. Feature boundary (blue line boundary)

 6. Annotation

The annotation contains important feature information, error message if so and the status based on
corrosion criteria. To move an annotation, left click and drag it in the viewer.
To delete an annotation, right click the feature and select Delete.

Analysis tools only displayed in the 2D viewer:

 7. Virtual pit-gauge

 A. Extension

 B. Center section

 C. Tip

 8. Worst case profile

 9. Find deepest point

 10. Deepest point values

 11. Section profiles

 A. Axial

 B. Circumferential

 12. Feature circumferential coverage

River bottom path (RBP)


The River bottom path (RBP) of each feature is drawn from the feature deepest point, which consists of
the Deepest Point of each grid square covered by the feature. Deepest point and River bottom path are
shown in the 2D viewer for a selected feature.
The 2D viewer axial section view shows the Worst Case Profile of a selected feature.
When activated, the Worst Case Profile in red represents the effective length. It represents the most
critical corrosion profile in the feature. Effective area pressures are calculated using the effective length.

Pit-gauge analysis
Pipecheck measures depth using a virtual pit gauge. The user should take a close look at the virtual pit
gauge dimensions and behavior since they affect the depth measurement the same way it would affect
it if done manually. If the user face an incorrect measurement, the pit gauge can be controlled by going
in the pit gauge parameters tab. The pit gauge dimensions and behavior are displayed for each
measurement in the 2D viewer.
To do so:

435
 1. Go in the 2D viewer.

 2. Click on a specific point in the 2D image.

 3. Look at the pit gauge dimensions (center, extensions) and look at its behavior if close to
boundaries.

 4. If measurements are incorrect, go in the pit gauge parameters tab to change the settings.

Corrosion inside dents


If a surface has been created in the Dent module to analyze corrosion inside dents, it will appear under
the Parent material node.
The surface deviations can be analyzed the same way as in the dent module by clicking on the surface
and looking at the color map.
If the corrosion analysis is not processed, the whole scan and dent areas will be displayed in gray in the
3D viewer. Once the analysis is done, everything is analyzed except the dent areas that are not included
in the fitted surfaces. The corroded areas inside dents will be treated as normal corrosion. If the depths
are deeper than the critical factor, a corrosion feature will be created and bursting pressures calculated
from B31G, Modified B31G and Effective Area methods will be computed.

436
Before corrosion analysis After corrosion analysis

 1. Corroded area inside dent

 2. Dent area

The dent area is seen as an excluded area in the corrosion module. A part of it can be restored to be
included in the corrosion analysis by using the Remove the exclusion of the selected area button.

   

   

Be careful when analyzing a corrosion feature extracted from Extend Parent


Material, since the burst pressures might not comply with ASME B31.8-2018
computation methods.
A warning message will be displayed under the details of each feature created
from Extend Parent Material.

Other tools

Measuring distances
Distances between 2 specific points can be added in both 2D & 3D viewers once the analysis is
performed. The distance is taken on the nominal diameter. These measurements are listed under the
Distances node.

437
To add a distance

 1. Press and hold Shift.

 2. Click a first point.

 3. Click a second point. To determine the right distance, drag the second point while holding left-
click.

 4. Release the left mouse button to set the second point position.

To invert a distance

 1. Right click on the distance in the Distances node

 2. Click Invert

To delete a distance

 1. Right click on the specific distance in the Distances node

 2. Click Delete Distance

To delete all distances, right click on the Distances node and select Delete all
distances option.

Snapshots
Snapshots can be added to the report. They store the viewer camera positions and are automatically
updated after any modification. The snapshots are under the Snapshots node.

438
To add a snapshot

 1. Right-click in the 3D view.

 2. Click Add snapshot.

To delete a snapshot

 1. Right-click the specific snapshot in the Snapshots node.

 2. Click Remove.

To set a snapshot to another view

 1. Left-click the specific snapshot in the Snapshots node.

 2. Rotate the 3D view at the desired position.

 3. Right-click the snapshot.

 4. Click Set to current view.

Troubleshooting

Analysis messages
Once the analysis is completed, user must make sure that there is no issues by looking at the depth
color map for possible measurement errors that are not automatically found by the software.
If an analysis issue occurs, an error or warning message will appear.

Common analysis issues


Pit-Gauge is too long

The pit gauge has too many extensions. This usually happens when analyzing a slightly bended
pipeline. Seeing the deflection as corrosion, Pipecheck tries to add more extensions. This error can be
seen by looking at the color-map shape creating elongated lines of corrosion. The 2D axial section also
displays a bended profile, indicating that the bent has been included in the corrosion.
To fix it, limit the pit gauge extensions & length.
Examples :

439
Pit gauge is too long

Optimal pit gauge length

Weld analysis

Many issues can come from a weld analysis if not well excluded from the analysis.
Hi-lo issue:
Weld is deleted. Deleted area does not create a boundary and software will still use a Two-sided pit-
gauge, creating Hi-lo issues. Always exclude the weld instead of deleting it.

High points:
Long corrosion lines can be seen if the pit gauge sits on a higher point than the pipe surface. This leads
to deeper measurement than reality.
Incomplete weld exclusion:
Weld is not completely excluded, leaving some high points where the pit gauge can sit on. Exclude
these high points to solve the issue.

440
Noise/spot welds:
High points can be created when scanning a spot, remaining coating, sand or anything that was above
the scan surface. To fix this issue, delete or exclude the high points.

Pit-gauge behavior

Boundary pit-gauge behavior needs to be correctly defined when analyzing corrosion close to
boundary. Some situations can lead to possible analysis errors.
Corrosion beside weld: Corrosion beside weld needs to be analyzed using a one- sided pit gauge
(activate One-sided or Automatic parameter) and not using an Optimize two-sided.
Optimized two-sided (incorrect parameter):

441
Activate One-sided or Automatic (correct parameter):

Local deformation close to boundary:

Local deformation can cause the one-sided pit gauge to lift, especially when using extensions. Try to
use no extension (or smallest as possible) to fix this issue. The other possibility would be not to analyze
anything close to boundary if there is no corrosion.
Long one-sided extension (incorrect parameter for this situation):

No one-sided extension (correct parameter for this situation):

442
Export Deepest Points
Depth grids details
Pipecheck can export a depth grid containing the deepest points in each grid. The grid resolution is
based on the Worst Case Profile resolution, which cannot be lower than the scan resolution.
By default, the depth values are exported in a .csv file that can easily be viewed in Excel format.

The columns represent the axial position(s).

The row represents the circumferential position(s).

The difference between two positions, either axial or circumferential, is equal to the Worst Case
Profile resolution defined in the Analysis parameters (size of the grid squares).

The orientation can be modified trough the CSV Export parameters.

To export the deepest points

 1. In the corrosion module, click on File – Export – Export deepest points.

 2. Select one of the three options : All pipe, All features and Selected features.

 3. In the Export deepest points dialog, choose the location and folder where to save the file.

 4. In the File name field, type a name for the file.

 5. In the Type file list, select CSV (default option).

 6. Click Save.

A right click on the Features node will also allow exporting the deepest points.

443
Import UT Data
It is possible to import UT data (Ultra-Sonic thickness) measurements in Pipecheck. The data must be
imported through the Corrosion module. Therefore, the parameters must also be set in this module.

UT data Import methods


UT data can be imported with or without scan data.
Scan data: UT data will be projected from the scan surface and be displayed as an internal surface. Thus,
only the internal corrosion will be displayed on the internal surface.

It is only possible to project the UT data from an external scan surface. The
projection from an internal surface is not supported.

Without scan data: UT data will be projected from nominal outside diameter (OD) and be displayed as an
internal surface. It will not be possible to separate internal corrosion from external corrosion.

To import UT data
 1. Click on Import | Import UT data in the main toolbar to import CSV or TXT files with UT data.

 2. Select the import file format depending on these three options:

Define new format : To define a new file format.

Choose existing format : Select an existing format. If this option is not available, it means
that no format was previously created.

Edit existing format: Select an existing format and click the Edit button.

 3. Once an option has been selected, click Next or Finish.

To define a new format

 1. Click Define new format... in the Import UT Data dialog.

 2. Click Next.

 3. Apply these parameters in order:

Column delimiter: Based on the CSV file, select between these delimiters: , ; or Tab

Decimal delimiter: Based on your region and language format, select between . or ,

UT data from manual: Select this option if the data was acquired with a UT Manual probe.
The UT data found within the external corrosion will be taken into account. Clear to
discard the UT data found within the external corrosion since automatic UT
measurements are not as accurate in these conditions. Instead, an interpolation will be

444
done using the closest data outside the corroded area. A scan session is required for this
function to work.

 4. Click Next

 5. Apply these parameters in order:

Position of first UT data: Define the cell containing the first UT Data to be imported. It is
also possible to click on the cell to select it. The items that are grayed out will not be
imported. Only UT thickness measurements should remain in white.

UT data orientation: Define the axis orientation of the UT format.

 6. Click Next.

445
 7. Define the corresponding cell and its unit:

Axial first position

Circ. first position

Axial resolution

Circ. resolution

It is also possible to right-click on a cell to assign it with one of the elements.

If the UT data circumferential position unit is hh:mm:ss, it needs to be converted


into h:m. Pipecheck is expecting only h:m so, to enter the information correctly, it
is required to convert to another set of units, or to use decimals for h:m.
Example: 0:01:47 (hh:mm:ss) = 0:01.783 (h:m) where 47 sec. is 0.78 minutes in
decimals.

The format can be saved by entering a name and clicking on the Save format button.

 8. Click Finish to import the UT data.

Manual input
This function is useful in corroded areas where the automatic UT tools are not accurate. The manual
data inputs overwrite previously imported measurements from the Import UT data function.

 1. Have a 3D external scan surface.

 2. Click to input manual UT probe data.

446
 3. Press and hold the Ctrl key.

 4. Click on the appropriate area on the scan surface.

 5. Enter the input value and click .

 6. Repeat the steps 3 to 5 for each manual input.

 7. Click icon to exit the function.

Parameters for UT data import


Analysis type

When importing UT data, Pipecheck will run the same standard analysis as usual, using the interaction
parameters and computing burst pressures. These measurements will be computed based on the
following analysis types. Only the selected analysis will be displayed and exported in the report:

True wall thickness: This analysis combines UT data with the Pipecheck virtual pit gauge meas-
urements. This allows to separate internal corrosion from external corrosion and to display
them as a 3D model. As UT data gathered in external corrosion (found with the virtual pit gauge
analysis) is not accurate, the main benefit of this analysis is that it is deleted and replaced by an
interpolation of the closest UT data around the corrosion. Scan and UT data are required.

Virtual pit-gauge only: This analysis uses Pipecheck virtual pit gauge measurement only (external
corrosion analysis) even if UT data are imported.

UT data only: This option analyzes internal corrosion only. If there is not scan data, all wall loss
from UT data is considered as internal corrosion. If there is scan Data, the internal corrosion will
be separated from UT data using the external scan. The analysis will show only this separated
corrosion.

447
Examples of different analysis types
Scan data

The black dots show the start and the end of the corrosion on a specific axial section.

External nominal surface (3D scan): top black line.

Internal nominal surface: red dotted line.

Imported UT data: bottom black line. The UT data found between the two black dots (start/end
of external corrosion) is not accurate.

True wall thickness analysis

External nominal surface (3D scan): top black line.

Internal nominal surface: red dotted line.

Imported UT data and interpolation: bottom black line. From the external scan surface,
Pipecheck finds the external corrosion boundaries. Within these boundaries, Pipecheck inter-
polates the UT data providing more accurate results.

448
Scattered UT data

Spread value over radius of: This changes the interpolation radius of UT data based on the value
entered. If data are scattered, this prevent the interpolation between each point to reach the
nominal surface creating a smoother result.

Analysis results of UT data


Pipecheck will run the same standard analysis as usual, using the interaction parameters and
computing burst pressures.
It will run the analysis using the corrosion features created from the selected analysis and parameters.
For further information, see the analysis results section.

Navigation panel
When UT data is imported or Manual Input is added, a UT data node is created in the Navigation panel. It
is possible to select one or more elements and delete it. To do so, right-click on the selection to be
deleted.

UT data panel
See UT Data Details section.

3D Color map
Color map options are available through the General display options pane in the Display panel.

Pit gauge depths only: Only the virtual pit gauge analysis is displayed on the external surface.

UT data depths only: Only the UT data analysis is displayed on both internal and external surfaces.

Analysis depths: Only the analysis type selected in the parameters will be displayed on the external
surface.

UT data analysis is always displayed on the internal surface.

449
To adjust UT data position
It is possible to adjust the UT data position if misaligned with the scan data. This will ensure a proper
projection of UT data from the scan surface.

 1. Select the imported UT data item in the Navigationpanel (under the UT data node).

 2. Click in the toolbar.

 3. Use the slider or the spin box to adjust the UT Data Offsets (axial and/or circumferential offset).

 4. Click on Apply to confirm.

Analysis
The 2D viewer and the Features node display the Analysis type selected in the parameters. In the 2D
viewer, the internal surface profile (axial and circumferential) will also be displayed if UT data is
imported.

True wall thickness analysis Pit gauge analysis

Details of UT data imported


Point count: Total of imported UT measurements.
UT data minimum thickness: This provides information on the minimum thickness found on the UT data.

Min. thickness

Axial position

Circumferential position

UT data analysis report


Pipecheck creates the same standard report based on the Analysis type selected.
For more details, refer to the Reporting page.

450
Dent Module
Interface
Editing the 3D model
Dent parameters
Dent analysis
Corrosion analysis inside dents
Export CSV

451
Dent Module Interface
See the Interface Overview for a general description of Pipecheck interface.
The specific interface elements of the Dent module are:

Navigation panel
The Navigation panel lists all nodes created during the dent analysis. The Features node is automatically
created following the analysis process. When selected, the feature information appears in expanding
panels. To rename a feature, click it to select and click again to rename.
Select one or more features to show them in the viewers and to see the Feature Details.
Right-click on a feature to:

Export CSV

Remove dent area created with the Assign dent area function

Create sections(All coordinates, Single coordinate or Multiples coordinates)

Reset sections

Add ILI connection. It allows to select an ILI feature that should be in connection with the selec-
ted feature (this will bypass the Minimum overlap for connection)

Display panel
In the Display panel, available options depend on the selected mode and view. When an option is
available, its name is highlighted and it is possible to toggle it on or off using the check box.
Display panel functions
 
Section Function Description

Table 6-3 Changes the mesh display depending on the selection:

Display as Quads
Mesh
Display Wire frame

Transparent
Show color
Shows or hides the color map display.
map

452
Section Function Description
Reference Displays the reference arrow to indicate the flux direction and the scanned surface
arrow origin.
Grid Shows or hides the analysis grid.
Grid position Shows or hides the axial and circumferential grid position.
Feature
Shows or hides the identification number of the selected features.
General identification
Show ILI features Displays the ILI features.
Options
Distances Shows or hides the distances listed under them in Distance node.
Effective
Displays or hides the Effective length in color on the river bottom path.
length
Quick
rendering Reduces image rendering while moving the object in the 3D viewer
while moving
  Color map Displays the color map according to the selected option.
Zoom on
If this option is activated, the next feature(s) selected in the Feature node will be
selected
zoomed.
feature
Deepest
Shows or hides the values of the deepest points of each square of the grid.
points values
2D Viewer
Shows or hides the straight edge in the 2D viewer when clicking on a specific
Show
Straight edge section under the feature node. The straight edge can be axial or circumferential
Options
depending of the selected section.

Deviation
Shows or hides the radial deviation values in the 2D viewer.
values
Curvature Shows or hides the curvature radius in the 2D viewer when a strain analysis and
radius strain color map is active.

Contextual menu
Other options are available using the contextual menu. A right-click in the viewer gives access to the
following functions:
3D view

Function Description
Lock rotation axis Allows to rotate the scan only around the pipe axis.
Fit to screen Allows to center and display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D
viewer.
Show inside deviations on outside surface This function is available with an internal scan. It allows displaying the
color map of the internal surface on the external one for a better
visualization.

453
Function Description
Standard view Set the pipe display depending on the selection:

Up Flow

Down Flow

3 o'clock

6 o'clock

9 o'clock

12 o'clock
Add snapshot Create a snapshot with the active view.
Hide all annotations Hide all feature annotations.
Show all annotations Show all feature annotations.

2D view

Function Description
Fit image Zoom out to show the whole pipe surface.
Find deepest point Find the deepest point ( pipe, feature or current grid position).
Hide all annotations Hide all feature annotations.
Show all annotations Show all feature annotations.
Creates an axial and a circumferential section at the position of the
Create sections
last mouse click.

Find highest strain Find the highest strain of the pipe or in a feature.

3D viewer
 1. Analysis grid

 2. Origin

 3. Direction flow

 4. Scale

 5. Feature

 6. Pipe

 7. Color map

Items displayed in the 3D viewer:


Item Default Note
Scanned surface Gray Can be displayed as Triangles or Wire Frame (see the Display Settings section of the 3D
triangles viewer).
Analysis grid White Zoom on the grid to see the real size of a square.
Origin of the White Represented without the offset. See Referencing a Scan to learn how to define this
analysis grid circle reference.
Flow direction White Orientation can be inverted in the Scanning Parameters.
arrow

454
Item Default Note
Difference map of   Colored representation of the radial deviation on the scanned surface. Difference Map
selected features parameters can be modified in the Color Map tab of the Dent parameters dialog.
Distances Yellow See to learn how to measure distances on the surface.
Reference arrow   The reference arrow allows defining the origin of the analysis grid and the flow
direction.
Deviation vectors   Whiskers of an axial or circumferential Section. Right-click on the 3D viewer to show or
hide the section whiskers (see Display and Details section).

2D viewer
Items displayed in the 2D viewer:
Item Default Note
Analysis grid White The size of the squares is equal to the Scan Resolution.
Zoom on the grid to see the real size of a square.
Difference map of selected feature(s)   Colored representation of the radial deviation on the
scanned surface. Difference Map parameters can be
modified in the Color Map tab of the Dent parameters
dialog.
Deepest point of each square of the   Apply the Find Deepest Point function in a feature to
analysis grid for selected feature(s) locate its deepest point. Zoom on the grid to see each of its
depth value.
Straight-edge tool Gray Representation of the tool used to measure the Straight
edge Depth of a section. 
Tool tip   Click on a point in the 2D viewer to see its position
and depth values.
Distances Yellow See Measuring distances to learn how to measure
distances on the surface.

Section views
The 2D viewer is surrounded by 3 graphs:

Graph Position Description

Axial section view of the pipe at the


circumferential position selected in the 2D viewer

Axial position of the point selected in the


Axial section view Bottom
2D viewer
The straight edge will be displayed in red color
if a section is selected and the option activated.

Circumferential section view of the pipe at


the axial position selected in the 2D viewer
Circumferential section view Right
Circumferential position of the point selected
in the 2D viewer

455
Graph Position Description

Circumferential section view of the pipe at


the axial position selected in the 2D viewer
Angular position of the point selected in
Bottom
Angular position graph right the 2D viewer
corner
Angular coverage of the pipe
The straight edge will be displayed in red color
if a section is selected and the option activated.

It is possible to lengthen the deviation vectors of the section views by changing the value of the
deviation vector multiplier in the Dent parameters.
Hold the cursor while moving the mouse in the 2D viewer to observe the changes in the section views.

456
Editing the 3D Model in Dent Module
Before launching a dent analysis, it may be necessary to edit the 3D model.

To edit the 3D model

 1. Select a selection tool in the mini-toolbar.

 2. Hold Ctrl+Click and make the selection.

 3. To deselect a part of the selection, use Ctrl+Shift+Click.

 4. Select the editing function in the Edit area of the toolbar.

Assign dent area


When performing a dent analysis, a feature is automatically created. The whole pipe surface is analyzed
in order to find a dent and to define that feature.
It is possible to manually define dent areas. Pipecheck will look for a dent on the assigned area instead
of searching on the whole pipe surface. One feature will be defined per dent area.
This function is useful to

Define by yourself the area on which Pipecheck should look for a dent.

Analyze several dents on the same scanned surface.

To assign a dent area

 1. Define the area using a Selection tool.

 2. Click to tag the selected area as dented.

When assigning a dent area, the assigned surface will appear in a light purple color on the scanned
surface and a feature will be added in the Feature list (before analysis).
Once the analysis is completed, the feature identified on the assigned area is displayed in the viewer
(blue borders).

457
 1. Pipe surface

 2. Assigned area

 3. Feature

To remove a dent area

 1. Right-click on the corresponding feature.

 2. Select Remove Dent Area.

The Features node is automatically created following the analysis process. When selected, the feature
information appears in expanding panels. To rename a feature, click it to select and click again to
rename.

Force corroded
When corrosion is found in a dent, it is possible to select it and use the function Force corroded. The
software will ignore this selection when it fits a surface on the dent. An accurate corrosion analysis will

then be possible. To remove this selection, select over it and use Undo force corroded .

458
 1. Dent area

 2. Corroded area

Corrosion selection might be easier by using the Brush selection tool: change its size and use the left
mouse button. This will create circle selections.

For more information on the workflow to analyze corrosion in dents, see Corrosion Analysis Inside
Dents.

Delete
This function allows to deleted selected area from analysis process.
Data can always be restored from the recycle bin.
To retrieve deleted surfaces, right-click them in the Recycle Bin and select Restore.
The surface will only be deleted in the module you are working in. It allows deleting different parts of
the surface depending on the module (i.e. if you plan to analyze both a corroded area and a dented
area in the same session).

459
Dent Parameters

Parameters for Dent analysis and reporting are available through different tabs. To access it, click

and .

Analysis
Set the parameters to perform a depth-based analysis of the pipe and output the radial deviations
measured in each square of the analysis grid. The size of the grid squares is equal to the Scan
Resolution.
Depth-based analysis

Parameter Description

Percentage of the pipe radius at which a dent is deep enough to be identified


Critical factor
as Dent feature.
%Rad The percentage radius unit can be selected using the drop-down list.
Deviation vector
Lengthen the deviation vectors of the Section views to see them more easily.
multiplier

Interaction parameters

Parameter Description
Use interaction rules Select to use the interaction rules in calculation during the analysis.

Percentage of the pipe radius at which the feature dimensions are measured.
The critical factor and threshold are used to identify corrosion features and
determine dent dimension:

Every pixel deeper or higher than the critical factor is identified as a


single dent anomaly.
Threshold for dent
Anomalies are combined automatically into clusters based on the
interaction parameters (if the distance between the single anomalies is
lower that the axial or circumferential criteria).

The feature dimensions is defined either by the Straight-edge method


or the threshold.

460
Parameter Description

To identify corrosion features and determine dent dimension:

Every pixel deeper or higher than the critical factor is identified as a


single dent anomaly.
Critical factor and Anomalies are combined automatically into clusters based on the
other value
interaction parameters (if the distance between the single anomalies is
lower that the axial or circumferential criteria).

The feature dimensions is defined either by the Straight-edge method


or the threshold.
Minimal axial distance between two dent areas for which they will remain separated
Axial Criteria
features.

Circumferential Minimal circumferential distance between two dent areas for which they will remain
Criteria separated features.

Assess damage

Choose between assessing the dent by using either:

The pipe diameter (defined in the Common parameters).

The calculated diameter of the scanned surface.

Shoulder sections

Select Create to automatically create shoulder sections on either side of a defect using a distance
setting.
The Shoulders sections created can be accessed under each feature through the Features node.

Strain Analysis
Strain-based analysis

Parameters Description
Select to activate this analysis process. It is based on the ASME B31.8-2018
Compute strains
standard.
  It is the effective strain limit. The default value is 6%, but it can be set by
the user. The results display will depend on the on critical factor. Values
Critical factor
higher than the strain limit will appear in warm colors indicating
possible defects.
Axial distance for curvature The axial search distance used to select points on the dent surface in order to fit
computation a circle that provides the radius of curvature in longitudinal plane (R2).
  The circumferential search distance used to select points on the dent
Circumferential distance for
surface in order to fit a circle that provides the radius of curvature in
curvature computation
transverse plane (R1).

Feature Status

461
Each dent feature has a name, but also a status to tell the user if it meets the criterion or not. The user
can select criteria and controls from the drop-down lists and set a percentage value in the text box. It is
possible to add as many status as wanted.

To add a verification criterion

 1. Click Add.

 2. Select a criterion in the first drop-down list.

 3. Select a control in the second drop-down list.

 4. Enter a percentage value in the text box.

 5. Click Apply.

 6. To remove a verification criterion, click .

Criterion Control

Rad. depth

Rmin

Rmax

Rmin/Rnominal

Rmax/Rnominal

Axial straight edge depth

Circ. straight edge depth

Diam. at deepest point, flat caliper


Is lower than
Maximum diameter, flat caliper
Is higher than
Diam. at deepest point, pipe caliper

Maximum diameter, pipe caliper

Effective maximum strain

Effective internal strain

Effective external strain

Circumferential bending strain

Longitudinal bending strain

Longitudinal extension strain

After the analysis is processed, a status icon will be displayed:

462
Beside each Feature in the Features node (verification based on all criteria).

Beside each criterion in the Feature Details panel (verification based on the specific criterion).

Status icon Description

Complies with selected criterion.

Does not comply with selected criterion.

Unable to assess.

Depth Color Map


Depth Color Map: To change the settings of the depth map, which illustrates the radial deviations on the
pipe surface in the viewers.
Colors set by default:

Warm colors: Negative deviations

Green: ± Critical factor

Cold colors: Positive deviations

The values of the color scale divisions can be calculated in percentage of wall thickness, percentage of
pipe radius, or percentage of pipe diameter, or using the depth value set in the Configure | Options |
Units | Depth Unit.

To edit the color map

 1. Select a Discrete or a Continuous color scale type.

 2. Select the number of divisions (1 to 15) for each side of the scale (positive and negative depth
values).

 3. Select a symmetric color scale (same separations on positive and negative sides).

 4. Click on a color of the scale to change it for another color; click on Reset color to come back to
the default color.

 5. Click on a value of the scale bar to change it and press Enter to accept the new value.

 6. Click on the separation between two colors to change their values by moving the line up or
down; click Reset Divisions to restore color separations of equal size.

 7. Click Default to restore the default color map.

Strain Color Map

463
Strain Color Map allows to change the color map settings.
CSV Export
The export of depths values in a table (.csv) is customizable.
Orientation

Select an Orientation type for the table (normal or transposed), the angle representing the axial
position, and the height being the circumferential position.
Number format

Select a Number format that will determine the number of decimal places.

464
Dent Analysis
Once all parameters are correctly defined, the Analysis function becomes available.

Click to launch the Dent analysis.


There are two different methods to perform a dent analysis: depth-based analysis and strain-based
analysis.

Depth-based analysis

Analysis workflow

Pipecheck uses the following workflow to analyze a dent :

 1. Deviations measurement : Distances are measured in each grid (based on scan resolution) from
the nominal cylinder to the scan surface.1

 2. Depth color map : A color map (depth color map) is established based on the deviations
measurement. Each pixel has a color based on its deviation.

 3. Feature dimensions and identification : Anomalies are identified using a Critical factor. These are
call Features in Pipecheck. Once anomalies are found, their dimensions are defined based on the
selected method.

 4. Measurements : Straight-edge depths and other measurements are taken for every feature.

1Deviations can be negative or positive.


Features

Feature identification and dimensions


Two methods are offered to identify and determine the anomalies dimension:
Radial deviation technique

Feature identification

Pipecheck identifies every pixel exceeding the critical factor (negative and positive deviations).

By default, only one feature is created including everything exceeding critical factor.

Feature dimensions

The dimensions start and end at the first and last pixel exceeding the critical factor.

The feature dimensions are delimited by a blue rectangle.

465
Multiple dents
Assign dent area function can be used for two reasons :

Restrain the dent dimensions to the selected area.

Analyze many individual dents in the same session.

Pipecheck analyzes one independent dent per assigned dent area. The dimensions are determined by
the same method explained above, but limited by the assigned dent area.

No assigned dent area. Assigned dent area.


Only feature created and analyzed : One feature analyzed per assigned dent area :

The blue rectangles represent the feature dimensions.

Hybrid technique: straight-edge and radial deviation technique

Select Use interaction rules check box to activate the function. Thereby Pipecheck uses a different
method to identify features and to measure its dimension.
Feature identification

Pipecheck identifies every area exceeding the critical factor and assign them as independent fea-
tures.

These features will be combined together if closer than the interaction rules.

Pipecheck analyzes each feature independently.

Feature dimensions

The length and width of the dent are determined by the longest measurement between the
Straight-edge technique and the Radial deviation technique.

The feature dimensions are delimited by a blue rectangle which might not touch to the warm
color if the Straight-edge technique is driving the dimensions.

Straight-edge technique
Pipecheck replicates on-field measurement to determine the feature dimension. A straight-edge tool is
placed on each dent anomaly. It measures the deviations between the straight-edge and the surface
and statistically analyze and finds the axial start and end. This measurement is taken at each different

466
circumferential positions up to the end of the dent. This method gives the contour of the dent and the
dimension is shown by a blue rectangle.
In situations where the threshold or critical factor is very low, the dent dimension could be driven by
these values since the Radial deviation technique would give longer dent dimension. This situation could
also happen if the dent has axial shoulder(s), where the straight-edge dimension would be smaller
than the radial deviation technique.

Straight-edge: White line

Start and end of dent using straight-edge


technique: Green arrows

Start and end of dent using radial


deviation technique: Yellow arrows

The hybrid method will use the farthest starting and ending point from any of
both methods to define dimensions.

Dimensions driven by the Straight-edge technique: Dimensions driven by the Radial deviation technique
(critical factor):

Results

Information that can be seen in both 2D and 3D viewer:

 1. Analysis grid

 2. Feature boundary

 3. Straight-edge tip

 4. Straight-edge

 5. Feature annotation

 6. Circumferential section profile unrolled

467
 7. Circumferential section profile

 8. Deviation vectors

 9. 2D straight-edge projection

 10. Axial section profile

 11. Deviation color scale

 12. Deviation values

Depth Color map


Pipecheck uses deviation values to create a Depth based color map.

Features
3.2.1 Feature details

The details concerning a selected feature appear in the Feature Details panel.

Details Description
Section count Number of sections created for this feature
Axial length
Feature size
Circumferential width
Maximum and Minimum Radius found on the feature, Maximum Diameter of the pipe,
Radius and diameter
Diameter at Deepest Point and diameter at 90° of Deepest Point

Axial and
circumferential position The feature deepest point location
of maximum depth
Depth of the deepest point measured from the pipe diameter (taken along the pipe
Radial depth
radius). See Straight-Edge Depth for more information.

Depth of the deepest point evaluated with a Straight-Edge Tool along the pipe axis
Straight-edge depth (axial depth) and circumference (circumferential depth). See Straight-Edge Depth
for more information.

468
Diameter Measurements

 1. Circumferential Straight edge depth

 2. Nominal radius

 3. Minimum radius (Rmin)

 4. Nominal diameter

 5. Diameter at deepest point

 6. Diameter at 90° of deepest point

Feature annotations
The annotation contains important feature information, error message if so and the status based on
dent.
To display annotations

3D viewer: Select a feature under the Features node.

2D viewer: Click on a feature in the viewer.

To move an annotation, left click and drag it in the viewer.

469
To delete an annotation, right click the feature and select Delete.

Sections

When clicking in the 2D viewer, an axial and a circumferential cross-sectional views at the selected point
are shown in the Section views. Move the mouse in the 2D viewer to observe the deviations along the
pipe surface via the Sections views.

Add sections
It is possible to save specific section views and export them in the report. By default, an axial and a cir-
cumferential section are automatically created at the deepest point of each feature. These sections can
be viewed at any time by selecting them.
There are two ways to manually create sections:

 1. Right-click at the desired location in the 2D viewer and select Create sections. An axial and a cir-
cumferential section will be created at the selected location.

 2. Right-click on a feature in the Features node and select Create sections. Choose between creating:

Sections for all coordinates: To create an axial section for each row of the analysis grid and a
circumferential section for each column.

Single coordinate: To create an axial or a circumferential section at the desired position on


the pipe.

Multiple coordinate: To create a series of axial or circumferential sections at a desired


interval.

All sections are listed with their respective feature under the Features node.

Display and Details


Select a section in the Navigation panel to show it in the Section views and to see its details in the Details
pane.
The following information is presented in the Section Details:

Details Description
Name of the section. Sections created by default at the deepest point of a feature are named
Name
deepest point. Sections created manually are named by their axial or circumferential position.
Orientation Informs if the section is axial or circumferential. Location of the deepest point of the feature.
Radial Depth of the deepest point of the section measured from the pipe diameter. This measure is taken
depth along the pipe radius. See Straight-edge depth for more information.

Straight- Depth of the deepest point of the section, evaluated with a Straight edge Tool. See Straight-
edge depth edge depth for more information.
Radius and Maximum and minimum radius found on the feature, maximum diameter of the pipe, diameter at
diameter deepest point and diameter at 90° of deepest point.

470
A section selected in the Navigation panel can be shown in the 3D viewer by selecting the Deviation
Vectors option in the Display panel.

Use the Export CSV function to export the deviation values of one or several sections.

Measurement

Depth measurement is performed in two different ways:

Radial depth
The radial depth is the measured distance from the pipe diameter to the scanned surface. The measure
is taken along the pipe radius. The pipe diameter value depends on the selection made in the dent
parameters. It is either the nominal diameter input in Pipecheck or the measured diameter which is
automatically calculated. This method is used to evaluate the deviation of each square of the grid and
to identify the feature deepest point.

Straight-edge depth
For each section saved in the Navigation panel, the Straight edge depth of the deepest point is
measured and evaluated using a virtual Straight edge tool, which acts as a pit gauge that would be sit
on the pipe surface to measure the dent maximum depth. Activate the Straight edge option to see the
Straight edge tool in the Display panel.
A point is required on each side of the deepest point to sit the Straight edge tool. Both points must be
higher than the deepest point and located inside the assigned dent area.
Axial section

The Straight edge tool is oriented along the pipe axis to measure the Axial Straight edge maximum depth
of the section. The highest point on each side of the dent are used as sitting points. If the pipe is
uniform on both sides of the dent, the Straight edge tool will sit on the border of the feature. If the
deepest point is located at one end of the axial section, a point will be missing to sit the Straight edge
tool.

471
If the Assign dent area function has been used, the Straight edge tool length is limited to the assigned
area. The shape of the assigned area can therefore affect the value of the Axial Straight edge maximum
depth.

Circumferential section

The Straight edge tool is oriented perpendicular to the pipe axis to measure the Circumferential Straight
edge maximum depth of the section. It measures depth on the real circumferential section, not on the
unwrapped circumferential section.
 

472
If the feature is too small compared to the pipe diameter, points may not be high enough to sit the
Straight edge tool on the circumferential section.

Do not refer to the unwrapped view of the circumferential section when analyzing the circumferential
profile as it may show points higher than the deepest point, or points that are too far on the pipe cir-
cumference to sit the tool on it.

When it is impossible to sit the Straight edge tool to measure the Circumferential Straight edge depth, it is
also impossible to compute the Minimum diameter measured with caliper at deepest point and the
diameter measured with caliper at 90 degrees of deepest point since they depend on the location and
orientation of the Straight edge tool.
The Depth-Based Analysis ratios are calculated from the maximum depth and the feature length.
Deviations are calculate between the scan data a perfect cylinder. Once they are calculated, a color map
is created using the critical factor.

Strain based analysis

473
ASME B31.8-2018

Definition
Pipecheck is ASME B31.8-2018 code compliant where pipe failure is determined by the value of an
effective strain. The effective strain is the combination of three different strains. Their values can be
obtained from formulas where measurement of two radii (R1 & R2) at the maximum depth is needed.
A different strain can be found on the inner and outer surface of the pipe, since the dent creates either
a compression (-) or an extension (+) of the material. The Effective maximal strain is the maximal of one
of these values.

Formulas and variables

Circumferential bending strain


(ε1)

Longitudinal bending strain (ε2)

Extensional strain (ε3)

Strain inside or outside pipe The positive and negative values for Ɛ1 and Ɛ2 must be carried through
for determining the combined strain on inside and outside pipe
surface.

The positive and negative values for Ɛ1 and Ɛ2 must be carried through for determining the combined
strain on inside and outside pipe surface.

t Wall thickness
R0 Initial pipe surface radius
R1 Radius of curvature in transverse plane, negative for re-entrant dents
R2 Radius of curvature in longitudinal plane, negative for re-entrant dents
L Dent length
d Dent depth

474
Radius schema

Workflow
Pipecheck needs to calculate all formulas mentioned above, so all the variables needs to be
determined. Wall thickness (t) and pipe radius (R0) are nominal parameters. The dent depth (d) and
dent length (L) are defined from the Depth-Based Analysis method.
For more information, see Depth-based analysis.
Radius R1 and R2 are extracted from the scan data. Pipecheck uses scan data points on both side of the
maximum depth and best-fits a circle through it. The amount of selected points is determined by a
search distance (distance for curvature computation) that can be set in the parameters. Pipecheck will
select data points on both side of the maximum depth up to the specified distance in the parameters.

Strain color map


Pipecheck uses point-to-point strain values to create a Strain-based color map.

Results

Strain analysis display


Every value under the critical factor will be displayed in green color. If above the critical factor, data are
displayed in warm colors.
A Strain-based color map is created for every strain components. They can be displayed using the
available options in the General Display Options of the Display panel. The selection will change the color
map display in the 3D viewer and the 2D viewer.

475
Color map type Description Example

Deviation from the scan in a


Depth perfect cylinder

Eff. max.
strain

Eff. extern.
strain

Eff. intern.
strain Strain color map representing the
specific component.
Long. bend.
strain

Circ. bend.
strain

Long. extens.
strain

Deviation values from the radius


Axial curv. fit of curvature surface to the scan
point where the strain is
Circ. curv. fit measured.

Display of the strain sections


Strain color map
The 2D viewer displays axial and circumferential strain 2D sections:

Gray curve: Actual 2D shape of the pipe at the selected position.

Red curve: Strain values along the axis (axial or circumferential).

476
Curvature fit color map
The curvature fit color map indicates the areas where the radii of curvature do not fit properly on the
scan data points. It measures the deviation between the radius and the surface point where strain is
measured. Larger deviations indicate that the distances for curvature computation might not be
suitable for these points.

Gray curve: Actual 2D shape of the pipe at the selected position.

Red curve: Deviation between each radius of curvature surface and the scan on an axial section.

Blue circle: Radius of curvature.

A: Deviation measured (B) placed on the nominal axis (white line)

B: Deviation between radius of curvature surface and the scan point where the strain is meas-
ured.

Axial and circumferential search distance


Search distances are critical since it affects the circles radii, thus affecting the strain values. An accurate
fit is necessary. A visual look at the fitted circles is needed to confirm their accuracy. Two different tools
can be used to do so:
Distance for curvature
The selected points on which the circles are fitted are shown as a blue line in the 2D viewer. It also
represents the search distance (distance for curvature computation). The user can look at the search
distance to determine if it is too long or too short. Usually, the selection should stay on a similar
curvature and not be extended beyond the inflection point.

477
Curvature radius
The circles used to determine the longitudinal and circumferential curvature radii can be shown in the
2D viewer. The user can look at the fitted circle by zooming on the pipe. Large search distances will not
fit well the curvature of the dent. Small distances will be to sensible to local noise or deformation on
the dent. The user needs to find the optimal distances in both axis, axial and circumferential.
To zoom on the curvature radius

Mouse control: Use the mouse wheel to zoom on the curvature radius.

Minimize/Maximize: To get a better display resolution, double-click the axial or circumferential


section view or right-click on the axial or circumferential view and select Minimize/Maximize view
function.

50.00 mm 20.00 mm 10.00 mm


Longitudinal bending: 5.23% Longitudinal bending: 12.77% Longitudinal bending: 20.33%
Longitudinal curvature radius: - Longitudinal curvature radius: -
Longitudinal curvature radius: -24.60 mm
95.63 mm 39.15 mm

Bad distance: Distance is too


Bad distance: Distance is too short. It is
large. It does not fit well the Good distance
too sensible to small variations.
bottom of the dent.

Strain analysis detail


Strain analysis details can be found on the left of the screen, below the Depth-Based Analysis details.

478
Dent Apex

Strain values at deepest point

Point-to-point

Maximum strain values found on the pipe

Other tools

Measuring distances
Distances between 2 specific points can be added in both 2D & 3D viewers once the analysis is
performed. The distance is taken on the nominal diameter. These measurements are listed under the
Distances node.

To add a distance

 1. Press and hold Shift.

 2. Click a first point.

 3. Click a second point. To determine the right distance, drag the second point while holding left-
click.

 4. Release the left mouse button to set the second point position.

Snapshots
Snapshots can be added to the report. They store the viewer camera positions and are automatically
updated after any modification. The snapshots are under the Snapshots node.

To add a snapshot

 1. Right-click in the 3D view.

 2. Click Add snapshot.

479
To delete a snapshot

 1. Right-click the specific snapshot in the Snapshots node.

 2. Click Remove.

To set a snapshot to another view

 1. Left-click the specific snapshot in the Snapshots node.

 2. Rotate the 3D view at the desired position.

 3. Right-click the snapshot.

 4. Click Set to current view.

Troubleshooting

Feature too close to the edge


A warning message appears if a deviation exceeding the critical factor is detected on the edges of the
scan while analyzing the entire surface (the analysis of the scanned surface is still carried out). The dent
analysis might not be optimal when:

There is not enough scanned surface on the borders of a dent. Scan the missing parts, par-
ticularly around the damage to avoid points deeper than the critical factor on the edges of the
scan. The damage must be surrounded by green and all the points on the edges of the scan
must be green too.

 1. Points that are deeper than critical

 2. Surface border

 3. Points within the critical factor (green area)

Enough data around the dent:

480
The deformation of the pipe is such that the deviation value of the edges is higher than
the critical factor. The warning message can be ignored since those deeper points are not
linked to a dent. In the example below, although the border of the surface is orange, enough
scanned surface (green) surrounds the dent.

 1. Dent

 2. Surface border (point deeper than the critical


factor)

 3. Dent

 4. Surface border (point deeper than the critical


factor)

 5. Nominal diameter

The Feature too close to the edge message appears when points deeper than the critical factor affect the
borders of the scan (yellow/orange). If they pertain to a defect, extra surface must be scanned around
it. Otherwise the warning message can be ignored.
No warning message will appear if a dent has been assigned by the user, even if the assigned area
does not include the whole dent, or if positive deformations bigger than the critical factor are detected
on the edges of the scan (blue area).

Feature with data exceeding the critical factor


A warning message will appear if:

The scanned surface has no defect bigger than the critical factor (the entire surface becomes
green after analysis) or

A dent is assigned to an undamaged area (the entire assigned area is green after analysis).

In both cases, the analysis will not be possible since a deepest point must be identified. A feature will
be created without any analysis result. No information will be shown in the feature details and no
section will be created at the deepest point.

481
Corrosion Analysis Inside Dents
Corrosion might be found in dents, where a direct pit-gauge measurement cannot be done. In order
to get an accurate analysis, Pipecheck fits a surface on the parent material on the dent and measures
the corrosion pits depth from this surface.

Red line : Corrosion profile in dent.


Black line : Section created from a surface fitted on parent material from the dent.

To analyze corrosion in dents


To analyze corrosion in dents, the user needs to work with both Corrosion and Dent modules. The latest
is required to determine the limits of the dent and corrosion and to fit the surface. Corrosion module is
used to calculate bursting pressures and to display results. Corrosion analysis in dents can be
performed following these steps:

 1. Select the dent area and click Assign dent area .

 2. Select the corroded area and click Force corroded .

482
 3. Click to fit the surface on parent material around the corrosion and look at the fitted
surface in Parent material node.

 4. The surface will be added in the Corrosion module and the analysis can be processed.

Parent material

The Extend Parent Material function will allow to analyze data of non-corroded surface in dents.
This function creates one or many surfaces. The analysis function does not need to be processed prior
to ExExtend Parent Material.

Parent material details and analysis


The scan data used to fit a surface is taken beside the corroded area only. From the user corrosion
selection, Pipecheck creates a square selection grown by about 50%. The software uses this selection
only (except the corroded area) to fit a surface. Most of the time, the fitted surface is smaller than the
dent area. The dent area outside of the fitted surface will not be analyzed in the Corrosion module.

 1. Parent material selection inside dent: Used to fit the surface.

 2. Corroded area inside dent: Not used to fit the surface .

483
 3. Surface analyzed in the Corrosion module

 4. Surface that is not analyzed in the Corrosion module..

An analysis of the fitted surface can be done by looking at the deviations from the data. The Parent
material node needs to be extended and a surface selected to look at the details.
When selected, the deviation color map is displayed in 3D viewer, to show how accurately the surface
was fitted. In the details it is also written from which dent feature this surface comes from.
Pipecheck automatically uses the maximum or minimum deviations of the surface from the data to set
the maximum (blue) and minimum (red) tolerances.
The color map can also be edited, either by typing a numerical value, or by dragging the two white
lines. The surface in the 3D viewer will be automatically updated. A symmetric color map can be used, or
it can be deactivated when the box is unchecked.

To remove a surface
To remove a surface, remove the dent area or deselect the corroded area.
If the Extend Parent Material function is used, the analysis will change. The corrosion depth will be
separated from the dent and excluded from the analysis. The dent depth will stop at the fitted surface.
This is shown when looking at the deviation vectors on sections in the 2D viewer.
Corrosion is excluded from the dent depth:

Risks and limitations


Extending the parent material works very well on single and small corroded areas, since the software
has enough parent material around the corrosion. It is important not to select too much parent
material when defining the area as corroded to make sure the software uses it to fit the surface.
If the corrosion is too large, it might be hard to determine the real curvature radius of the dent where
the corrosion is located. Moreover, the surface created might not be accurate.

484
Example Fit Status Tips
Keep as much
parent material
Accurate, since the corrosion is
when defining
small compared to the dent size
the corroded
area.
Make sure not to
include the
parent material
Might not be accurate if the
between
selection in not optimal
corrosion pits in
the corroded
area.
Corrosion area is
very large
compared to the
Will not be accurate
dent size. The
fitted surface will
not be accurate.

485
Export CSV
Some users may be interested in exporting the deviation measured on each quad of the analysis grid
for a particular area of the pipe to perform further analysis such as strain-based dent analysis.

Export CSV
It is possible to export the deviation values for:

All pipe

All features

Selected feature (s)

All sections

Selected sections

To export deviation values

 1. Right-click one or several features or sections in the Features node.

 2. Select the required values to export. It is possible to export more than one value at a time.

The values will be exported in a table (.csv file) of the same size and shape as the analysis grid for the
selected area, where:

The columns represent the axial position (s).

The rows represent the circumferential position (s).

The difference between two positions, either axial or circumferential, is equal to the scan res-
olution defined in the Scan parameters (size of the grid squares).

The .csv file can be easily viewed in an Excel worksheet.

CSV advanced export

486
This tool allows defining the exact positions of the desired values to be exported instead of using the
default grid. Because the default grid corresponds to the scan resolution, a lot of data is being
exported in an extensive table, while axial and circumferential positions include up to four decimals.
Use the Advanced export to avoid such a table.

To export an advanced CSV report

 1. Right-click the feature.

 2. In the Surface to export drop-down list of the CSV report panel, select Advanced export option.

The CSV export in Dent module works differently than the Corrosion module. It
does not export the deepest point of a grid based on the specified resolution, but
exports the deviation at the grid corner.

Default grid:

The Advanced export tool enables customizing the size of the export grid by determining the range of
both axial and circumferential positions from which we want to export data, as well as defining their
position interval.

Advanced export grid:

487
ILI Correlation
The ILI correlation tool allows correlating in-line inspection data with 3D scanning inspection data
provided by Pipecheck. The user interface has been optimized to compare depths, lengths, widths and
burst pressures.
To properly assess the performances of the ILI tool, operators need to carry out statistically-significant
population analyzes with a device offering better accuracy than magnetic-flux leakage (MFL)
technology. The HandySCAN 3D scanners quickly capture metal-loss and damaged areas, and help
building a larger and acceptable population for statistical analysis.
Operators can assess ILI performances by comparing pig data against Pipecheck data to determine
with more precision the sites that actually need to be dug.

ILI data import

 1. Click on Import | Import ILI in the toolbar to import ILI data.

 2. Select a saved format or define a new one.

 3. Remove the header lines at the beginning of the CSV file by selecting the row at which data
import should start (Start import at row).

Example with data import starting at row 3 (the first two rows have been grayed out):

 4. Choose the Column delimiter of the CSV format (dot, semicolon or tab).

488
The delimiters will follow your Windows number format settings.

If you are experiencing some problems finding a delimiter, you may need to
change your Windows format settings or to save the file in Excel to apply your own
number format.

 5. Assign the columns to their respective field and select the right unit for each field; specify if the
data was measured from the corner or the center. Fields marked with an asterisk (*) are
mandatory.

 6. Make sure to enter the appropriate reference position of the ILI feature.

 1. Axial position taken at

 2. Circ. position taken at

 3. Top

 4. Center

 5. Bottom

 6. Left

 7. Center

 8. Right

 7. Click Save format button to name the format.

Once imported, the ILI data will show up as magenta boxes in the 3D viewer.

The ILI features will automatically be assigned to the corresponding features in the Features node,
based on the Minimum overlap for correlation value set through Common parameters | ILI Features.
Manual ILI offsets: To manually adjust the ILI features to match the features.

489
Hide features outside scan: Select to hide ILI features outside of the scan range.

If the offset is too far from the arrow origin, specify the reference position in
Parameters | Common | General.

Add ILI connection: Right-click on a feature in the Features node and select this option to select an
ILI feature that should be in connection with the selected feature (this will bypass the Minimum overlap
for connection).

Imported ILI features can be renamed by left-clicking on them twice in the


Features node (with a pause between each click).

Options available by right-clicking on an ILI feature

 1. Remove connection allows removing an ILI feature from an association with a Pipecheck feature.
The selected ILI feature will not be permanently deleted as it will remain listed under the ILI
Features node in the Navigation panel.

 2. Remove selected ILI features allows definitely removing an ILI feature from the ILI Features node
and the Pipecheck feature it may be connected to.

 3. Remove all ILI features allows permanently removing all the ILI features that have been imported
in the session.

If imported, ILI features are not filtered and contain both Clusters and DMA (Detected Metal Anomalies),
they can be classified in Pipecheck by assigning which features are clusters using a right-click.
Choosing Use only clusters in Parameters | Common | ILI Features will associate only assigned clusters
with Pipecheck features and will ignore the other ILI features for the analysis.

ILI clustering
ILI features can be grouped into clusters for more realistic unity chart. Pipecheck features are individual
corrosion pits grouped together based on specific interaction rules. ILI features might be individual
corrosion pits so grouping them into clusters will be essential for an optimal analysis.

To group ILI features into cluster

 1. Select the ILI features in the navigation panel

 2. Right-click on the highlighted features and select Cluster selected features

Reporting
Once the ILI data has been imported, the report includes a section named ILI Features.

Overview
Overview of the ILI features imported on the features and the information regarding their offsets.

490
In the Tool performances section of the report, the black line represents a perfect correlation between
Pipecheck features and ILI data for four figures (axial length, circumferential length, maximum depth
and effective area). Based on the Use envelope option available in Common parameters (Report - ILI
Features tab), an envelope represented by the dashed red lines (here set at 80 % of the points, which is
the default value) includes the percentage of the selected points.
The listed Outliers represent the points which are located outside the envelope (in the figures below,
outliers are the remaining 20 % of the points).

491
Matched features
The table of matched features includes information on the difference in position, length, depth, area
and pressure for each feature. Also, a table of unmatched ILI features, which did not fit your Minimum
overlap for connection, is displayed.

492
493
Reporting

A report of the analysis results (Excel file or CSV format) can be generated.

Corrosion analysis report

The results of a corrosion analysis are exported in an Excel worksheet.

Overview

Logo (selected in the Common parameters- Report - Include tab).

2D view of the scanned surface.

Project information.

Analysis and Sflow parameters.

Table summarizing the main properties of the features (selected in the Corrosion parameters -
Report - Overview tab).

494
Features
Each feature is detailed on one page.

Analysis results table (select the properties to show in this table in the Report-Features tab of the
Parameters dialog).

495
2D view of the feature, including the River bottom path (RBP).

Graph of the Worst Case Profile . In the Corrosion module, the graph includes a red line rep-
resents the Effective length (used to determine the burst pressure with the Effective Area stand-
ard).

Table listing the following characteristics of each point of the Worst Case Profile:

Axial and circumferential position.

Depth (length and percentage of wall thickness).

Remaining Wall Thickness (RWT, wall thickness length and percentage).

Worst Case Profile values


Worst case profile values are listed based on the Worst Case Profile resolution. The lines contained in the
Effective length are displayed in red.

496
ILI features
See the ILI Correlation section.

Signature

The disclaimer defined in the Common Parameters - Report - Include tab.

The name and signature of both reporter and reviewer.

497
 

Dent analysis report

The dent analysis results are exported in an Excel worksheet.

Overview

Logo (selected in the Common parameters- Report - Include tab).

A 2D view of the pipe:

Difference map of the scanned surface.

Axial and circumferential section views at the deepest point.

498
General information and inspection parameters:

Project information.

Scanning parameters.

Dent parameters.

499
Deepest point on pipe:

Axial and circumferential position of the deepest point of the pipe.

Axial and circumferential straight-edge depth of the deepest point of the pipe.

The values are for the deepest point of the whole pipe. The information on the deepest point of each
individual feature is included in the Feature pages of the report.

Point to point maximum strain

Features
Each feature is detailed on one page.

2D view of the feature

Difference map.

500
Axial and circumferential section views at the deepest point.

Feature dimensions

Feature size and position:

Axial and circumferential starting position of the feature (top left corner).

Axial and circumferential ending position of the feature (bottom right corner).

Axial and circumferential length of the feature.

Deepest point position:

Axial and circumferential position of the deepest point of the feature.

501
Depths: Radius measurements at deepest point

Radius calculation:

Minimum and maximum radius.

Minimum and maximum radius ratio to nominal.

Maximum radius position:

Axial and circumferential position of maximum radius.

502
Depths: Straight edge measurements at deepest point

Axial and circumferential straight edge depth.

Diameters with caliper

Diameter at deepest point.

Diameter at 90° of deepest point.

Maximum diameter on all scanned data.

Axial and circumferential position of maximum diameter.

Strain-based analysis results

Definitions
Measurements presented on each Feature page:

503
Axial and circumferential sections

504
When exporting a report, you can specify which sections to include:

All axial and circumferential sections created in the current session.

Only the axial and circumferential sections at the deepest point and circumferential at shoulders
of each feature.

Only the axial and circumferential sections selected.

Axial sections
Axial sections exported in the report are presented in the axial sections page. For each axial section,
the following information is shown:

 1. Name of the section.

Sections created by default at the deepest point of a feature are named Deepest Point and sections
created manually are named by their circumferential position.

 2. Depths: Radius measurements (at deepest point).

Minimum and maximum radius.

Axial position of minimum and maximum radius.

Minimum and maximum radius ratio to nominal.

Maximum depth.

 3. Depths: Straight edge measurements (at deepest point).

Axial straight edge depth.

 4. Cross-section view.

Representation of the axial section, including a Difference map of the depth variation.

505
 

506
Circumferential sections
The circumferential sections that have been selected to be exported in the report are presented in cir-
cumferential sections. For each circumferential section, the following information is shown (see
Shoulders section in the Analysis tab of the Dent parameters):

 1. Name of the section

Sections created by default at the deepest point of a feature are called Deepest Pointwhile sections
created manually are named by their axial position.

 2. Depths: Radius measurements at deepest point.

Minimum and maximum radius.

Circumferential position of the minimum and maximum radius.

Minimum and maximum radius ratio to nominal.

Maximum depth.

 3. Depths: Straight edge measurements at deepest point.

Circumferential straight edge depth.

507
 4. Diameters with caliper (360° scan required).

Diameter at deepest point.

Diameter at 90° of deepest point.

Maximum diameter.

Circumferential position of maximum diameter.

 5. Cross-section view.

Representation of the circumferential section and the Straight-edge tool.

508
Strain-based analysis
A tab is created for each Effective strain components:

Longitudinal bending strain.

Longitudinal extensional strain.

Circumferential extensional strain.

Effective internal strain.

Effective external strain.

Effective maximal strain.

Each tab displays :

2D strain-color map view including Axial and Circumferential sections.

Strain value.

Position.

509
ILI features
See the ILI Correlation section.

Signature
This page includes:

The disclaimer defined in the Report - Include tab of the Parameters dialog.

The name and signature of the reporter and reviewer .

510
511
Troubleshooting
This section provides solutions to common error and warning messages encountered in Pipecheck.
When an error or warning message in encountered, the 2D viewer will highlight the areas related to
the issue. The message window needs to be opened.

Global warning messages

In the Guided analysis mode, the error messages are displayed in the feature
annotation.

Pipecheck will show some warning messages in case of issue which affects the whole analysis. For
instance, if Pipecheck finds that the pit-gauge sits in corrosion, it will try to add some extensions
automatically. If that cannot be done because the user limited the number of extensions that can be
added, Pipecheck will prompt an error message telling that the pit gauge length is too small.
To display the concerned areas :

 1. Do not close the error message.

 2. Click on the 2D viewer.

 3. The highlighted colors display the concerned areas.

Specific warning messages


When an error message appears in a precise annotation, left click on the warning message to get a
similar display of the possible error.

Memory related error messages


Located at the bottom right side of the screen, the memory allocation status bars display the use of
random access memory (RAM) and graphics processing unit (GPU). During scanning, try to maintain

512
the GPU use under 70 %, as subsequent processing steps require additional memory usage.
As explained in the System Requirements, due to some constraints in Windows, there is a limit to the
amount of memory that can be allocated to a single program. If the limit exceeds, the software will
display an error message.

Error message Solution


A GPU error occurred. Surface could not
be reconstructed but scan data has not Save the session. Close the software and reopen the session to
been lost. Save the session and reopen it recover scan data.
to recover data.

Critical GPU memory. Surface could not be  1. Select and delete unwanted areas of the scan to free
reconstructed but scan data has not been up memory to continue scanning with the current
lost. Stop the scan and decrease the
surface resolution and apply to recover resolution.
data.
 2. If the first solution does not work, decrease
Out of GPU memory. Surface could not be resolution (i.e. increase triangle size value) under the
reconstructed but scan data has not been Scan Parameters. Select and delete unwanted areas of
lost. Stop the scan and decrease the
surface resolution and apply to recover the scan. Increase resolution (i.e. decrease triangle
data. size value) to the original value.

Error messages
Appear when a particular setting prevents analysis to function properly.
Category Error Message Explanation Solution
Installation A component is missing for this The scanner module required to use the Launch the
file: [serial number] *.cst. Pleasescanner activated in the Product Manager is software installer
reinstall your application with not installed on the computer. and add the CD
support for this sensor model. key of the
scanner you plan
to use.
Parameters Incorrect diameter (Event ID #1). The diameter calculated from the scanned Adjust the value
surface is significantly different from the entered for the
nominal diameter entered in the analysis pipe diameter in
parameters. the Parameters
dialog. Scan a
larger area to get
better diameter
estimation. Verify
that the scanned
area does not
include welds or
extrusions.
Parameters Parameters must be greater than 0. Some of the parameters entered by the user Adjust the
must be greater than 0 for the analysis to be parameters
possible. entered in the
Parameters
dialog.

513
Category Error Message Explanation Solution
Parameters Resolution must be set to a value This is the lowest available value for the scan Adjust the value
(scan) greater than or equal to 0.20 mm resolution. entered for the
(0.008 in). scan resolution
in the Scan
Parameters. If
you own an
Pipecheck , use
the High
Resolution
function to
improve the
resolution (4x).
Corrosion The threshold value for the The Threshold for corroded area cannot be Adjust the value
analysis corroded area must be inferior to bigger than the critical factor.  entered for the
the critical factor. Threshold for
corroded area
and the critical
factor.
General The current operation must be This problem rarely occurs, most of the time In Scan Module,
stopped because an internal error because the software lost the connection go to Scan |
has occurred. with the scanner while scanning. Scanner | Test to
get more
information on
the problem.
Verify that the
scanner is well
connected to the
computer.
General An unknown error has occurred in This problem can come from different Click Save Error
Pipecheck. sources and occurs rarely. Report and send
it to Pipecheck
Technical
Support. Click
Continue to save
your session.

Warning messages
Appear to advise the use of a non-recommended setting. The analysis can still be run if you choose to
continue with these settings.
Category Warning Message Explanation Solution
Parameters Scan resolution has changed. Click The scan resolution can be changed before
Approve or
(scan) OK to reconstruct surface. Click or after scanning the pipe. If changed after,
cancel the
Cancel to revert to previous scan the surface must be reconstructed using the
resolution
resolution. new resolution. Analysis results will be lost.
change.
Parameters Pit gauge length too small Some areas of the pipe could not be Increase the
(corrosion) (Event ID #1004).  measured because the maximum pit gaugemaximum
length is too small (see Pit Gauge). extension count
in the Pit Gauge
There are too many excluded areas and parameters
no extension can be used over the tab. Redefine the
corroded area. excluded areas. 

514
Category Warning Message Explanation Solution
Parameters Pit gauge length too small for Some area of a manually forced corroded Increase the
(corrosion) forced corroded area area could not be measured because the
maximum
(Event ID #1001). maximum pit gauge length is too small.
extension
Some excluded areas are preventing
count in the Pit
the use of extensions over the force
Gauge
corroded area.
parameters
tab.
Reduce the
length of the
forced
corroded area.
Redefine the
excluded areas.
Parameters Some areas could not be measured Some regions of a manually forced corroded Increase the
(corrosion) (Event ID #1002).  area could not be measured by the pit gauge
maximum
because no none-corroded areas have been
found to sit the pit gauge. extension
count in the Pit
Gauge
parameters
tab.
Redefine the
forced
corroded area.
Parameters Pit gauge was extended across Additional extensions have been added to Same as for
(corrosion) forced corroded area (Event ID the pit gauge to cover the entire forced warning #1001.
#1003). corroded area (shown in red in the 2D
viewer)
Parameters Some areas could not be measured Some areas could not be measured by the Redefine the
(corrosion) (Event ID #1005).  pit gauge because a convex area was found forced corroded
inside the manually forced corroded area. area.
Scan Not enough valid points for The scan does not contain enough valid Scan a larger
(corrosion) analysis (Event ID #1006). points to use the pit gauge. The corrosion surface of the
analysis cannot be completed. pipe before
trying a new
analysis.
Scan Section cannot be analyzed (Event Some excluded areas are too close to each Redefine the
(corrosion) ID #1010). other and the pit gauge does not fit between excluded areas.
them.

515
Category Warning Message Explanation Solution
Scan (dent) Feature too close to the edge The software has identified an area that is Verify the edges
(Event ID #2001). deeper than the critical factor diameter and of the scan. If a
located on the edge of the scanned surface. dent has not
been completely
scanned, the
analysis results
could be
affected.
Complete the
scan if required.
If the identified
area does not
belong to the
dents you want
to analyze, you
can ignore the
warning.
Scan (dent) Feature has no data exceeding The analyzed area has no data exceeding the Change the value
Critical Factor Critical factor. It is therefore impossible to of the Critical
(Event ID #2002). perform a dent analysis. factor. Verify the
area selected
with the Assign
Dent Area
function.
Analysis (dent) No critical data found (Event ID No point on the surface has a deviation Change the
#2004). exceeding the critical factor. critical factor to a
lower value.
Installation Scanner module discarded (Event If you open a session created with a scanner Launch the
ID #3001).  package that is not installed on the software installer
computer, it will be discarded from the and add the CD
session. You will not be allowed to scan, but key of the
you will be able to run an analysis and scanner used
export results. when creating
the session.
Installation Analysis discarded when opening The session was saved with a different Save the
session file version of Pipecheck. The analysis will be
session with
(Event ID #3002). discarded, but can be launched again. No
acquired data will be lost. the latest
version of
Pipecheck.
Run a new
analysis.

516
Go!SCAN SPARK

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of


or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

CAUTION: Some people may experience a seizure when exposed to certain visual
images, including flashing lights or patterns. These seizures may include
symptoms such as lightheadedness, altered vision, eye or face twitching, jerking
or shaking of arms or legs, disorientation, confusion, or momentary loss of
awareness. Immediately stop using the scanner and consult a doctor if you
experience any of these symptoms while using this product.

517
Go!SCAN SPARK Hardware and
Components
Hardware

518
 

 1. USB key (license and calibration files)

 2. Power supply

 3. USB 3.0 cable

 4. Positioning targets

 5. Go!SCAN SPARK

 6. User calibration plate*

 7. Calibration certificate*

*The user calibration plate and the calibration certificate are located under the foam insert in the
protective case.
 

519
Components

 1. Geometry tracking camera

 2. White light projector

 3. Color camera

 4. Hand strap

520
Go!SCAN SPARK Multifunction Buttons
The scanner comprises a set of 3 buttons on each side. Either set can be used to access functions in
scan mode and out of scan mode. Buttons 1 and 2 are used to adjust zoom. Button 3 (trigger) is used
to accept a function or message.

Scanner status light colors

Color Scanner status


  recording
  ready for acquisition
  connected

 
Go!SCAN SPARK

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click


1 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in Toggle Fit to screen / Reset viewpoint
2 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out Toggle Lock / Unlock viewpoint
3 Trigger - Start or Exit scan mode -

521
 
Go!SCAN SPARK during acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click


1 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in Toggle Fit to screen / Reset viewpoint
2 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out Toggle Lock / Unlock viewpoint
Start or Stop
3 Trigger Stop scan mode -
projector

522
Go!SCAN SPARK Operating Principles
Quick scan

The Quick scan is meant for short scan of 180 degrees or less over a maximum length of 3-4 feet. It uses
a combination of texture, geometry and targets to track on the pipe. A scan using only the Pipecheck
arrow can be done, depending on the damage or the surface.

Standard scan

The Standard scan is meant for longer scan of 360 degrees. At least 2 targets are required to be seen by
the scanner at any given time.
It is also possible to use a Target only option. This option is mainly used for large diameter pipes and
requires at least 4 targets to be seen.

Since the Go!SCAN SPARK uses white structured light, it cannot scan in direct
sunlight.

523
Go!SCAN SPARK Connection
The scanner must be connected according to the following procedure to guarantee its physical
integrity and to avoid damaging any device.

Connection steps

 1. Plug the power supply cable to an electric source.

 2. Connect the power supply cable to the USB 3.0 cable.

 3. Connect the USB 3.0 cable to the computer.

 4. Connect the other extremity of the USB 3.0 cable into the scanner.

524
 5. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

To disconnect the scanner, first unplug the power and the USB cables from the
scanner, afterward the sequence is up to the user.

It is recommended to use the cable computer


support to prevent any disconnection issues
caused by yanking the cable.
Connect the support to the Ethernet port and
loop the USB cable before plugging it in.

525
Go!SCAN SPARK Calibration
Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to
the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An
annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The
calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to
fourteen (14) positions as indicated by the shadow of the scanner in the 3D viewer.

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets of the user calibration
plate.

The calibration file is stored on the scanner. If the calibration file is newer on the
scanner, upon starting a new scan session, it will prompt a message to update the
calibration file. Click Update to replace the calibration file in the Product Manager
by the file on the scanner. Best practice suggests to calibrate whenever
environment conditions change, even if the update has been processed.

To optimize the scanner calibration

 1. Click in the System panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration. Alternatively, use the Smart Control to launch calibration.

 2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter. Position the scanner at approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

 3. Press the trigger button to start.

 4. Aim at the center of the target pattern and normal to the plate. Slowly move the scanner away
from the plate, matching the scanner shadow in the 3D viewer. Once 10 measurements are
taken, take 4 measurements at an angle from the plate by slightly tilting the scanner towards
the right, left, top and bottom of the plate.

 5. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

526
Best practice suggests to perform calibration with the plate inside the case.

 
If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decalibrated
scanner:

Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, please contact Creaform Technical Support for further assistance.

If user wants to review previous calibration results or when the last calibration
was performed, a calibration journal is available through Configure | Calibration
journal | Visualize.

Restore to the factory settings


It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

527
Go!SCAN SPARK Configuration
Automatic shutter
Since reflection properties differ from a surface to another, the Automatic shutter option allows the
scanner to automatically adjust its camera shutter speed while scanning for better surface detection. It
works well if the light pattern is entirely contained within the object, otherwise it can be used as an
initial approximation tool.

528
Go!SCAN SPARK Object Preparation
In order to provide better scan results, the object to scan must be prepared following some simple
steps. Go!SCAN SPARK is an intelligent scanner self-positioning itself based on the object geometry.
No positioning targets are required for the object featuring sufficient geometry information. In the
case of flat or shiny surfaces, positioning targets will provide better scan results.

Instructions:
The object must be clean and free of dirt.

In the case of a shiny surface, first add powder to the object.

For both powdered and flat surface objects lacking geometry, apply positioning targets with a
distance of 100 mm to 200 mm from each other.

For flat surfaces, make sure to have at least 3 targets within the projection of the light stripe pat-
tern.

The use of a turntable can be useful to scan as it allows rotating the object. For
better scan results, apply positioning targets around the object.

529
Go!SCAN SPARK Acquisition Rules
Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow the scanner stand-off distance indicated below.

Distance meter
While digitizing, the white light stripes projected on the object are displayed in different colors to
indicate the distance between the scanner and the surface of the object. Targets placed on the object
or the environment also act as distance meters (white targets are not detected). This feature can be
deactivated in the Display panel under General Display. Distance will then be indicated by a on the left
side of the screen.

Target or light stripes colors


Color Scanner position Action
  too close move backward
  correct -
  too far move forward

LEDs on the sides of the scanner also indicate the distance from the object.

530
Scanner sides LEDs colors
Color Scanner position Action
    too close move backward

  correct -

    too far move forward

 
The scanner loses tracking when too close or too far from the object. An audible warning option can
be activated to alert the user when tracking is lost. If tracking is lost, we recommend repositioning the
scanner in front of a previously scanned surface and pressing the trigger again, or, if using targets,
redistributing them differently.

Field of view
The Field of View is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner field of view will not be acquired. The scanner field of view goes from 25 to 70 cm (~10 to
28 in).
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected (~40 cm).

531
HandySCAN 3D Product Family

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of


or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

 
The HandySCAN 3D portable laser scanners use triangulation and binocular vision. The scanner self-
positions itself to a unique dynamic referencing system which ensures high measurement repeatability
and accuracy. The resulting 3D scan is perfectly scaled to be representative of the real geometry and
allows easy visualization of surface defects.
 

HandySCAN BLACK | Elite HandySCAN BLACK

HandySCAN 307

532
Previous Generation

HandySCAN 700 HandySCAN 300

533
HandySCAN BLACK

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of


or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

HandySCAN BLACK | Elite HandySCAN BLACK

534
HandySCAN BLACK Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product.

Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the beam (direct
or reflected) can damage the retina.

Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

The use of controls, adjustments or procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire user manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.
 

Laser labels

HandySCAN BLACK

The laser label reads:


VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 78 mW / < 2.57 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 2.9
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

535
HandySCAN BLACK | Elite

The laser label reads:


VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 123 mW / < 4.06 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 2.9
Laser 3: 450nm / avg < 20 mW / < 0.32 mJ
8.5 ms / 62.5 Hz max / C6: 3.7
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

536
HandySCAN BLACK Hardware and
Components
Hardware

537
 1. USB key (license and calibration files)

 2. Power supply

 3. USB 3.0 cable

 4. Positioning targets

 5. HandySCAN BLACK

 6. User calibration plate*

 7. Target scraper (to remove targets)

 8. Calibration certificate*

*The user calibration plate and the calibration certificate are located under the foam insert in the
protective case.
 

538
Components

 1. Blue LEDs

 2. Camera

 3. Laser

539
HandySCAN BLACK Multifunction Buttons
The scanner comprises buttons having different functions in scan mode and out of scan mode. The
trigger button is the central button used to accept a function or message. Its main function is to start,
pause, or stopstart, pause, or stop the acquisition process. It is also used to toggle between the single
laser line mode and laser cross mode (option only available with HandySCAN BLACK | Elite). Buttons 2
to 5 are used to adjust zoom and shutter and to navigate in the Smart Control.

Trigger button [1] light colors


Color Scanner status
  recording
  connected
  ready for acquisition

540
HandySCAN BLACK
Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click
1 Trigger - Open or Exit scan mode -
Toggle Fit to screen / Reset
2 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
viewpoint
3 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out Toggle Lock / Unlock viewpoint
Shutter Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
4 -
speed speed decrease
Shutter Fast shutter speed
5 Increase shutter speed -
speed increase
Smart Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
6* -
Control mode mode

* Only available in the Classic mode.

HandySCAN BLACK during acquisition


Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click
1 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Exit scan mode Toggle Laser cross / Single line*
Toggle Fit to screen / Reset
2 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
viewpoint
3 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out Toggle Lock / Unlock viewpoint
Shutter Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
4 -
speed speed decrease
Shutter Fast shutter speed
5 Increase shutter speed -
speed increase
Smart Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
6* -
Control mode mode

* Only available in the Classic mode.

* This feature is only available with HandySCAN BLACK | Elite.

541
HandySCAN BLACK Operating Principles
Self-positioning 3D laser scanner
The scanner does not require any external positioning system, since the part positioning is determined
by triangulation (in real time). The triangulation feature provides the scanner position in volume and
space.
The reference is related to the object, on which positioning targets are fixed. It is possible to move the
object during data acquisition.

Surface acquisition: real-time surface rendering


The surface generation is automatic. The laser projected on the object is deformed depending of its
shape. While scanning, the cameras record the shape and proceed to calculation.

542
HandySCAN BLACK Connection
The scanner must be connected according to the following procedure to guarantee its physical
integrity and to avoid damaging any device.

Connection steps

 1. Plug the power supply cable to an electric source.

 2. Connect the power supply cable to the USB 3.0 cable.

 3. Connect the USB 3.0 cable to the computer.

 4. Connect the other extremity of the USB 3.0 cable into the scanner.

543
 5. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

To disconnect the scanner, first unplug the power and the USB cables from the
scanner, afterward the sequence is up to the user.

It is recommended to use the cable computer


support to prevent any disconnection issues
caused by yanking the cable.
Connect the support to the Ethernet port and
loop the USB cable before plugging it in.

544
HandySCAN BLACK Calibration
Acceptance Test
As specified in the ISO 10360 standard, Creaform performs an acceptance test before the delivery of the system
to certify that it meets the specifications. Creaform does not guarantee the performance of its equipment out-
side the scope and timing of the aforementioned test since the equipment is outside its control or supervision.
Reverification Test
In order to validate that the system complies with specified requirements, ISO 10360 standard recommends to
perform a reverification test periodically. Customer has the responsibility to determine the frequency of this test.
Creaform recommends, as a starting point, to perform this reverification annually.
Interim Check
The ISO 10360 standard recommends to perform an interim check between periodic verifications to demonstrate
the probability that the system complies with specified requirements. The customer must take into account the
interim check results to assess if a reverification test needs to be executed at one of the Creaform service cen-
ters.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to
the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An
annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The
calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to
fifteen (15) positions as indicated by the shadow of the scanner in the 3D viewer.

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets of the user calibration
plate.

The calibration file is stored on the scanner. If the calibration file is newer on the
scanner, upon starting a new scan session, it will prompt a message to update the
calibration file. Click Update to replace the calibration file in the Product Manager
by the file on the scanner. Best practice suggests to calibrate whenever
environment conditions change, even if the update has been processed.

To optimize the scanner calibration

 1. Click .

 2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter. Position the scanner at approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

 3. Press the trigger button to start.

 4. Aim at the bar code for the first measurement, then at the center of the target pattern and
normal to the plate. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the scanner

545
shadow in the 3D viewer. Once eleven (11) measurements are taken, take 4 measurements at an
angle from the plate by slightly tilting the scanner towards the right, left, top and bottom of the
plate.

 5. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests to perform calibration with the plate inside the case.

It is possible to scan under sunlight but calibration might not be possible to


complete under direct sunlight as it can create expansion of the plate. Use a
canopy for faster calibration.

546
Expected results
According to the scanner used, the calibration value should be below:

0.043 mm (HandySCAN BLACK)

0.035 mm (HandySCAN BLACK | Elite)

This value can be defined as the RMS error of the targets position. It represents the scanner stability
over time and should not vary by much. A higher value cannot be directly linked to a less accurate unit,
as long as it is within the limit value. The limit value is calculated based on the volumetric accuracy spe-
cification using the user calibration plate diagonal length.

If the value obtained is above said values, it is recommended to recalibrate the


scanner. If the value is still above, contact Creaform Technical Support for further
investigation.

 
If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decalibrated
scanner:

Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, please contact CreaformTechnical Support for further assistance.

547
Restore to the factory settings
It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

548
HandySCAN BLACK Configuration
To configure the scanner

 1. Click .

 2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the
trigger button.

A distance meter [1] on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between the
scanner and the object.

 3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

 a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the System panel so the laser
grid pattern [2] is as yellow as possible.

 b. For parts having a uniform color/texture, click the Auto. adjust button and hold the
scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing Parameters message
disappears.

Laser lines must lie only on the part surface. If the part is smaller
than the laser grid pattern size, the slider Scanning area % can be
used to reduce the size of the pattern.

549
Distance meter [1] colors

Colors Scanner position Action


    too close move backward
  correct -

    too far move forward

Laser grid pattern [2] colors

Color Status

The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras. There
underexposed is not enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a
mesh.

The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface calculation is done
optimal
under ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser
saturated lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface
reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise in the data.

Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the con-
figuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The cameras shutter time
according to the surface type should be set before scanning. Configuration parameters can
be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition process, through the System
panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the Smart Control.
Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

Right-click in the grey window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

Click the Save preset link.

To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

To activate a preset: Click the preset.

To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.15 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surfaces. Even darker
surfaces can be acquired with the default value.

550
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests to set
the shutter time value based on the surface color and finish, otherwise the scanning results will be
affected. We recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi-shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change
the shutter value, and finish the scan.

551
HandySCAN BLACK Object Preparation
Positioning target application and distribution

Each object must be prepared prior to scanning. Reflective targets must be affixed randomly with a
minimum distance of 20 mm (0.75 in) between them. For low curvature surfaces, the distance between
each target can reach 100 mm (4 in). Targets enable the system to position itself in space and must be
applied on flat surfaces, keeping at least 3 mm from the edges on every side.

Example of proper and improper target distribution

Highly reflective or transparent objects

In the rare cases where the data acquisition is not optimal, such as with transparent objects or highly
reflective surface finishes, the object can be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.
 

Small surfaces

It may be harder to achieve proper target distribution on small surfaces or objects. It is recommended
to distribute targets on a surface (preferably black or dark and matte) and to place the object on this
surface. While scanning, the object and its environment should not move relative to one another.

552
HandySCAN BLACK Acquisition Rules
Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow the scanner stand-off distance indicated below.

Distance meter
While digitizing, the laser lines projected on the object are displayed in different colors to indicate the
distance between the scanner and the surface of the object. Targets placed on the object or the
environment also act as distance meters (white targets are not detected). This feature can be
deactivated in the Display panel under General Display. Distance will then be indicated by a meter on the
left side of the screen.

Target or laser line colors


Color Scanner position Action
  too close move backward
  correct -
  too far move forward

In Scan positioning targets mode, the distance meter is based on the average of the
distance between the scanner and the targets.

In Scan surface mode, the laser lines distance meter is based on the average of the
distance between the scanner and the surface.

LEDs on top of the scanner also indicate the distance from the object.

553
Scanner LEDs colors
Color Scanner position Action
    too close move backward
  correct -

    too far move forward


 
The scanner loses tracking when too close or too far from the object. An audible warning option can
be activated to alert the user when tracking is lost. If tracking is lost, we recommend repositioning the
scanner in front of a previously scanned surface and pressing the trigger again, or redistributing
targets differently.

554
Field of view
The Field of View is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner field of view will not be acquired.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected (~30 cm).

Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
The scanner should be positioned with respect to the part so that both cameras detect the same
portions of the laser grid pattern. Thus, scanning from a corner of a part with each camera pointing to
a different side of the part is not recommended.

555
Single laser line mode
In this mode, to capture data, the laser line does not have to be detected by both cameras. This mode
allows capturing deeper data than laser cross mode. The single line mode is available only with the
HandySCAN BLACK | Elite.

556
HandySCAN 307

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of


or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

 
The HandySCAN 3D portable laser scanners use triangulation and binocular vision. The HandySCAN 3D
scanner self-positions itself to a unique dynamic referencing system which ensures high measurement
repeatability and accuracy. The resulting 3D scan is perfectly scaled to be representative of the real
geometry and allows easy visualization of surface defects.
 

HandySCAN 307

557
Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product.

Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the beam (direct
or reflected) can damage the retina.

Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

The use of controls, adjustments or procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire user manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.
 
 

Laser labels

The laser label reads:


LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
IEC 60825-1:2007
<1 mW 400-700nm
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

558
HandySCAN 307 Hardware and
Components
Hardware

559
 1. Software installer

 2. Power supply

 3. USB 3.0 cable

 4. Positioning targets

 5. HandySCAN 3D

 6. User calibration plate

 7. Target scraper (to remove targets)

Components

 1. Red LEDs

 2. Camera

560
 3. Laser

 4. Camera

561
HandySCAN 307 Multifunction Buttons

HandySCAN 307

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click


Toggle Shutter speed /
1 Menu - -
Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode
Shutter speed mode Fast shutter speed
2 Increase shutter speed -
(+) increase
Toggle Fit to screen / Reset
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
viewpoint
Shutter speed mode Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
(-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
4 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Open or Exit scan mode -

562
HandySCAN 307 Operating Principles
Self-positioning 3D laser scanner
The HandySCAN 3D scanner does not require any external positioning system, since the part
positioning is determined by triangulation (in real time). The triangulation feature provides the scanner
position in volume and space.
The reference is related to the object, on which positioning targets are fixed. It is possible to move the
object during data acquisition.

Surface acquisition: real-time surface rendering


The surface generation is automatic. The laser projected on the object is deformed depending of its
shape. While scanning, the cameras record the shape and proceed to calculation.

563
HandySCAN 307 Connection
The scanner must be connected according to the following procedure to guarantee their physical
integrity and to avoid damaging any device.

Connection steps

 1. Plug the power supply to an electric source.

 2. Connect the power supply to the USB cable.

 3. Connect the USB cable in a USB 3 port of the computer.

 4. Connect the other extremity of the USB cable into the scanner.

564
 5. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

To disconnect the scanner, first unplug the power and the USB cables from the
scanner, afterward the sequence is up to the user.

565
HandySCAN 307 Calibration
Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to
the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An
annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The
calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to
fourteen positions represented by the 3 green indicators (3D viewer).

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets of the user calibration
plate.

To optimize the scanner calibration

 1. Click .

 2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter. Position the scanner at approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

 3. Press the trigger button to start.

 4. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the positions describe in the viewer.
Once 10 measurements are taken perpendicular to the plate, take 4 measurements at an angle
from it.

For the first 10 measurements, stay normal to the plate. Try to maintain the red indicator
of the top and left bars as centered as possible. As for the right bar, it goes up each time
a measurement is successfully taken.

For the last 4 measurements, move the scanner at an angle from the plate to match the
red indicator of the top, left and right bars as centered as possible in the green
rectangular. The blue circle indicator must be aligned on the green circle in the middle of
the user calibration plate as well the blue circle's cross must be aligned with the green
indicators.

 5. Click OK to accept the optimization.

566
Best practice suggests to perform calibration with the plate inside the case.

It is important to position the scanner lengthwise during the calibration


otherwise, the optimization will not work.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decal-
ibrated scanner:

Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, please contact Creaform Technical Support for further assistance.

Reset to the factory settings


It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

567
HandySCAN 3D Configuration
Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the con-
figuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The laser power and the
cameras shutter time according to the surface type should be set before scanning. Con-
figuration parameters can be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition pro-
cess, through the System panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the
Smart Control.
To configure the scanner

 1. Click .

 2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the
trigger button.

 3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

 a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the System panel so the laser
grid pattern is as yellow as possible.

 b. For parts having a uniform color or texture, click the Auto. adjust button and hold the
scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing Parameters message
disappears.

Laser grid pattern colors

Color Status

The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras. There
underexposed is not enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a
mesh.

568
Color Status

The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface calculation is done
optimal
under ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser
saturated lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface
reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise in the data.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

Right-click in the grey window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

Click the Save preset link.

To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

To activate a preset: Click the preset.

To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.60 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surface. A flat black
surface usually requires a higher shutter value.
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests to set
the shutter time value based on the surface color and finish, otherwise the scanning results will be
affected. We recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi-shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change
the shutter value, and finish the scan.

569
HandySCAN 3D Object Preparation
Positioning targets application and distribution

Each object must be prepared prior to scanning. Reflective targets must be affixed randomly with a
minimum distance of 20 mm (0.75 in) between them. For low curvature surface, the distance between
each target can reach 100 mm (4 in). Targets enable the system to position itself in space and must be
applied on flat surfaces, keeping at least 3 mm from the edges on every side.

Example of proper target distribution:

Shiny objects (or black, transparent, reflective)

For better results, any shiny, black, transparent or reflective (like mirrors or metallic surfaces) object
may need to be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.
 

Small surfaces

It may be harder to achieve proper target distribution on small surfaces or objects. It is recommended
to distribute targets on a surface (preferably black or dark and matte) and to place the object on this
surface. While scanning, the object and/or its environment should not be moved.

570
HandySCAN 307 Acquisition Rules
Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow the scanner distance indicated below.

Distance meter
While digitizing, a meter displayed on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between the
scanner and the object. The distance meter is also represented by 3 LEDs on top of the scanner.

 1. Red / Yellow LEDs to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward

 2. Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance

571
 3. Dark Blue / Light Blue LEDs to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward

 
The HandySCAN 3D scanners lose tracking when too close or too far from the object, either because
the cameras can no longer detect the retroreflective targets or because target distribution becomes
inappropriate.
If tracking is lost, we recommend repositioning the scanner in front of a previously scanned surface
and pressing the trigger again, or redistributing targets differently.

Field of view
The Field of View is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner field of view will not be acquired.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected.

Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
It is possible to scan at an angle. However, the accuracy of the positioning model will be better with
greater angles of incidence.
Cameras must be aligned so both cameras can detect the same laser line.

Preview mode

The Preview mode allows decreasing calculation time and seeing the final result rapidly without
stopping the scan completely.

572
HandySCAN 3D Previous Generation

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of


or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

 
The HandySCAN 3D portable laser scanners use triangulation and binocular vision. The HandySCAN 3D
scanner self-positions itself to a unique dynamic referencing system which ensures high measurement
repeatability and accuracy. The resulting 3D scan is perfectly scaled to be representative of the real
geometry and allows easy visualization of surface defects.
 

HandySCAN 700 HandySCAN 300

573
Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product.

Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the beam (direct
or reflected) can damage the retina.

Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

The use of controls, adjustments or procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire user manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.
 
 

Laser labels

The laser label reads:


LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
IEC 60825-1:2007
<1 mW 400-700nm
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

574
HandySCAN 3D Hardware and
Components
For HandySCAN 307, click here.

Hardware

575
 1. Software installer

 2. Power supply

 3. USB 3.0 cable

 4. Positioning targets

 5. HandySCAN 3D

 6. User calibration plate

 7. Target scraper (to remove targets)

Components

 1. Red LEDs

 2. Camera

 3. Laser

 4. Camera

576
HandySCAN 3D Multifunction Buttons

HandySCAN 3D

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click


Toggle Shutter speed /
1 Menu - -
Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode
Shutter speed mode Fast shutter speed
2 Increase shutter speed -
(+) increase
Toggle Fit to screen / Reset
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
viewpoint
Shutter speed mode Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
(-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
4 Trigger - Open or Exit scan mode -

HandySCAN 3D during acquisition


Button Function Click Click and hold Double click
Toggle Shutter speed /
1 Menu - -
Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode

577
Button Function Click Click and hold Double click
Shutter speed mode Fast shutter speed
2 Increase shutter speed -
(+) increase
Toggle Fit to screen / Reset
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
viewpoint
Shutter speed mode Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
(-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Toggle Laser cross / Single
4 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Exit scan mode
line*

* This feature is available only with HandySCAN 700.

578
HandySCAN 3D Operating Principles
Self-positioning 3D laser scanner
The HandySCAN 3D scanner does not require any external positioning system, since the part
positioning is determined by triangulation (in real time). The triangulation feature provides the scanner
position in volume and space.
The reference is related to the object, on which positioning targets are fixed. It is possible to move the
object during data acquisition.

Surface acquisition: real-time surface rendering


The surface generation is automatic. The laser projected on the object is deformed depending of its
shape. While scanning, the cameras record the shape and proceed to calculation.

579
HandySCAN 3D System Connection
The scanner must be connected according to the following procedure to guarantee their physical
integrity and to avoid damaging any device.

Connection steps

 1. Plug the power supply to an electric source.

 2. Connect the power supply to the USB cable.

 3. Connect the USB cable in a USB 3 port of the computer.

 4. Connect the other extremity of the USB cable into the scanner.

580
 5. Connect the power into the scanner.

You must first unplug the power and the USB cables from the scanner, afterward
the sequence is up to the user.

581
HandySCAN 3D Calibration
To optimize the scanner calibration

 1. Click .

 2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter. Position the scanner at approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

 3. Press the trigger button to start.

 4. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the positions describe in the viewer.
Once 10 measurements are taken perpendicular to the plate, take 4 measurements at an angle
from it.

For the first 10 measurements, stay normal to the plate. Try to maintain the red indicator
of the top and left bars as centered as possible. As for the right bar, it goes up each time
a measurement is successfully taken.

For the last 4 measurements, move the scanner at an angle from the plate to match the
red indicator of the top, left and right bars as centered as possible in the green
rectangular. The blue circle indicator must be aligned on the green circle in the middle of
the user calibration plate as well the blue circle's cross must be aligned with the green
indicators.

 5. Click OK to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests to perform calibration with the plate inside the case.

582
It is important to position the scanner lengthwise during the calibration
otherwise, the optimization will not work.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding to a decal-
ibrated scanner:

Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, please contact Creaform Technical Support for further assistance.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to
the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An
annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The
calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to
fourteen positions represented by the 3 green indicators (3D viewer).

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets of the user calibration
plate.

Reset to the factory settings


It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

583
HandySCAN 3D Configuration
Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the con-
figuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The laser power and the
cameras shutter time according to the surface type should be set before scanning. Con-
figuration parameters can be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition pro-
cess, through the System panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the
Smart Control.
To configure the scanner

 1. Click .

 2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the
trigger button.

 3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

 a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the System panel so the laser
grid pattern is as yellow as possible.

 b. For parts having a uniform color or texture, click the Auto. adjust button and hold the
scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing Parameters message
disappears.

Laser grid pattern colors

Color Status

The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras. There
underexposed is not enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a
mesh.

584
Color Status

The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface calculation is done
optimal
under ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser
saturated lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface
reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise in the data.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

Right-click in the grey window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

Click the Save preset link.

To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

To activate a preset: Click the preset.

To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.60 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surface. A flat black
surface usually requires a higher shutter value.
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests to set
the shutter time value based on the surface color and finish, otherwise the scanning results will be
affected. We recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi-shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change
the shutter value, and finish the scan.

585
HandySCAN 3D Object Preparation
Positioning targets application and distribution

Each object must be prepared prior to scanning. Reflective targets must be affixed randomly with a
minimum distance of 20 mm (0.75 in) between them. For low curvature surface, the distance between
each target can reach 100 mm (4 in). Targets enable the system to position itself in space and must be
applied on flat surfaces, keeping at least 3 mm from the edges on every side.

Example of proper target distribution:

Shiny objects (or black, transparent, reflective)

For better results, any shiny, black, transparent or reflective (like mirrors or metallic surfaces) object
may need to be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.
 

Small surfaces

It may be harder to achieve proper target distribution on small surfaces or objects. It is recommended
to distribute targets on a surface (preferably black or dark and matte) and to place the object on this
surface. While scanning, the object and/or its environment should not be moved.

586
HandySCAN 3D Acquisition Rules
For HandySCAN 307, click here.

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow the scanner distance indicated below.

Distance meter
While digitizing, a meter displayed on the left-hand side of the screen indicates the distance between
the scanner and the object. The distance meter is also represented by 3 LEDs on top of the scanner.

587
 1. Red / Yellow LEDs to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward

 2. Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance

 3. Dark Blue / Light Blue LEDs to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward

 
The HandySCAN 3D scanners lose tracking when too close or too far from the object, either because
the cameras can no longer detect the retroreflective targets or because target distribution becomes
inappropriate.
If tracking is lost, we recommend repositioning the scanner in front of a previously scanned surface
and pressing the trigger again, or redistributing targets differently.

Field of view
The Field of View is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner field of view will not be acquired.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected.

Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
It is possible to scan at an angle. However, the accuracy of the positioning model will be better with
greater angles of incidence.
Cameras must be aligned so both cameras can detect the same laser line.

Single laser line mode


To capture data, the laser line does not have to be detected by both cameras. This mode allows
capturing deeper data than previously. This mode is only available with HandySCAN 700.
This method is only used for surfaces not acquired with laser crosses mode.

Preview mode

The Preview mode allows decreasing calculation time and seeing the final result rapidly without
stopping the scan completely.

588
Smart Control
The Smart Control allows to control the software using multifunction buttons in Classic mode only.
Smart Control in Pipecheck
Go!SCAN SPARK multifunction buttons
HandySCAN BLACK multifunction buttons
HandySCAN 307 multifunction buttons
HandySCAN 3D multifunction buttons

589
Smart Control in Pipecheck
General options

Icon Name Description

Calibration To launch the scanner calibration.

Auto. adjust To launch the configuration mode in auto. adjust

F11 Full screen mode To activate the full screen mode.

To display the entire scan data in the center of the 3D


Fit to screen
viewer.

To bring the viewpoint to the position it had at the end of


Reset viewpoint
the last acquisition.

590
Go!SCAN SPARK Multifunction Buttons
The scanner comprises a set of 3 buttons on each side. Either set can be used to access functions in
scan mode and out of scan mode. Buttons 1 and 2 are used to adjust zoom. Button 3 (trigger) is used
to accept a function or message.

Scanner status light colors

Color Scanner status


  recording
  ready for acquisition
  connected

 
Go!SCAN SPARK

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click


1 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in Toggle Fit to screen / Reset viewpoint
2 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out Toggle Lock / Unlock viewpoint
3 Trigger - Start or Exit scan mode -

591
 
Go!SCAN SPARK during acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click


1 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in Toggle Fit to screen / Reset viewpoint
2 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out Toggle Lock / Unlock viewpoint
Start or Stop
3 Trigger Stop scan mode -
projector

592
HandySCAN BLACK Multifunction Buttons
The scanner comprises buttons having different functions in scan mode and out of scan mode. The
trigger button is the central button used to accept a function or message. Its main function is to start,
pause, or stopstart, pause, or stop the acquisition process. It is also used to toggle between the single
laser line mode and laser cross mode (option only available with HandySCAN BLACK | Elite). Buttons 2
to 5 are used to adjust zoom and shutter and to navigate in the Smart Control.

Trigger button [1] light colors


Color Scanner status
  recording
  connected
  ready for acquisition

593
HandySCAN BLACK
Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click
1 Trigger - Open or Exit scan mode -
Toggle Fit to screen / Reset
2 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
viewpoint
3 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out Toggle Lock / Unlock viewpoint
Shutter Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
4 -
speed speed decrease
Shutter Fast shutter speed
5 Increase shutter speed -
speed increase
Smart Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
6* -
Control mode mode

* Only available in the Classic mode.

HandySCAN BLACK during acquisition


Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click
1 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Exit scan mode Toggle Laser cross / Single line*
Toggle Fit to screen / Reset
2 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
viewpoint
3 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out Toggle Lock / Unlock viewpoint
Shutter Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
4 -
speed speed decrease
Shutter Fast shutter speed
5 Increase shutter speed -
speed increase
Smart Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
6* -
Control mode mode

* Only available in the Classic mode.

* This feature is only available with HandySCAN BLACK | Elite.

594
HandySCAN 307 Multifunction Buttons

HandySCAN 307

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click


Toggle Shutter speed /
1 Menu - -
Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode
Shutter speed mode Fast shutter speed
2 Increase shutter speed -
(+) increase
Toggle Fit to screen / Reset
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
viewpoint
Shutter speed mode Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
(-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
4 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Open or Exit scan mode -

595
HandySCAN 3D Multifunction Buttons

HandySCAN 3D

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click


Toggle Shutter speed /
1 Menu - -
Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode
Shutter speed mode Fast shutter speed
2 Increase shutter speed -
(+) increase
Toggle Fit to screen / Reset
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
viewpoint
Shutter speed mode Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
(-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
4 Trigger - Open or Exit scan mode -

HandySCAN 3D during acquisition


Button Function Click Click and hold Double click
Toggle Shutter speed /
1 Menu - -
Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode

596
Button Function Click Click and hold Double click
Shutter speed mode Fast shutter speed
2 Increase shutter speed -
(+) increase
Toggle Fit to screen / Reset
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
viewpoint
Shutter speed mode Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
(-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Toggle Laser cross / Single
4 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Exit scan mode
line*

* This feature is available only with HandySCAN 700.

597
Accessories
Some accessories are needed to use a device or suitable to optimize its the performance.
Creaform Portable Workstation
Light Field Pack
Field Pack
Targets and reflectors

598
Creaform Portable Workstation

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of


or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The Creaform Portable Workstation is designed to provide flexibility and mobility to users. This useful
workstation also allows to carry all required equipment in 1 carrying case.

Components

599
 1. Carrying handle

 2. Desk unit

 3. Storage space: cables

 4. Storage space: VXremote tablet and support

 5. Stabilizer leg

 6. Side shelves (left and right)

 7. Calibration plate storage drawer: additional storage space behind

 8. Computer storage space

 9. Scanner storage space

 10. Storage space: reference arrow

600
 11. Storage space: magnetic scanner support

 12. Magnetic support (not illustrated)

Weight and dimensions


Weight Dimensions

32 kg (70 lbs) fully loaded with equipment (computer, scanner,


calibration plate, scanner stand, VXremote tablet and stand, etc.) 864 mm (34") x 458 mm
(18") x 610 mm (24")
27 kg (60 lbs) empty

Set up

 1. Pull the carrying handle (1)* to move the Creaform Portable Workstation.

 2. Lay down the carrying case and unfold the bottom door hinge.

 3. Rotate the stabilizer leg (5)* to make the Creaform Portable Workstation stable once it stands
upright.

 4. Tilt carefully the workstation upright.

 5. Unfold the 4 other door hinges to open the carrying case door (1 on top and 3 on the door
side).

 6. Pull out the desk unit using the drawer handle (blue) and lift it off.

 7. Align the desk unit with the carrying handle (1)*, and drop it on the top of the carrying case.

 8. Lower the desk unit until the latches stick to the brackets and snaps into place.

 9. Open the side shelves (6)* of the desk unit using the openings provided for this purpose. Magnets
ensure them to be securely fastened.

* Refer to Components section.

The side shelves are designed to hold the mouse or lightweight objects; do not
lean on them or put heavy objects on them.
Be careful if placing the scanner on top of the shelves; the scanner could fall if the
Creaform Portable Workstation is hit and/or the cables are pulled. It is not
recommended to put the scanner on the shelves on unstable ground.
For pipeline work, it is recommended to place the scanner on the dedicated
magnetic support and not on the shelves.

Connection

601
 1. Remove the top of the desk unit using the press button to access the storage space.

 2. Install the scanner power supply adapter and wrap cables using the cord wraps (A).

 3. Place the computer power supply adapter and wrap cables using the cord wraps (B).

 4. Pull out cables through the desk unit opening for this purpose (C).

 5. Connect the power cables (scanner and computer) using the opening for this purpose (D).

 6. Replace the top of the desk unit. Make sure that no cable obstructs the side shelves and that the

602
spring plunger clicks into place.

 7. Insert the scanner repeater in its holder located at the back of the desk unit (E).

The power supply adapters installed in the desk unit(steps 2 and 3) can be left
permanently in place.

Scanner calibration

 1. Gently pull out the Calibration plate storage drawer (A).

 2. Open the calibration plate cover (B).

 3. Calibrate the scanner (see the corresponding scanner calibration section).

The calibration plate is held in place with Velcro tape. Therefore, it is possible to
change its orientation to ease the calibration process. It needs to be put back in
its storage orientation before closing the drawer.

 4. Once the calibration is finished, put the calibration plate back in place and close the carrying case
door.

 5. Scan.

603
Light Field Pack

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of


or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The Light Field Pack allows to offer an optimal use of the HandySCAN BLACK in the field.

The Light Field Pack provides power to the scanner only. The computer will need
its own battery or must be plugged in.

Components
The Light Field Pack includes:

24V or 18V rechargeable battery

Charger

Charger power cable

Autonomy
Scanner Battery autonomy *
HandySCAN BLACK 8 hours

* Estimated battery autonomy of uninterrupted scan.

The battery autonomy time may vary depending on the state of the battery.

To connect the battery to the scanner

 1. Connect the longer cable of the battery to the USB 3.0 cable.

604
 2. Connect the USB 3.0 cable to the computer.

 3. Connect the other extremity of the 3.0 USB cable into the scanner.

 4. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

To recharge the battery

 1. Plug the charger power supply cable to an electric source.

 2. Connect the cable of the Light Field Pack (female connector) to the cable of the charger (male
connector ).

Charger indicators
Indicator Meaning
Flash green light The battery is charging.

Solid green light The battery has completed its charge.


Error condition(s):

The charger microprocessor cannot communicate with the


Solid red light battery, or

The charger microprocessor cannot communicate with the


internal battery charger engine.

The battery contains a fuel gauge to indicate its relative state of charge. The battery LCD flashes to
indicate charging.

Battery charge time


The recharge time of the battery is about 3 hours.

The recharge time may vary depending on the state of the battery.

605
Field Pack

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of


or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

Components

 1. Workstation
Protective case

 2. Tripod

Dolly for Tripod (optional)

 3. Computer and accessories

Certified laptop computer

Wireless mouse

Certified Wireless tablet

Tablet magnetic support

Tablet charger

606
 4. Scanner accessories

USB 3.0 cable

Scanner magnetic stand

 5. Power source


AC power cable

Creaform battery pack with charger (AC power cable) and battery cable

Booster cable (optional)

607
 1. Scanner USB 3.0 cable

 2. Tablet charger

 3. AC power cable (2x)

 4. Battery cable

 5. Booster cable (purchased separately)

Set up
Connect your scanner following these steps to avoid any damage:

Workstation

 1. Install the tripod by pushing deeply all 3 feet into the ground. If installed on a
floor, use the strap to prevent the legs from spreading out.
 2. Place the protective case on the tripod; use the circular extrusion under the
casing to center the latter on the tripod.
 3. Use the threaded knob located below the head of the tripod to firmly fix the
casing on it.
 4. Open the protective case.
 5. Open up the trays and lift up the panel that holds the computer, using the
handle, and remove the items out of the protective case.

608
Protective case contents
Cables
Wireless tablet
magnetic support
Wireless mouse
Scanner magnetic
support

Connection

 1. AC POWER IN
 2. AC/DC power source switch
 3. DC POWER IN
 4. Safety fuse
 5. Scanner power source
 6. Scanner cable holder

 
Orient the power switch towards your computer and scanner power source.

609
AC power:

 1. Plug the power cable in the AC POWER IN connector.


 2. Plug the other end in an AC power source (100-240VAC 50/60Hz 3A) like a wall power
outlet or a power generator.
 3. Turn the AC/DC power source switch towards the AC POWER IN connector on the Field
Pack panel.

DC power

 1. Plug the battery cable in the DC POWER IN connector on the Field Pack board.
 2. Plug the other end in the Creaform battery POWER OUT connector (12VDC-12A).
 3. Turn the AC/DC power source switch towards the DC POWER IN connector on the Field
Pack panel.
 4. Turn the battery switch towards POWER OUT connector.

Creaform battery

The battery fuse is screwed off prior to shipping and covered with tape.
Remove the tape and push down the fuse with a slotted screwdriver, and turn it clockwise. One of the
battery watch LED should light up indicating the battery's remaining capacity. At this point, it is
recommended charging the battery.
The battery has 8-hour autonomy.
To charge it from an AC power source:

 1. Plug the power cable in the CHARGER POWER IN connector and orient the power switch
towards it

610
 2. While charging, the 3 battery LEDs will light up in sequence

Slow sequence: battery is charging under normal conditions

Fast sequence with a beep sound: the battery is fully charged

Status of LEDs and buzzer


Description State
Green Full charge
Green + Yellow Slight undercharge
Yellow Half charge
Yellow+Red Minimal charge
Red Discharge

To lengthen the battery lifetime (± 5 years):

The battery should be charged at least every 2 months to prevent permanent damages from dis-
charge.

The best practice would be to leave the battery plugged all the time when it is not in use. There
is no danger in overcharging batteries when they are plugged.

As the lifespan of a battery is about 5 years, it is normal to replace it after this period.

Car battery
As a backup option, you can power up the Field Pack with any 12V car battery. You must first purchase
the booster cable.

 1. Connect the Creaform battery cable to the field pack DC POWER IN connector and
make sure the power switch is in the appropriate position.
 2. Join the booster cable to the other end of the battery cable to be able to reach your
car.
 3. Fix the red clamp to the car battery's red port (+).
 4. Position the black clamp to the car battery's black port (-).

611
 

Scanner

 1. Connect the 8 m USB 3.0 cable to the USB 3.0 port on the right of the computer.

 2. Connect the cable to the scanner power source on the Field pack panel.

 3. Connect the other ends to the scanner.

612
Charging the wireless tablet
Use the tablet charger and plug it from a direct AC power source.

Mounting and unmounting the computer on the protective case


The computer is permanently fixed on a removable plate with heavy-duty Velcro strips. It can be
removed in an out of the protective case’s shelf.

Mounting

 1. Put the computer on the plate

 2. Hold the pin, slide the computer and the plate at the back of the Field Pack to ensure the 4
screws are completely inserted on the slots

 3. Insert the pin located behind the computer

 4. Plug all cables to the computer, including the power supply

Unmounting

 1. Unplug all the cables connected to the computer, including the power supply

 2. Pull the pin located behind the computer

 3. While holding the pin, slide the computer and the plate toward the front of the Field Pack until
the 4 screws head are out of the slots and in the larger hole.

 4. Lift the computer and the plate out

613
Computer installation
The Field Pack is designed to fit with Creaform certified computer - HP Zbook and its predecessor HP
Elitebook 8570w.
If you plan to use your own computer with the Field Pack, follow the steps below to fix it in the
protective case.
The installation of the computer is PERMANENT and involves a rugged clamping system with heavy-
duty Velcro strips to an detachable plate. Contact Creaform Technical Support if it has to be removed.

 1. Open the Field Pack casing lid and both side panels.

 2. Place the computer on the 2 Velcro strips of the center shelf which will hold it in place once in
the Field Pack.

 3. Remove the protective film off the Velcro strips. *Do not place your computer on the shelf*.

 4. While holding the computer, connect it to the power supply.

614
 5. Maintaining the power supply connected, align the computer on the detachable plate and place
it on the shelf.

 6. Push firmly to fix the Velcro strips together.

615
Targets
Several accessories are available, some are optional, other compulsory depending on the technology.
Contact the Sales Support for more information.
 

Positioning targets

Size  

6 mm black contour

Type  

Adhesive

Light Adhesive

Super Adhesive

Magnetic

Coded targets

Magnetic coded targets are designed to build a tracking model while using with the module. In pho-
togrammetry, they can also be used to create a positioning model with the system.

616
VXremote Application
VXremote is a remote desktop application which allows to share and control a
computer in real-time on a Creaform certified tablet using a Wi-Fi wireless network.

This application is particularly useful when scanning large objects far from the computer. Using the
Touchscreen 3D Navigation Modes, operations can be performed from a tablet while being away
from the computer.
Installation
Configuration
Using VXremote
Touchscreen 3D navigation modes
Troubleshooting

617
VXremote Installation
VXremote must be installed at the same time of the software.

To install VXremote

VXremote access software application.


The feature will be installed on local hard drive.
The feature and all subfeatures will be installed on local hard drive.
The feature will not be available.

When installed, the VXremote icon appears in the main toolbar.

Make sure to use VXremote with a Creaform certified tablet.

The button remains inactive until VXremote is enabled in the configuration


options. Please see VXremote Configuration for more details.

618
VXremote Configuration
Configuration in Pipecheck
VXremote activation can be done through the general options (Configure | Options | VXremote).

 1. Select Enable VXremote option.

 2. Create a local Network SSID along with Security key of your choice to access it. The security key
must be a minimum of 8 characters and include at least 1 uppercase letter, 1 lower case letter
and 1 digit.

Example
Network SSID: Pipecheck123
Security key: Pipecheck123

 3. Click OK.

Configuration in Splashtop

To change the Splashtop Streamer security code


Splashtop Streamer is an external application installed automatically along with VXremote. It allows to
stream and control the content of Pipecheck from a tablet.

The computer bought along with Creaform certified tablet is already configured
properly and do not require these configuration steps.

On the computer

 1. Click Splashtop Streamer icon in the Notification area from the task bar. If the icon is not available
in the task bar, search for the Splashtop Streamer application thought the Windows Start menu
and launch it.

 2. Under the Security tab:

 a. Select the Require security code option.

 b. Enter a personalized security code under Create your security code and confirm it under
Confirm your security code.

For simplicity, it is suggested to enter the same security information as in


the software configuration options.

619
On the tablet

To configure the tablet, VXremote must first be launched from the software toolbar by clicking .
This will create the wireless network.

The icon will be grayed out if VXremote is not installed or enabled.

 1. Connect to the network SSID created

 a. Open the Settings application on the tablet.

 b. Under Wi-Fi tab, make sure it is activated and connected to the network SSID by entering
the password.

 2. VXremote is launched automatically.

 3. Select the computer name to connect.

 4. Enter the Splashtop Streamer security code.

 5. Select Remember security code option.

 6. Click OK.

The tablet is configured and provided by Creaform for the specific use of
Pipecheck. To connect to another network, or make any other use with the tablet,
user must know its configuration and refer to the specific instructions of the
tablet.

620
Using VXremote
Once the configuration is done, user can connect VXremote.

Typical connection

 1. Make sure the Wi-Fi is activated on the tablet for the connection to occur.

 2. Click on the VXremote button in the main toolbar to launch the wireless network.

 3. The tablet will automatically connect to the Wi-Fi and launch VXremote.

Specific connection with a HP Zbook G3/G5 computer (Windows 10) with Pipecheck
5.1.1 and later versions

 1. In the VXremote options (Configure | Options), select Use WiFi direct option.

 2. Disconnect from any Wi-Fi network.

 3. Follow the typical connection steps

Specific connection with a HP Zbook G3/G5 computer (Windows 10) with Pipecheck
5.1.0 and earlier versions

A USB Wi-Fi adaptor is required (provided with the HP Zbook G3/G5 and
VXremote).

 1. Connect the Wi-Fi dongle for VXremote in a USB port.

Windows 10 will automatically installs the device drivers. If not, it is possible to


install the drivers using the material provided with the Wi-Fi card.

 2. Disable the laptop Wi-Fi card (Intel Dual Band Wireless):

 a. Right-click on the internet connection icon of the task manager bar of the computer and
select Open Network and Sharing Center .

 b. Click Change adapter settings in the left section of the Network and Sharing Center window.

 c. Right-click on the laptop Wi-Fi card and select Disable.

 3. Enable the dongle Wi-Fi card (USB Wireless LAN card):

 a. Right-click on the dongle Wi-Fi card and select Enable.

 4. Follow the typical connection steps.

 5. To use the computer Wi-Fi card again, follow step 2 and enable the card.

621
''vx'' will appear in front of the SSID name defined in the general options (i.e.
ABCinc will appear as vxABCinc).

Network changes and update


If the SSID network name and/or security key change, the user must reconfigure the tablet.
If a different version of VXremote is installed on the tablet and the computer, VXremote will prompt the
installation update. Click the Install button displayed on the table for the update to occur.
Once the update is completed, VXremote will normally launch and the computer display will appear on
the tablet, ready to be used.

622
VXremote Touchscreen 3D Navigation
Modes
The 3D Navigation Mode allows controlling the 3D viewer from a tablet. The cursor can be controlled
using 2 different modes: cursor control and trackpad mode..

Cursor control
The mouse cursor follows the same position as the finger moving along the tablet screen. When the
cursor control is activated, a small mouse sign is displayed at the bottom of the tablet screen.

Trackpad mode
The tablet touchscreen will behave as a trackpad that controls the mouse cursor (similar as a laptop
touchpad).

To switch from one to other, simultaneously tap with 2 fingers on the tablet
screen.

Mouse Command Cursor Control Trackpad Mode


Left click Tap with 1 finger on the screen Click on the left button at the bottom of the screen
Right click Tap and hold with 1 finger Click on the right button at the bottom of the screen

Drag Drag the finger along the screen Double tap, hold and drag the finger along the screen

Pan and rotate buttons

The Pan and Rotate buttons control the mouse function (lower left corner of the 3D viewer). When
activated, the function button is displayed in yellow.

Pan button activated: the Drag command will move the 3D model in the viewer.

Rotate button activated: the Drag command will rotate the 3D model in the viewer.

3D Scene zoom bar


To zoom the 3D viewer in and out, press respectively the plus or minus button, or drag up or down in

623
the zoom bar.

It is possible to zoom in an area of the screen (not only the 3D viewer) by slightly
pinch 2 fingers, as with any touchscreen device.

Keyboard
The tablet keyboard is accessible by clicking on the Keyboard button on the lower right corner of the
screen.

624
VXremote Troubleshooting
Is VXremote enabled?

 1. In the Main menu, select Configure | Options.

 2. Select the VXremote tab.

 3. Check Enable VXremote box.

 4. Enter the Network SSID and Security Key information.

Is the wireless enabled?

On the Computer
Make sure the Wi-Fi option is enabled.

On the Tablet

Option 1
The home screen widget shortcut allows toggling the wireless On/Off. The line under the wireless
symbol becomes blue when enabled.

Option 2
Open the Settings option.
Under Wireless & Networks, make sure the wireless is ON.

Is the computer already connected to another wireless connection?


If an error message saying VXremote cannot be started is displayed, go to the Wireless Network
through the Notification Icon in the task bar and disconnect any connected wireless network.

Is the tablet connected to another wireless connection?


To disconnect from another wireless connection, follow these steps:

 1. Open the Settings application on the tablet.

 2. Select Wireless & Networks and tap once on the connected wireless network.

 3. Select Forget to disconnect the wireless network.

Does VXremote display Wrong Security Code message?


Configure the security code of Splashtop Streamer on the computer by following the steps in the con-
figuration section.

Tablet black screen


The computer video card drivers must be updated. Contact technical support for more information.

625

You might also like